Home
CAS-1000-12C/E User`s Manual
Contents
1. 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled LL AN Eile Trace Tools Window Help a x oh phil SS 2a xa YR AS Wo Sa aaen Gi 17 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 843 1 lal 18 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1A 1 884 1 Monitor 19 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 70 1 909 1 SR 20 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 AE 1 935 1 21 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 45 1 960 0 d l 22 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 72 1 986 0 Debugger 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 49 2 011 D 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2037 0 F 25 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2062 0 IECH 26 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 79 2 088 0 Programmer 27 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 11 2113 0 28 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2138 0 29 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2 164 0 30 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 27 2 189 0 31 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 9A 2215 0 32 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 AF 2 241 0 33 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2265 0 34 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 12 2253 1 35 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 2 476 1 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1c 2 632 1 37 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 DONE 2730 1 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 3 441 1 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 17 3 469 1 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 5D 3494 1 S Line 16 Interval A to B 9 422762 ms Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 01
2. Normal Mode Compact Mode SMBus Mode 14 IC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Lola AN Eile Trace Tools Window Help S W bhi SS Ga xa YE AcE o x Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RW NAK Eror KHz eh 102 Data Byte Bin Time us R 1 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 D E 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 00011110 28 Audi 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 01011100 53 E Monitor 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 u 00110100 78 Sam 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 3 00001010 104 ma 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 287 G Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 01010001 443 Debugger 8 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 14 1 00011100 541 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1 252 E 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 00111110 1 280 E 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 1 1 1 464 Programmer 12 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 1 522 13 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 00101110 1 550 14 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 11110001 1 575 15 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 1 1 00001011 1 601 E EES no ne ee D 17 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1 843 18 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 00011010 1 884 19 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 1 1 01110000 1 909 20 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 1 1 01001111 1 935 21 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 010
3. m T Ge X ym o Wa I x Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us WO a 22 Tagged Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 72 1986 o ee 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 49 Find SS il 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F Monitor 25 Data Analyzer DAC pn Read 400 4F 26 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 79 es ag Findnext 1 cose E 27 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 11 28 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F Transfer 8 Debugger 29 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 AE E bes Gs any 30 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 27 E 31 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 9A Addr Any Beare any mea 32 Data Analyzer DAC pn Read 400 AF Ss SE rs Programmer 33 Data Analyzer DAC pn Read 400 4F AddrType Any v 101 any Ihe 34 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 12 SEN 35 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 407 RW Any Is Up 7 any 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1c Data Byte 37 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 DONE Pera SE 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 Hex 72 postion Aa Je 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 7 T 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 5D too wie faasea 41 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 35 42 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 OF Load From Selected Monitor Trace Line Defeuits 43 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 Ge Dat
4. Description Sets the specified discrete UO line if configured as an output to the ow state for a period of milliseconds before restoring it to the high state Script execution will pause during this time period Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype pulse_discrete nDiscreteNumber nMilliseconds Example Call pulse_discrete 1 500 pulse discrete signal 1 for 500 msecs Input Parameters nDiscreteNumber Integer indicating the discrete line to pulse 1 or 2 nMilliseconds Integer representing the amount of time in milliseconds to pulse Return Values TRUE successfully pulsed FALSE unsuccessful or selected discrete not configured as output 314 Scripting Language random integer Description Generates and returns a pseudorandom number This function generates a pseudorandom integer in the range 0 to 32767 Use the seed_random function to seed the pseudorandom number generator before calling this function Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype random_integer Example Call print out 10 random numbers between 0 and 32767 seed_random 1234 for i 0 i lt 10 i print random_integer print n Input Parameters None Return Value The pseudorandom integer value Scripting Language 315 receive message Description Receives a message ie performs a read operation of specified length from the specified target
5. Toggle Bookmark 3 Next Bookmark A Previous Bookmark Clear Bookmarks gh Eind A 3 ie Replace Figure 187 Emulated Slave Edit Menu Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation Redo Restores a previously undone editing operation Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at the line where the cursor is located or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the file Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the file Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the listing Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current file is searched for the specified text and if found that text is brought into view and highlighted Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of interest is entered along with the replacement text The
6. TRUE comparison is true FALSE comparison is false Scripting Language 295 Specification Table Files Specification table files are simple text files based on the Windows INI file format They consist of a section label main followed by a list of variable names and assigned values Comments can be included in the file by preceding text with a semicolon The following is an example of a specification table file 7 SpecTable spec comment main section label VoltageMax 3 50 variable assignments VoltageMin 3 00 296 Scripting Language disable tx tracking Description Turns off the transmission tracking feature which tracks and verifies transactions generated by the analyzer By default the transaction tracking is enabled at the start of every script run session You may use this function to turn off the feature While the tracking is enabled the read or write transaction generated by the CAS 1000 is tracked until the result is captured and returned by the Monitor If the Monitor is unable to capture the matching transaction from the bus within 2 seconds the transactions will be timed out Also if the target slave is not responding to the address sent the returning string of the send_message and receive_message functions will indicate that the address is NAK d Since the send_message and receive_message functions wait until the resul
7. 1 Start the DC Exerciser application with the CAS 1000 connected to the host PC Do not attach the target 2 Open up the Glitch Pattern Editor by selecting the Glitch Pattern Editor menu item from the Tools menu You will see a default pattern which is SDA pulled low for 200 ns starting after an 80 ns delay You will also notice that the frequency of the clock is set to 25 MHz which makes the clock period 40 ns At the bottom middle part of the window you will see the Glitch Injection Trigger Setup area which by default specifies the triggering condition to be a SDA rising edge during a data cycle The Glitch Pattern Editor with default settings is shown in Figure 211 Glitch Pattern Injection 355 Bonn Pattern Editor Untitled ono 320 0 640 0 960 0 ns ns ns Glitch Injection Trigger Setup Zoom B on Se OFF f Address Data SCL SDA gt START 5 STOP P RE START Sr ACK NAK Edge Direction Trigger Now Frequency Figure 211 Default Glitch Pattern Setting 3 Now start the Monitor tool by pressing the F11 key Click on the Yes and Close buttons if prompt for voltage settings Minimize the Run Status dialog 4 Inthe Glitch Pattern Editor window click on the Arm Trigger button to arm the trigger for glitch injection Click on the OK button if a warning comes up 5 Start the Debugger tool by clicking on the Tools menu and selecting the Debugger menu item Using the Debugger generate so
8. in the Timing Field Cursor B Changes the text and background color of the cursor marked B in the Timing Field Timing View Changes the color of the SDA and SCL signals in the Timing Field Other Specifies one of the three coloring schemes e No color no coloring of messages e Alternate color per message default each complete transaction is grouped together in one color the color alternates between adjacent messages e Alternate color per row alternates the color between adjacent rows Alternately the user can select the two alternating colors for adjacent messages both the text and background color if a coloring scheme is selected 120 Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor Options This pane enables the altering of preferences for the layout and style of data in the Monitor window Preferences e Line Column Starting from 1 default Trigger is line 0 Timestamp Start a Starting from 0 default C Trigger is time 0 Timestamp Display Absolute C Relative to last Other Options V Prompt for saving trace data prior to CLEAR or RUN V Lock Timing with Trace Lock to Top Listing Line Lock to Selected Listing Line START Hold Time Checking Minimum Hold Time 0 16 us M Use Defaults Figure 117 Monitor Options Pane Line Column Sets the numbering of entries in the trace list to start from one at the first entry default or start from zero at the trigger with earlier transactions
9. 4 while string_compare strResult Address byte NAKed 0 45 update progress bar 66 46 progress 66 48 read back bytes from page 0 49 send_message nAddr b10Bit PAGE FALSE 50 strInBytes receive_message nAddr FALSE 5 TRUE Se Figure 203 Editor Window Script File Text Area Contains an editable listing of the script file content Syntax highlighting is applied to the script text so that keywords are colored blue comments are colored green and names of built in functions are colored maroon The typical Windows style methods of highlighting sections of text are fully supported including drag and drop and cut and paste methods in addition to the standard text editing shortcut key combinations Right clicking in this text area will display the Editor Popup Menu enabling manipulation of bookmarks as well as editing operations The Editor Popup Menu is described in the next section Left hand Gutter Displays line numbers and special line indicators The following icons can appear CC _ Indicates a bookmark Indicates a line near a syntax error Often the syntax error can be located on the line immediately above this indicator 344 Scripting Language Editor Popup Menu The Editor Popup Menu is accessed by right clicking in the text area of the Editor window It enables manipulation of bookmarks as well as editing operations The menu is shown in Figure 204 followed by descriptions of the available co
10. Addr Displays the bus address of the related message This column can be displayed in hexadecimal decimal or binary format The display format is shown in parenthesis in the column heading AddrType Identifies the address type as the protocol defined 7 bit 10 bit or Hs mode Note that for 7 bit addresses displayed in hex format DC Exerciser can present a given address value in one of two formats based on the users preference In 7F format mode addresses are displayed with the seven address bits shown as right justified in the hex byte value with the MSB always being zero In FE format mode the addresses are displayed with the seven address bits shown as left justified in the hex byte value with the LSB always being zero For example given a binary address of 0011010 the hex representation in 7F format would be 1A while in FE format it would be 34 Both of these formats are encountered in the I C world and the 12C Exerciser application is flexible enough to use either format The currently active mode is reflected in the lower corner of the DC Exerciser status bar AddrFormat FE or AddrFormat 7F as shown in Figure 31 C AutoFit Line DEMO AddrFormat FE Trace Off Figure 31 DC Exerciser Status Bar 34 Getting Started R W Displays the read write direction of data flow relative to the master R read from a slave W write toward a slave NAK Blank for normal ACK responses or will indicate NAK when the cy
11. I2C_Receive_Data I2C_ReloadGlitch I2C_SendData I2C_SendDataPEC I2C_SenseDiscrete I2C_SetBusDriveVoltage I2C_SetBusHighVoltageThreshold I2C_SetBusLowVoltageThreshold I2C_SetBusPullupResistance I2C_SetBusVoltageSource T2C_SetClockRate I2C_SetDiscrete Third Party Application Interface Overwrites several configuration parameters relating to configuring the two discrete I O lines Enables an analyzer mode which ignores bus collision conditions when it is driving the bus Debugger Send or Master Emulation or Test Reports supplemental status of the most recent call to an API function Reports supplemental status of the most recent call to I2C_Receive_Data or I2C_Send_Data Confirms CAS 1000 I2C status and establishes default initial conditions Injects previously immediately loaded glitch pattern to the target bus Loads the glitch pattern information from a file to the analyzer Reloads all previously stored setup parameters from a project file Performs a specified measurement on the 12C bus Pulses one of the discrete I O signals low for a given period of time Conveys a message from the I C bus for a given address Reloads previously loaded glitch pattern data to the analyzer Conveys a message to the 1 C bus for a given address Conveys a message to the DC bus for a given address with a SMBus Packet Error Checking PEC byte Reads the level of one of the discrete UO signals
12. Recent Files Provides a list of recently used project files for quick access Exit Terminates the I2C Exerciser application 124 Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor Trace Menu The Trace menu as shown in Figure 121 is used to access various trace buffer functions including run stop control buffer navigation data layout and display formats filter and trigger management setup and clearing of trace data or line tags These menu entries are described below Run Stop gt Go To W View D X lt Clear Trace Data 3 Clear All Tags Bj Hide Monitor Timing YW Filters Te Trigger Symbols th Find Ctrl F t Trace Layout Figure 121 Monitor Trace Menu Run Stop This selection will cause the trace buffer run stop control submenu to appear as shown in Figure 122 Go To This selection will cause the trace buffer navigation control submenu to appear as shown in Figure 124 View This selection will cause the data view mode control submenu to appear as shown in Figure 125 Clear Trace Data Deletes all of the trace buffer contents and clears the trace list and timing display If the current data has not yet been saved you will be prompted to save it This prompt can be disabled from the Tools Preferences Monitor Options window Clear All Tags Removes the tagged status for all lines in the trace buffer Hide Show Monitor Timing Toggles the visibility status of the timing display If y
13. Refer to the Monitor Options section of the Preferences Dialog description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter 108 Bus Traffic Monitor Timing Field The timing field located in the bottom portion of the Monitor window provides a graphical image of bus signal edge transitions over time This information is similar to that acquired by logic analyzers showing the state progression of clock SCL and data SDA signals Figure 108 shows the Monitor timing field with its major components labeled These labeled areas are described below Inter cursor time Field and Bit descriptors Scale controls Line controls Link Edge Marker 10psidiv Clautorit Line op Te Irkerval A to E 25 349 ps H SC e eee deit emile an Sea ta Eet WE E E E ae ee SDA and SCL waveforms Scroll bar Cross hairs position time and line Figure 108 Monitor Timing Field Component Descriptions Field Descriptors This row of the timing display indicates the protocol segment of the waveform The following labels are used e Addr Designates the address cycle during which target slave address bits are conveyed along with the transfer direction indicator bit e Data Designates the data cycle during which data bytes are conveyed to and from a slave e Idle Designates the occurrence of a STOP condition placing the C bus in an idle state Bit Descriptors This
14. str2 Substring to search for Return Value A string starting with the first occurrence of the substring st r2 in the base string str1 and ending with the remainder of the base string Empty string if the substring st r2 is not found 336 Scripting Language string to float Description Coverts a string decimal representation of a floating point value into a floating point output Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype string to float strValue Example Call strVal 3 14 Val string to float strVal Input Parameters strValue The string decimal representation to convert to a float Return Value The floating point value represented by the input string Scripting Language 337 string Co integer Description Converts a string decimal representation of an integer into an integer output Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype string to integer strValue Example Call strVal 253 nVal string to_integer strvVal Input Parameters nValue The string decimal representation to convert to an integer Return Value The integer value represented by the input string 338 Scripting Language Syntax Summary Advanced Users Only The following is a syntax summary of the 12C Exerciser scripting language It is intended for those with advanced understanding of programming language construction who wish to better understand the limits and structure of the
15. 18 19 IA 1B 1C 1D LE IF Glitch Pattern Injection 361 Example 2 In the following two cases the glitch pattern will be loaded when the emulation is started The trigger will be armed right after the master initiates the reading or writing to the emulated slave case 1 Master Reading from Emulated Slave glitch_pattern_file C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf ARM_GLITCH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 O7 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF O 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F case 2 Master Writing to Emulator Slave glitch_pattern_file C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf ARM_GLITCH For more Master and Slave Emulation sample scripts using glitch injections refer to the Samples subfolder under the I2C Exerciser s installation folder 362 Glitch Pattern Injection Appendix A CAS 1000 I2C Hardware Reference Hardware Specifications Physical Mechanical Dimensions box 5 48 0 10 x 1 00 0 10 x 4 75 0 10 inches Operating Environment Temperature 0 C to 55 C Relative Humidity 10 to 90 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 40 C to 85 C USB Interface USB Connector Standard Type B Socket Port Version 2 0 Power Requirements 5 0V Provided by the host USB 2 0 port in compliance with its requirements Do not connect the CAS 1000 I2C to the host PC throu
16. 4 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 5 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 6 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 7 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 8 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 12 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 170 1 70 2 Figure 75 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Addresses in FE mode Getting Started 73 Click on the 7F mode option and observe how the Addr column changes as shown in Figure 76 The addresses are effectively divided by two since the seven address bits are now displayed in a right justified format within the byte Click on the FE mode selection to return this setting to its default state Click on the Close button to close the Preferences screen 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled e fe is AN File Trace Tools Window Help e x eh ki 88 Be xa YR a Ro x Shortcuts Une Marker Type Location Adar Hex AdarType RW NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us 1 0 1 a 12 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Preferences a 11 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read halil 10 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read Monitor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats Monitor 9 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Sec 8 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 7 bit Hex Address Format is
17. 5 Timestamp Start 488 1 E 463 1 Starting from 0 default T 3 437 1 BE 2 Timestamp Display 254 1 Programmer 1 2 1 1 Other Opti 711 1 er jons 2 753 1 3 V Prompt for saving trace data prior to CLEAR or RUN 778 4 4 Lock Timing with Trace 804 1 2 Lock to Top Listing Lit Lock to Selected Listing Lit SS L 6 D op Listing Line Of lect isting Line 1 013 1 7 START Hold Time Checking 1 168 1 1266 1 Minimum Hold Time 0 16us v 9 1978 1 10 2 005 1 12 1 Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 170 1 1 0 2 Figure 73 Monitor Window Trace List with Trigger is Time Zero Timestamps Getting Started 71 The Timestamp Display option affects how timestamps are calculated and displayed When set to Absolute the timestamp displayed for each entry is the absolute time relative to the start of bus traffic acquisition This is the default setting When set to Relative the timestamp displayed for each entry is the elapsed time since the last transaction was recorded Click on the Relative option and observe how the Time column changes around the Trigger line as shown in Figure 74 aa H Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled e S ifs AN File Trace Tools Window Help e x SH gt All o 23 8h Sa EH EAR x Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W_ NAK Error KHz Data Byt
18. EEPROM memory 0 Go to Location Moves to the specified EEPROM memory location Type in the address in hexadecimal format and press the Enter key to go to that location Sat Done Closes the Read Contents window Table 11 Programmer Read Contents Window Function Descriptions Bus Traffic Monitor 159 Program Button The Program button allows the user to program and verify the DC EEPROM device With a single click on the button the DC Exerciser will program the device using the specified data file If the Preferences is set to verify after programming see the Programmer Options section of this chapter the 12C Exerciser will automatically verify that the data is written to the device by performing a read During the programming operation the progress dialog box shown in Figure 142 will pop up to show the programming status Progress Programming Done Verifying Verify succeeded Figure 142 Programming Progress Window Verify Button The Verify button allows you to verify the content of the DC EEPROM device against the specified data file During the verifying operation the progress dialog box shown in Figure 143 will pop up to show the verification status Progress Verifying Verify succeeded Figure 143 Verifying Progress Window Erase Button The Erase button allows you to initialize the device memory contents with the value FF During the erasing operation the progress
19. Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHZ VO 1 V O 2 Data Byte Hex Time us a Hide Column 2 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 00 Trace Layout 3 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 AutoFit Columns ee eent E 5 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 SE 6 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write Fam 00 Say 8 17 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Read JENE Decimal 8 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Read NAK 96 1 1 2E Disable Symbols E Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 Symbols 10 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 00 11 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Read sjaa den 12 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Read NAK sjaji 2F Compact Mode 13 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 984 1 SMBus Mode 14 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 97 1 1 01 6 696 217 15 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Read 98 1 1 7 224 145 16 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Read NAK 97 1 1 40 7 224 245 17 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 12 824 18 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 4 1 01 12 824 19 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 80 12 824 20 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 99 1 1 17 328 21 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 01 17 328 22 Address _ Analvzer 9A 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 17 864 i e Scale 50 us div _ Auto Fit Line 4 4 Interval A to B Ons H Data S SS Se ae Se nes Figure 93 Switch to SMBus Mode jis Monitor C Program Files I2C Exerciser Demo tc74 tdf 8 oR ex Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK
20. Parameters nSource O if target should drive the voltage enter Target Supplied mode 1 if the CAS 1000 I2C should drive the voltage enter Analyzer Supplied mode 220 Third Party Application Interface 2C_SetClockRate Overwrite configuration SCL clock rate with the provided value This is the rate at which the analyzer attempts to run when it drives the bus Note that for slow rising busses high parasitic capacitance with Accelerated Rising Edge Drive off the rise time may limit the ability of a driver to achieve a desired clock rate since the top of the pulse may not reach the high threshold before turning around again The threshold levels may also impact proper sensing of the bus since level crossings may occur in the nearly horizontal and noise sensitive final stage of signal rising Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_SetClockRate char szClockRateKhz Return Value NULL if I2C_InitHardware was never called otherwise a pointer to a string containing the actual resulting clock rate closest available to requested Parameters szClockRateKhz The string holding text of the new SCL clock rate as a floating point decimal value in kilohertz The actual clock rate set will be rounded to the nearest value in the following list 4 kHz 5 kHz 6 kHz 7 kHz 8 kHz 9 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 30 kHz 40 kHz 50 kHz 60 kHz 70 kHz 80 kHz 90 kHz 100 kHz 150 kHz 200 kHz 250 kHz 301 kHz 352
21. Preferences menu command accessible from all windows The user can use the Preferences dialog to set the preferences for the monitor colors monitor options debugger options programmer options and formats Monitor Colors This pane enables altering of the colors of the trigger and cursor backgrounds and text in the trace listing It also enables the background color pattern color scheme between line groupings to be changed The options for the color pattern are no color alternating background color per row or alternating background color per messages default The color for background and text assigned to the alternating line groups can also be selected Any changes made take effect immediately A Use Defaults button restores the original default settings Preferences Exa Trigger Other Text ls Color Scheme Background N Alternate color per message z Cursor A Text N Text 1 u Background E Background 1 C Cursor B Text iv Text 2 u Background E Background Timing View Figure 161 Monitor Colors Pane 184 Configuration and Preferences Monitor Options This pane enables the altering of preferences for the layout and style of data in the Monitor window Preferences eS goeecescesecesocesceseccesecocscsesecsceai Line Column a Starting from 1 default C Trigger is line 0 Timestamp Start Starting from 0 default Trigger is time 0 Timest
22. display does not apply to 10 bit addresses or to non hex representations such as symbolic The FE format default shows the hexadecimal byte value with the 7 address bits left justified in the byte The 7F format shows the 7 address bits right justified in the byte 7 bit Hex Address Format FE mode 7 address bits left justified in byte A6 A0 0 default _ JF mode 7 address bits right justified in byte 0 A6 A0 Figure 165 Formats Pane Configuration and Preferences 188 Using Project Files When the DC Exerciser saves and loads project files it saves and loads all of your customized settings and preferences with these files It is recommended that you become familiar with this feature and make use of it as much as possible This functionality allows you to save an environment that you have set up for a particular target bus debugging session or test routine and then load up that environment whenever needed Using this feature you can not only save and retrieve the bus interface settings but also preserve the look and feel of the project by storing options such as color schemes data formats and window sizes layouts and positions This can provide a great way to let multiple users have their own separate project setting defaults Following is a list of settings that are saved in the project file e All settings from the Configuration Manager including o Trigger Filters Symbols SMBus decoding file lis
23. folders In addition the installer creates a Windows Start Menu group named I2C Exerciser If you are running Windows Vista the software installation may be interrupted by the operating system by displaying warning pop up windows as shown in Figure 10 If this occurs click on the Install this driver software anyway button to safely ignore the warnings and proceed with the installation 14 Installation Li Windows Security Kl Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software gt Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device Install this driver software anyway Only install driver software obtained from your manufacturer s website or disc Unsigned software from other sources may harm your computer or steal information wv See details Figure 10 Windows Vista Logo Test Warning Pop up Window If you are running Windows XP the software installation may be interrupted by the operating system by displaying warning pop up windows as shown in Figure 11 If this occurs click on the Continue Anyway button to safely ignore the warnings and proceed with the installation Software Installation AA The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows xP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation
24. the contents of which may be appropriately shown using some symbolic text instead of the numeric value Symbols can also operate in the reverse direction That is a symbolic text string can be entered in place of a numeric value when using the Find dialog or specifying a slave device address in the Debugger or debugger command script file Thus for example a slave device can be referenced by a name like PLL instead of a numeric bus address like 1E SMBus Pane This dialog shown in Figure 155 shows a list of associations between bus addresses and SMBus devices Device entries shaded gray are reserved by the SMBus Specification v 2 0 Those devices cannot be removed but their associated addresses can be re associated with a different device if necessary For other entries each address may only be associated with one device Configuration and Preferences 173 Smart Battery 16 C Program Files i2C Exerciser Dec Smart Battery Charger 12 C Program Files l2C Exerciser Dec Smart Battery System Manager 14 C Program Files li2C Exerciser Dec Figure 155 SMBus Pane 174 Configuration and Preferences Each entry in the device list box contains the device name bus address value and the decoding file The device name is the name of the SMBus device that is associated with the address value and will be displayed in the Address column of the trace listing The bus address value specifies the slave address that is being associa
25. the symbolic translation on and off Additionally the pop up menu allows selection of the numeric display format to either hexadecimal binary or decimal These settings work independently for the Addr and Data Byte columns Right click on the Data Byte column heading and select the Disable Symbols menu entry as shown in Figure 38 Observe that symbols are no longer being displayed in the Data Byte column as shown in Figure 39 tin Eile Irace Tools Window Help sh gt Al o SS xE YE ay E o 01101 Mr Mell Monitor Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz I O 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Address Target 7 Bit Write 402 Hide Column Data Target 7 Bit Write 402 La Trace Layout Data Target 7 Bit Write DC AutoFit Columns Data Target 7 Bit Write 400 34 Data Target 7 Bit Write 403 Address Analyzer 7 Bit Read Data Target 7 Bit Read 51 Decimal Data Target 7 Bit Read WARNING Disable Symbols Address Target 7 Bit Write 402 Symbols Ls Data Target 7 Bit Write 402 3E B Address Target 7 Bit Write Address Target 7 Bit Write 400 Compact Mode Data Target l 7 Bit Write 403 2E SMBus Mode Data Target 7 Bit Write 403 F4 1 575 Tagged Data Target 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 1 601 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1 843 Figure 38 Monitor Window Trace List Data Byte Column Right Click Pop up Menu Hexadecimal Binary 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Norm
26. while Statements The following statements are supported if expression statement or block of statements else if expression statement or block of statements else statement or block of statements while expression statement or block of statements do statement or block of statements break statement or block of statements continue statement or block of statements while expression return return expression for expression expression expression statement or block of statements break 288 Scripting Language continue statement or block of statements Operators There are four arithmetic seven logical and five bitwise operators Strings The arithmetic ones are Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator Operator sums two variables find difference between two numbers multiples two numbers divides two numbers yield reminder from the division of two numbers increment decrement Type of results is always a 64 bit integer The logical operators are Operator Operator amp amp Operator gt Operator lt Operator gt Operator lt Operator Operator Type of results is always an Integer value representing TRUE 1 or FALSE 0 performs logical disjunction on 2 expressions performs logical conjunction on 2 expressions performs logical greater than comparison performs logical smaller than comparison performs logical greater t
27. z SR E ee FE mode 7 address bits left justified in byte A6 A0 0 default 4 ata Target 2A 7 Bit Write Debugger 5 Data Target 2A 7 Bit Write N 4 Data Target 2A 7 Bit Write E d 3 Data Target 2A 7 Bit Write S Suess 2 Address Analyzer 1B 7 Bit Read Programmer 1 Data Target 1B 7 Bit Read ERREECHEN 4 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 2 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 3 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 4 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 5 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 6 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 7 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 8 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 12 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat 7F Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 701 70 2 Figure 76 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Addresses in 7F mode 74 Getting Started Tutorial Using Live Mode By now you should have a firm grasp on the use of the I2C Exerciser s Monitor window and basic bus tracing features The following portion of this tutorial will provide you with an understanding of the use of the Debugger window which provides a facility for interactive communication with devices on the CC bus This window is not available for use in the demo mode and to fully employ its features requires connection of the CAS 1000 I2C to an actual target However in working through the rest of this chapter you will use only the CAS 1000 I2C controller with no tar
28. 0 5V to 6 0V 0 0V to 5 0V in 0 05V steps 0 0V to 5 0V in 0 05V steps Analyzer Input Capacitance lt 60 pF calculated with test cable excluded Analyzer Input Resistance to Ground 100K ohms Programmable SDA SCL Analyzer Reference Voltage Floating Target Supplied mode or 0 8V to 5 0V in 0 1V steps Analyzer Supplied mode Programmable SDA SCL Reference Pull up Resistors Pull up resistor in Analyzer Supplied mode starting at a base approximate value of 250 ranging up to 50K ohms in an assortment of 64 values Programmable Rising Slope Control When enabled momentarily pulls up rising edge driven bus signals to quickly overcome capacitance 364 Hardware Reference Target Discrete 1 01 I O2 Test Signals Voltage V_ad Programmable TTL Discrete I O Output Independent Programmable Direction Characteristics 1 25V to 3 3V in 50mV steps Pulled up to Programmable V ac by 4 7k Q TTL Output Open Collector Output TTL Input 5V tolerant by clamping to 4 3V Discrete I O Signal DC Characteristics Symbol Test Conditions Limit Units Minimum Maximum Vie V_adj gt 2 7 V 2 0 V_adj 0 5 V V_adj lt 2 7 V 0 65 x V_adj V_adj 0 5 V Vu V ad gt 2 7 0 8 V V_adj lt 2 0 0 35 x V_adj V Von Lues 12 MA V_adj 0 5 V VoL lo 12 mA 0 4 V SMB Trigger Output Signal Connector Signal Standard SMB F
29. 011 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 AE 2 037 25 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 AE 2 062 lt AutoFit Line 32 maala Interval AtoB 9 422762 ms Corelis Ready DEMO AddrFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 0 1 ES Figure 39 Monitor Window Trace List Data Column with Symbols Disabled 42 Getting Started Right click on the Data Byte column heading and select the Binary format menu entry as shown in Figure 40 Observe that the Data Byte column is now displaying values in binary format as shown in Figure 41 is pe ep Untitled Monitor Untitled ji Eile Trace Tools Window Help Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz 1 01 02 Data Byte Hex Time us Hide Column Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1E Trace Layout Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 5C AutoFit Columns Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 34 Hexadecimal Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 OA Address Analyzer 7 Bit Read 107 Data Target 7 Bit Read 104 51 Data Target T Bit Read 104 1c Disable Symbols Address Target 7 Bit Write 402 Symbols Data Target 7 Bit Write 402 IE Address Target 7 Bit Write 401 Address Target 7 Bit Write 400 Data Target 7 Bit Write 403 Data Target i Write m 1 575 Tagged Data Target Write NAK 1 601 Address Target DAC Figure 40 Monitor Window Trace List Data Byte Column ER Pop up Menu Binary Decimal
30. 1 01 17 328 22 Address _ Analvzer 9A 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 17 864 5 4 Im Scale S0us div Auto Fit Line S Interval A to B Ons FELD pE Di Oe ET TI 2 SDA SCL Figure 90 SMBus Raw Data 86 Getting Started The raw data shown was collected while communicating with a simple temperature sensor Microchip TC74 Tiny Serial Thermal Sensor In order to understand the messages you need to use an SMBus decoder file containing protocol information for this device Click on the Tools menu and then click on Configuration Manager Then click on the SMBus tab to display the SMBus configuration pane shown in Figure 91 below goesessosessesesoe a Triggers Filters Symbols SmBus Settings Files Enable SMBus Timeout Device Name Addr File SMBus Host 10 SMBus Alert Response 18 Default SMBus Device Addr C2 Smart Battery 16 C Program Files i2C Exerciser Dec Smart Battery Charger 12 C Program Files i2C Exerciser Dec Smart Battery System Manager 14 C Program Files l2C ExerciseriDec Figure 91 SMBus Pane Before Associating Decoder File Getting Started 87 To associate a decoder file with the TC74 device click on the Add button and the SMBus Decoder File dialog will open Then click on the Browse located on the right side of the dialog window SMBus decoder files are located in the Decoder subfolder of the 12C Exerciser installation fold
31. 10 emulated slaves with user defined names Note the associated script command file for each emulated device which prescribes its behavior See the Scripting Language chapter for a complete description of the scripting language The master script file is a complete programming sequence including conditional branching which schedules complex behavior of bus interactions The slave data files are more basic since the main activity of emulated slaves is to respond to bus master reads with sequential values and simply acknowledge any writes Each file can be looped for a specific number of times with the script or data sequences being restarted each time they are finished e AR Emulation Manager oo Emulated Devices Type Status Name Address AddrType Runs File 7 Master REE waster z S 1 C Program Files I2C ExercisenSam E Slave Inactive AT24C04A AO 7Bit 1 C Program Files l2C Exerciser Sam Slave Inactive AT24C04B A2 7Bit 1 C Program Files l2C Exerciser Sam 4 m p Figure 174 Emulator Manager Window 238 UC Device Emulator The Emulation Manager window provides a list of emulated devices and the script or data files associated with them Each emulated device contains the following column headings Type Specifies whether the device is a master or slave Only one master device may be active at any given time A check box in front of this text specifies whether the device is currently active Active d
32. 12C Exerciser Application Softwar e csccccesecsseceseeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeenseeeeeseeeseeesenseeeeenneess 9 CAS 1000 I2C E Hardware Installation cccssccssseeeeseeeeeseeesneeeneeeeeeeeeesaesesneeeeeeeeseesesneeeeeeeeeseneseaees 18 Chapters Getting Stated aa ea ereraa t aena a ana acudeccsacctaduencwaacuasccacdcencudedudacutadniaewana 24 OVER VIC e E E E A A E nag stcueteanschaus senteesuseseoutecs 24 Tutorial Using Demo Mode ssssssunnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnan n ennnen nnna 24 Tutorial Using Live Mode TE 75 Chapter 4 Connecting 10a Target cciccncciicccccssscscecsascccnsciadsenccdecuscceaiscansnaadcansssadvencdans 92 Connecting the C Signals sssssssssesssssssesssssesssesesssenessesesesesetesesseesesasssesasesesnseseeessseneseeeeeseeeeesees 92 Inter SOUP ee ee ee Ee ee 94 Chapter 5 Bus Traffic MOmitor cccccccsssssssesseeeeececcesnennesseeeeesenneneeseeeeeeseeenanonaaaess 105 Trace LISTNO EE 106 d Rulle Field cana AEE a E RAE ae Some seen e 109 Monitor Contig uration z iisi geesde 111 Monitor Preferences eege eaaa TORNE AA EAER ETEA AEAEE TERNE EEEE ANAE AAA TERA EAT 119 Monitor Window Reference cs ecccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeseeeeneeseeesneeseeesneeseeeeneeseeesneeseeeesneesesesneeseseseeeesnes 123 Chapter 6 Interactive Debugger n snsnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 139 Send Data Eaa EE E E A 140
33. 33 7F will cause the data byte 0x40 to be one bit too long Note that when you are observing the Monitor s timing display and trace list some of the injected errors will be rippled to the very last byte of the whole message In other words the error will show up at the very last byte in the trace rather than the byte you specified For instance if the data sequence 01 LONG_DATA 40 33 7F is sent the trace list and the timing display will not indicate the byte 0x40 as the error but rather the last byte 0x7F having one bit too long Interactive Debugger 149 Debugger Options The preferences relevant to the Debugger window can be specified by accessing the Debugger Options pane of the Preferences dialog Open the Preferences dialog by pressing F7 or by selecting Preferences from the Tool menu When the Preferences dialog appears choose the Debugger Options tab as shown in Figure 136 The four options are described below Preferences mtm pocccesccsccescosccccsecesococsececcescoscscseg Monitor Colors l Monitor Options Debugger Options Options v Track Transactions V Echo Sent Data Abort Message if Address is NAK d Show Send Command Line Number Figure 136 Debugger Options Pane Track Transactions If selected data sent by the CAS 1000 I2C is tracked by the Monitor and the transaction times out if matching data does not appear on the bus within 2 seconds Tracking the sent byte will ensure
34. 53 a Monitor 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 34 78 SR 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 FAULT 104 KG 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 d 287 7 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 51 443 Debugger 8 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 WARNING 541 s 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1 252 F 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3E 1 280 H 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 1 1 1 464 Programmer 12 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 1 522 13 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 2E 1 550 14 Data Target ae 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 F1 1 575 15 Tagged Data Target 7 Bit Write EEN 1 CHANSEL 1 601 E Re E H 7 Address Target 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 843 18 Data Analyzer F 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1A 1 884 19 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 401 1 1 70 1 909 20 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 1 4 AE 1 935 21 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 3 45 1 960 22 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 72 1 986 23 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 49 2 011 24 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 AE 2 037 25 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 AE 2 062 bg AutoFit Line SC maala Interval AtoB 9 422762ms relis Ready DEMO Addtomat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 0 1 ES Figure 33 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Symbolic Address and Data Entries 36 Getting Started Using the method previously described right click in the trace list area of the Monitor window and select the Symbols pop up menu entry This will cause the Configuration Manager
35. AZ a ie me Address Data Sci a SDA 5 START 5 D STOP P ory RE START Sr ACK NAK Edge Direction Trigger Now Immediate Rising Falling Arm Trigger View Waveform Figure 209 Glitch Pattern Editor Window 354 Glitch Pattern Injection In addition to the glitch pattern itself you must also specify the trigger condition for commencing the pattern injection This condition consists of a bus cycle and or an edge direction of the SDA or SCL signal The edge direction parameter is only applicable for address and data cycles You can define the triggering condition in the Glitch Injection Trigger Setup section of the window 5 This is similar to the waveform capture feature of the Parameters Scope tool As soon as you arm the glitch injection the CAS 1000 will monitor the bus and wait for the matching trigger condition At the moment a match is found the glitch pattern will be injected for up to next 1022 clocks at the designated frequency The delay between the matching edge and the start of injection varies from 280 ns to 1 5 us depending on the glitch clock frequency Figure 210 indicates various trigger points within a message Addr SDA Rising Data SDA Falling Addr SCL Falling Data SCL Falling Addr SCL Rising ACK NAK Data SCL Rising Figure 210 Glitch Injection Trigger Conditions The following are step by step instructions for setting up and testing glitch pattern injection
36. Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 3D 4 735 48 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 401 1 1 63 4 761 49 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 1 1 52 4 786 50 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 4 16 4811 S im D Scale 50 us div Auto Fit Line 45 H Interval A to B 9 422762 ms FIELD A daa p ate OT Dete Data hihi as seo to Soot Ready DEMO AddrFormat FE Trace Off fBus SCL SDA 01 0 2 A Figure 119 DC Exerciser Monitor Window Layout Component Description 1 Menu Bar Contains the menu bar for the active Monitor window Refer to the following Menu Bar section in this chapter 2 Tool Bar Provides quick single click access to commonly used tools for the active Monitor window Refer to the Too Bar section of this chapter 2 Trace Listing Provides the fundamental presentation of traffic acquired from the target CC bus Refer to the Trace Listing section of this chapter 4 Timing Field Provides a graphical image of bus signal edge transitions over time Refer to the Timing Field section of this chapter Table 4 Monitor Window Layout Bus Traffic Monitor 123 Monitor Menu Bar When the Monitor window is active the Menu Bar provides accesses to relevant functions including File Trace Tools Windows and Help A description of each menu follows Monitor File Menu The File menu shown in Figure 120 includes commands to load and save projects and trace data The entries on this menu
37. Chapter 8 Configuration and Preferences Configuration Manager and Preferences dialogs overview and component descriptions Configuration Manager The Configuration Manager allows the user to change the setting for the various tools provided by the 12C Exerciser in one easily accessible location The user can access certain Configurations Manager tabs directly from some of the tools such as the Filters and Trigger toolbar in the Monitor window The user can also access the most recently used Configuration Manager tab by using the Tools Configuration Manager menu command accessible from all windows The Configuration Manager is used to perform the following tasks e Configuring settings o Setting the C bus electrical features such as voltage source and bus signal threshold o Setting the bus drive features such as clock rate o Configuring external discrete signals o Setting the amount of traffic to monitor Associating files with the current project Setting triggers Setting filters Associating SMBus devices with decoding files Associating and detecting target slaves Setting timing skew options 166 Configuration and Preferences Configuration Manager Reference The Configuration Manager dialog shown in Figure 149 enables selection of various settings controlling the behavior of the CAS 1000 I2C E and DC Exerciser The user can access the Configuration Manager using the Tools menu The major features are grouped under separate panes o
38. Definitions Transfer Type Any v NAK Any Addr An Error oOo wm anya 7 AddrType Any X I O 1 Any R W Any v I O 2 Any M Data Byte alue Gi Poston Hex width age Load From Selected Monitor Trace Line Figure 29 Configuration Manager Trigger Setup Screen Getting Started 33 Transaction Line Columns The Monitor window trace list column headings are shown in Figure 30 A description of each column is provided below Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RAV NAK Error KHz 01 02 Data Byte Hex Time us a Figure 30 Monitor Window Trace List Column Headings Line Displays a sequential unique number for each bus transaction Marker Identifies special lines such as the Trigger Cursor A Cursor B or Tagged Type Identifies the transaction as either an Address or Data cycle Location Indicates the device involved in the current transaction as being either a target device on the bus or the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer For address transactions Analyzer means the analyzer is the master debugger or emulated master while Target means a UUT master is driving For data transactions write toward the slave read from the slave Analyzer means the analyzer is an emulated slave while Target means a live UUT slave is involved This localizes the source of address cycles and the source destination of data cycles as residing in the Analyzer or the Target
39. Detect This button causes the DC Exerciser to check for a voltage on the target bus and automatically select recommended default electrical settings based on its findings Connecting to a Target 101 Bus Drive Features The Bus Drive Features group of settings shown in Figure 103 specify the clock rate accelerated rising edge drive collision detection and high speed mode options for the CAS 1000 I2C when it is driving the target bus Bus Drive Features Drive Clock Rate i00kHz e Disable Collision Detection Accelerated Rising Edge Drive Hi Speed Mode Auto On a Off Auto On Off Figure 103 Bus Drive Features Drive Clock Rate Specifies the nominal clock rate of the SCL signal when the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus Note that the UC bus is not of a continuously clocking type since various conditions can stretch the clock or require resynchronization between multiple sources Therefore a constant period is not expected Disable Collision Detection Under normal circumstances when the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus acting like a master it is required to detect that the signal levels it drives match within a reasonable time what it senses on the bus Failure to detect a match would imply a collision with another master If the bus has excessive capacitance or high pull up capacitance combinations which cause its rise time to be slow a false collision may be repeatedly detected and prevent the CAS 1000 I2C from completing its
40. E6 Causes the last byte prior to the command to be designated as the end of a message and disables the Stop cycle at its conclusion regardless of the No Stop checkbox setting Any immediately following bytes start a new message ie a new address cycle PAUSE PECON IO ECOFF PAUSE 350 PECON IO ECOFF Indicates that a delay for the specified number of decimal milliseconds should be inserted Any data byte values that follow this command are sent beginning with a new address cycle Turns on the SMBus PEC Packet Error Checking byte generation option The PEC is a CRC 8 error checking byte calculated on all the message bytes including addresses and read write bits The PEC is appended to the message as the last data byte Turns off the SMBus PEC Packet Error Checking byte generation option SETDISCRETE H H LA Oo SETDISCRETE Modifies the state of one of the discrete I O signals The particular discrete I O signal 1 or 2 is specified by the first parameter and the level to which it is set 1 for high or O for low is specified by the second parameter It remains at this state until another similar command is encountered STOP 3B 31 STOP 55 E6 Last Stop Start Table 6 Interactive Debugger Causes the last byte prior to the command to be designated as the end of a message and forces the Stop cycle to conc
41. Emulation and Glitch Injection In order to add glitches to the messages sent or received by the emulated slave you have to add a special macro and a keyword to the slave data file sdf The macro glitch_pattern_file must be called at the begging of the file This macro takes a path to the glitch pattern file gpf as the parameter If you are to test a master reading from the emulated slave the keyword ARM_GLITCH must be inserted into the data list at the position where you want the arming of the trigger to happen If you are to test a master writing to the emulated slave the file should only contain the glitch_pattern_file macro and the ARM_GLITCH keyword without any data For this case you cannot specify which byte of data the arming should be applied to Also the writing from the master should occur as the first transaction to the emulated slave For the slave emulation the glitch cannot be repeated in a single emulated session and the trigger cannot be applied to the address byte To test the glitch in the address byte you must use the Glitch Pattern Editor tool Example 1 In the following example the glitch pattern will be loaded when the slave emulation is started The trigger will be armed right before the byte 16 is read by the master glitch_pattern_file C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 15 ARM_GLITCH 16 17
42. Error KHz VO 1 up 2 Data Byte SMBus Time us a 2 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 CMD TEMP 96 3 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 559 982 4 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Read NAK 97 1 1 RESP 47 C 560 082 5 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 1 336 024 6 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 i CMD TEMP 1 336 120 BR 7 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 2 081 885 7 8 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Read NAK 96 1 1 RESP 46 C 2 081 984 9 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 3 592 941 10 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 CMD TEMP 3 593 036 11 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 4 032 096 12 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Read NAK 96 1 1 RESP 47 C 4 032 196 13 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 6 696 122 14 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 97 1 1 CMD CONFIG 6 696 217 15 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Read 98 1 1 7 224 145 16 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Read NAK 97 1 1 RESP DATA R 7 224 245 17 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 12 824 18 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 CMD CONFIG S 12 824 20 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Write 99 1 1 17 328 21 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 CMD CONFIG 17 328 22 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 17 864 23 Data Taraet___Microchi 7 Bit Read NAK a 96 1 1 _ RESP STANDB 17 864 e KR Scale 10 us div Auto Fit Line a Interval A to B Ons Figure 94 SMBus Dec
43. I do not accept the license agreement and exit the installation procedure for such Software If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement you may not install or use any of the Software For purpose of this Agreement the term you includes you your company employees contractors agents and anyone else you allow to use the Software Grant of Software License Subject to the term and conditions of this Agreement Corelis Figure 5 License Agreement Screen Installation 10 Review the entire agreement and if you agree select accept the terms of the license agreement and then click on the Next button The Customer Registration screen shown in Figure 6 will then be displayed XS DC Exerciser InstallAware Wizard Please _ at on yourself COR E L S An EWA Company Figure 6 Customer Registration Screen Type in or change the Full Name and Organization as needed then click on the Next button The Destination Folder screen shown in Figure 7 will be displayed Accept the default installation folder or customize your installation by selecting the browse button It is strongly recommended that the application be installed in the default folder Installation 11 D DC Exerciser InstallAware Wizard CORELIS An LEWA Company Install 12C Exerciser to C Program Files 2C Exerciser Figure 7 Destination Folder Screen Click on the Next button and the Select Prog
44. I2C Exerciser scripting language It is not necessary to understand the below information in order to write I2C Exerciser script files expression primary expression expression expression Ivalue lvalue ivalue lvalue expression binop expression ivalue asgnop expression primary identifier constant string expression lvalue identifier primary expression lvalue unary operators 44 have highest priority and group right to left The binary operators and the conditional operators all groups left to right and have priority decreasing as indicated binop ki NS do gt gt lt lt Scripting Language 339 QR amp amp W r asgnop type specifier int byte string statement compound statement expression if expression statement if expression else statement while expression statement do statement while expression break continue return return expression goto identifier identifier statement compound statement declaration list statement list declaration list declaration declaration declaration list statement list statement 340 Scripting Language statement statement list declaration type specifiers init declarator list init declarator list init declarator init declarator init declarator list init declarator identifier expression program external definition external def
45. I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters nID ID number of the slave emulation to terminate Valid numbers are from 1 to 10 Third Party Application Interface 233 I2C_SlaveStopA Terminates all slave emulations currently running Use this function to ensure all slave emulations are stopped before starting a new test session Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SlaveStopAll void Return Value 1 if successful 0 if error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters None 234 Third Party Application Interface Chapter 10 ZC Device Emulator Emulator window overview and component descriptions The Emulator tool enables exercising the CC bus by programmed interaction In this mode the CAS 1000 I2C unit can be set to emulate either bus master or bus slave devices Once set in emulation mode the CAS 1000 I2C autonomously communicates as a virtual CC bus master and or provides pre programmed responses to external UC bus master accesses thereby emulating several virtual bus slave devices The Emulation tool is useful for a range of applications where additional traffic is needed to check the overall DC bus performance in a system This includes e Enabling users to develop software for a master or slave device while this device is still
46. Indicates a disabled breakpoint S Indicates a bookmark Indicates the next execution line This can be seen when execution is paused such as during single step execution Indicates a line near a syntax error Often the syntax error can be located on the line immediately above this indicator Output Displays text output from an executing test This output is updated through the use of a built in print function provided by the scripting language Progress Bar Displays the progress of an executing test This progress bar is updated through the use of a built in progress function provided by the scripting language Script Driven Bus Tester 265 Test Source Popup Menu The Test Source Popup Menu is accessed when the user right clicks in the Script Source text area of the Test Window It is the same as the source popup menu used in the Emulator and enables manipulation of breakpoints and bookmarks as well as editing and execution operations The menu is shown in Figure 193 followed by descriptions of the available commands A Cut CAN Copy Ctrl C A Paste Ctrl V H Step F10 K Run to Cursor b Run F5 Il Break BW Stop Ji Toggle Breakpoint F9 d Enable Disable Breakpoint di Enable All Breakpoints w Disable All Breakpoints d n Clear All Breakpoints Toggle Bookmark 3 Next Bookmark LA Previous Bookmark Clear Bookmarks Figure 193 Test Source Popup Menu Cut Removes highlighted text and p
47. Invoking bus parameter measurements Comparing measured bus characteristics against expected values Reporting runtime status messages to the user to show progress Consolidating findings to make a pass fail indication Providing emulated slave environment to the target aiding in its evaluation Manipulating sensing the I O bits to coordinate testing with target states or external equipment The Test tool is very useful for a variety of Acceptance Test Procedure ATP related applications such as e Production testing of C compatible silicon devices such as serial EEPROMs and multi function system monitors e Qualification testing of IC based products such as consumer products servers embedded systems etc e Engineering and or production ATP of UC based devices e Regressive testing of systems and devices to make sure that performance is still up par after having gone through engineering changes Like the Master Emulator script the Test scripting language also employs a simplified C like syntax with a larger repertoire of built in functions With support for conditional branching and looping the scripting language allows the tester to perform conditional tests depending on previous test results The Test window as well as the built in script Editor provides support for Test construction including syntax checking The dedicated screen for this tool enables editing launching stopping looping and stepping through this test script The script
48. Parameters None 202 Third Party Application Interface 2C_InitHardware Confirms that the CAS 1000 I2C is present and properly linked via its USB port It initializes the hardware with logic and downloads the firmware with all settings at factory default states Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_InitHardware void Return Value NULL if the initialization was successful otherwise a pointer to a string containing text with an error message Parameters None Third Party Application Interface 203 2C_InjectGlitch Injects previously loaded glitch pattern to the target bus immediately without waiting for any armed trigger event This function allows you to bypass the arming and triggering sequence of glitch injection The I2C_LoadGlitch or I2C_ReloadGlitch function must be called prior to calling this function Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_InjectGlitch void Return Value 1 if successful 0 if error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters None 204 Third Party Application Interface 2C_LoadGlitch Loads the glitch pattern information from a glitch pattern file gpf to the CAS 1000 This function must be called prior to a glitch injection Depending on the second parameter the trigger will be armed immediately or armed during an I2C_SendData func
49. Stores the data collected from the bus in the Receive text box into a DDF text file Help Provides quick access to the online help topics Table 9 Debugger Tool Bar Functions 154 Interactive Debugger Interactive Debugger 155 Chapter 7 Serial EEPROM Programmer Programmer Window Overview and component descriptions The Programmer Window provides an interface specifically tailored for convenient interaction with standard UC EEPROM devices on the target C bus It enables file linked programming and viewing of the content of such devices It further supports comparing current contents against the data loaded from a file Device content can also be viewed and saved to a file Standard file formats supported include e EXO e BIN e MCS e HEX In addition a simple user friendly text file format can specify the EEPROM content The user selects the target device type from a pull down list of known manufacturers and types whose standard address and address type 7 or 10 bit width is preloaded This latter information can be overwritten by the user for non standard systems In addition to selecting a related data file the user can enter an additive subtractive adjustment to the internal device offset declared in the file Various device interaction buttons enable the following actions e Read read and display the EEPROM content in a popup which supports scrolling and page hopping through the data This informat
50. Test tool It can gather master specific and slave specific parameters such as signal timing characteristics and also system wide parameters such as bus voltage pull up resistance and capacitance Each measurement is compared to maximum and minimum values loaded from a specification file and the resulting pass or fail status is shown with the measurement The Parameters Scope provides the additional ability to display a graph of captured signal edge transition data and a trigger can be set to capture a particular IC bus signal s rising or falling edge 4 Product Overview Hardware Features The main hardware features of the CAS 1000 I2C E are described in the following sections PC Speed Support The CAS 1000 I2C operates using the Standard Fast mode Fast mode Plus protocol over its entire performance range for both monitoring and driving the bus up to 5 MHz The High speed mode Hs mode is supported for monitoring only Additionally an accelerated rising slope control feature is included to facilitate the driving of higher capacitance targets at high clock rates USB Port Host Interface The CAS 1000 I2C uses a high speed USB 2 0 interface for easy connection to a PC The host PC supplies operating power to the unit and the hot plug feature of the USB standard is fully supported You simply plug the CAS 1000 I2C into a PC USB 2 0 socket and it will be automatically detected configured and then ready to go A USB 2 0 port on the ho
51. The following icons can appear e Indicates an enabled breakpoint Indicates a disabled breakpoint CC Indicates a bookmark Indicates the next execution line This can be seen when execution is paused such as during single step execution Indicates a line near a syntax error Often the syntax error can be located on the line immediately above this indicator Output Displays text output from an executing script This output is updated through the use of a built in print function provided by the scripting language Progress Bar Displays the progress of an executing script This progress bar is updated through the use of a built in progress function provided by the scripting language 244 UC Device Emulator Emulated Master Source Popup Menu The Emulated Master Source Popup Menu is accessed by right clicking in the Script Source area of the Emulated Master window It enables manipulation of breakpoints and bookmarks as well as editing and execution operations The menu is shown in Figure 179 followed by descriptions of the available commands d Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C E3 Paste Ctrl H Step F10 H Run to Cursor gt Run FS Ji Toggle Breakpoint F9 di Enable Disable Breakpoint Ji Enable All Breakpoints d Disable All Breakpoints 4 Clear All Breakpoints Toggle Bookmark Previous Bookmark RI 3 Next Bookmark gt S Clear Bookmarks Figure 179 Emulated Master Source Popup Men
52. Timeout The SMBus Timeout checkbox is used to enable the detection of a timeout condition as defined by the SMBus specification When this setting is checked an SMBus Timeout will be reported as an error line in the Monitor trace listing any time that the clock signal SCL is detected to be low for 25 milliseconds or longer during capturing of bus traffic If a timeout occurs while the CAS 1000 I2C is driving the bus it will abandon all transactions and generate a STOP condition to return the bus to the idle state Configuration and Preferences 175 Settings Pane This dialog shown in Figure 157 allows setting of the various electrical and bus features of the analyzer There are some settings that depend on others and may be grayed out accordingly All of the controls present in the Settings pane are detailed below Triggers Filters symbols smBus settings Files Bus Electrical Features Voltage Source Bus Signal Thresholds 9 Target Supplied Analyzer Supplied High Level Volts Intended Pull up Parameters inet 0 90 e Volts e 330 7 vots une ee Bus Drive Features Drive Clock Rate E Disable Collision Detection Accelerated Rising Edge Drive Hi Speed Mode Auto O OOff Auto On OoOff Input Output Signals High Level Function 1 0 1 EE Drive SMB AT1 Am e Volts 1 02 in v Source Monitor Buffer Options Depth Transactions 1 Log to File Exerciser Trace tdf Figure 157 S
53. Windows based application which controls the CAS 1000 I2C The PC on which it will be installed should meet the following minimum requirements One available USB 2 0 Port Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista 32 bit 3 2 GHz Pentium 4 Processor or equivalent 1 GB of RAM 600 MB of Free Hard Disk Space 2 GB or more for continuous logging of trace data CD ROM Drive Product Overview 7 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the 12C Exerciser software and the CAS 1000 12C hardware Prior to installation please verify that the following I2C Exerciser software and CAS 1000 I2C hardware materials are present and free from visible damage or defects If anything appears to be missing or damaged please contact Corelis immediately The CAS 1000 I2C product consists of the following components CAS 1000 I2C Hardware 6 USB 2 0 Cable 12 C Target Interface Cable consisting of flying leads with test clips Part 15438 2 Corelis DC Bus Analyzer Exerciser Programmer and Tester CD ROM containing the I2C Exerciser application support software and example target test files Your application may require additional optional interface cables Table 1 lists the optional target interface cables available from Corelis Cable Description Corelis Part Number 6 IC Target Interface Flying Leads with Test Clips 15438 1 24 C Target Interface Flying Leads with Test Clips 15438 3 6 VC Target Inter
54. and slave devices that are not yet physically connected to the bus UE version only e Measure and test bus performance and characteristics E version only Because of its rich feature set and ease of use the CAS 1000 I2C can be used in a variety of applications such as product development troubleshooting validation system integration production and field testing The CAS 1000 I2C pod shown in Figure 2 connects to the PC via a high speed USB 2 0 port and can operate either with the provided DC Exerciser software application or using the included API of C C library function calls from third party software applications such as National Instruments LabWindows CVI and LabView or custom user developed software The CAS 1000 I2C E also includes a JTAG controller that when used with the optional Corelis ScanExpress software can perform boundary scan interconnect testing and in system programming of flash memories and CPLDs This JTAG testing capability is complimentary to the I C bus testing features of the CAS 1000 I2C E and greatly enhances target visibility control and testing access Figure 2 Illustration of the CAS 1000 I2C 2 Product Overview Product Overview Software Toolset Monitor Using the Monitor tool the CAS 1000 I2C listens and records all CC bus traffic while displaying it as both state and timing information Transactions can be examined and stored to files and later retrieved for review Monitor featu
55. button and displays the resulting status of the last Receive operation The following can be indicated Indicates that the Receive operation completed successfully with the proper number of data bytes read from the target slave Indicates that an UC bus protocol violation was detected during the Receive operation Using the DC Exerciser s Monitor window to capture the Debugger s bus transactions can help to acquire more details about the cause of the error Indicates that the Receive operation was not completed When a timeout occurs a message box is displayed to suggest possible reasons for the timeout Interactive Debugger 143 Debugger Script The large text area constituting the bottom portion of the Debugger s Send controls is used to specify the byte values that are written to target slave devices This text field also supports the use of special commands that can override the settings of the other Send controls as well as insert pauses in the message transmission sequence manipulate the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer s two discrete I O lines or activate Error Injection Using script commands provides the ability to write a series of data bytes while progressing automatically through a sequence of various slave addresses In this manner for example a complete target initialization could be performed The ability to control the discrete I O lines allows a connected target to be stimulated during this process Additionally Debugger scr
56. current file is searched and any occurrences of the search text are substituted with the replacement text UC Device Emulator 255 Emulated Slave Tools Menu The Tools menu provides a path to the major application function windows This is identical to the Monitor Tools Menu selections in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulated Slave Window Menu The Window menu manages the various windows of 12C Exerciser and is identical to the Monitor Window Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulated Slave Help Menu The Help menu accesses the on line help features and is identical to the Monitor Help Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulated Slave Tool Bar The Emulated Slave Tool Bar provides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Emulated Slave window Simply click the tool bar button to perform the specific command The tool bar buttons are shown in Figure 188 and described in SH os SBR 444 MSO Figure 188 Emulated Slave Tool Bar Icon Name Function Description GG Open File Loads the content from another file into the Script Source text area If the current file has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it The newly opened file will be automatically associated with the current Emulated Slave device H Save File Saves the currently open Emulated Slave data to a SDF text file Bi Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation cu Redo Res
57. cycle terminates the message after the last data byte sent otherwise no stop cycle is issued the analyzer continues to control the bus with SCL low ready to perform a coming Repeat Start on the next access ulParam Optional parameter specifying the location of glitch trigger arming This parameter must be set to 0 if no glitch injection is to be performed When I2C_LoadGlitch or I2C_ReloadGlitch is called prior to this function a non zero value of this parameter represents the byte index of the transaction data which the glitch trigger should be armed for For instance the value of 1 specifies the arming of glitch injection to be occurred right before the address byte of the transaction The value of 2 specifies arming to be occurred right before the first data byte The value 3 for the second data byte and so on Please refer to the descriptions for I2C_LoadGlitch and I2C_ReloadGlitch functions for more details 214 Third Party Application Interface 2C_SenseDiscrete Reads the level of one of the discrete I O signals If discrete 2 is selected and it is configured as tied to the input trigger SMB that signal will drive this function instead of the target signal The configured direction of the signal has no effect here Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SenseDiscrete int nDiscreteNumber int nhLevel Return Value 0 if I2C_InitHardware was never called 1 if illegal di
58. debugger to read three bytes The value FF will now be displayed three times in the text box as shown in Figure 82 below TL W Debugger Untitled fo ze Receive n SE e ad rtype zat w ins 7 8 an m e 9 No Stop No Stop Figure 82 Receive Three Bytes in the Debugger Getting Started 79 Step 3 Send While Monitoring In order to see the bus traffic that is being generated by the Debugger you need to start the Monitor to collect data Click on the Run Single button in the 12C Exerciser tool bar indicated by the gt icon If a message box comes up asking if you want to save the current Monitor trace data click on the No button The Run Status window will open and the Monitor will begin capturing data You may want to minimize the Run Status window if it obstructs your view of the Debugger and Monitor windows Go back to the Debugger window and click on the Send button Switch to the Monitor window by clicking on its entry in the Shortcut Bar The trace list will display the write message for the byte sent as shown in Figure 83 below The NAK column indicates that the message was not acknowledged since there are no devices connected to the analyzer which would be able to respond to the message oa DC Exerciser Untitled a fon x File Trace Tools Window Help kh gt Hei EE BB xv Sieger e Loose A it op erm L EECH Line Marker Type Location A
59. disables the breakpoint Enable all Breakpoints Sets the status of all breakpoints to Enabled Disable all Breakpoints Sets the status of all breakpoints to Disabled Clear all Breakpoints Removes all breakpoints from the script Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at a line or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script Script Driven Bus Tester 267 Test Menu Bar Test File Menu In addition to facilitating the loading and saving of projects the Test File menu also enables the user to load and save script files Because the Test script file is a plain text file the program does not save the breakpoint locations when saving the script The options related to the loading and saving of projects are identical to those described in the Monitor Menu Bar section of the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter D New Project f Open Project KI Save Project Save Project As C New Script File Ctrl
60. emulated slave you will be able to specify when the glitch is armed by placing a keyword in front of any byte in the slave data file When the slave is receiving data being written to however you will not have the choice Master Emulation and Glitch Injection In order to add glitches to the messages sent or received by the master during emulation you have to use special functions and a keyword The function load_glitch must be called before every glitch injection The first parameter of the function is the path to a glitch pattern file gpf The second parameter is to indicate whether the glitch trigger should be armed immediately or should be armed when it sees the ARM_GLITCH keyword in the send_message data stream Using the keyword gives you the flexibility of specifying which byte in the message the trigger will be applied to The following are some examples of using these functions and the keyword For detailed descriptions of the functions used here please refer to the Scripting Language chapter Example 1 In the following example the glitch pattern and the trigger are armed before the master starts sending the message The trigger will be effective for the whole message beginning from the address byte Therefore depending on the triggering condition defined in the glitch pattern file simple1 gpf the glitch can be injected anywhere from the start bit to the stop bit of the message main load_glitch
61. example shows a repeated use of glitch injection using a looping method Here the reload_glitch function is used to avoid loading of the pattern data from the file every time to improve performance The reload_glitch function will use the previously loaded pattern in the memory instead of loading it directly from the file Therefore it should only be used after the load_glitch function is called at least once main load_glitch C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf FALSE Send message 0x18 FALSE 12 ARM_GLITCH 34 AB CD TRUE for i 0 i lt 10 i repeat 10 more times reload_glitch FALSE Send message 0x18 FALSE 12 ARM_GLITCH 34 AB CD TRUE 360 Glitch Pattern Injection Example 5 The following example shows how master emulation can be used to inject semi random glitches into the transactions between a target master and a slave In this case the master emulation script does not send or receive any messages It just loads and arms a glitch pattern in every 500 ms interval While this script is running you can start the transactions between your target master and slave devices to test their behaviors when the glitches are injected You can add variations to this example to create more complexity in timing and pattern main load_glitch C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf TRUE while TRUE pause 500 reload_glitch TRUE Slave
62. file listing can be observed with source level breaking and progress control available The execution status text area progress bar and test result icon provide a method for the script to notify the user the status of the test They can be controlled via calls to built in functions provided by the scripting language Script Driven Bus Tester 261 Test Window Reference The Test window shown in Figure 191 can be opened using either the Test entry on the Shortcut bar or in the Tools menu Table 21 describes the numbered areas of the window 44 DC Exerciser AT24C04_Emulation i2c e E ROR XT File Edit Execute Breakpoint Tools Window Help A Deh no li amp mm OMe BE 444 4th v amp O ag Monitor Untitled o E Shortcuts S PE Test C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples MyTestPlan scr 01101 DC Interface Test AMF r ng BEE Runs 1 X Current Run 1 Stop On Error Status raeo f Monitor aan main Ea vi device info Debugger nAddr OxA0 b1i0Bit FALSE RP test output variables be PAGE 00 00 3001001 strOutBytes 02 FE 04 FC 00 Programmer E display output bytes print strOutBytes AAA print Sn 4 combine page number amp output bytes for sending Emulator 5 strTemp string_concatenate PAGE strOutBytes H Pass 02 FE 04 FC 00 00 00 00 01 00 Mismatch Test Progressa Parameters Scope Re
63. from Remember to double any backslashes when specifying the path to avoid interpretation as an escape sequence Return Values TRUE successful FALSE unsuccessful Scripting Language 307 measure bus Description Performs a specified measurement on the I C bus Returns a string with the outcome including units and any assumptions made such as target assumed to be quiet Used In Test Prototypes measure_bus strParam measure bus strParam nAddress b10BitAddr FALSE Example Call measure _bus SDAHIGH measures the SDA High voltage Input Parameters strParam String indicating the specific measurement to perform Possible values case insensitive SDA Current SDA Level SCL Current SCL Level Discrete1 Current Disrete1 Level Discrete2 Current Discrete2 Level Vref Reference Voltage SDAPullUp SDA Pull up Resistance SCLPullUp SCL Pull up Resistance SDAHigh SDA High Voltage SCLHigh SCL High Voltage SDACap SDA Capacitance SCLCap SCL Capacitance SlaveSDALow Slave SDA Low Voltage Requires address parameters SlaveThdDAT Slave Data Hold Time Requires address parameters SlaveTsuDAT Slave Data Setup Time Requires address parameters SlaveTrDA Slave SDA Rise Time Requires address parameters SlaveTfDA Slave SDA Fall Time Requires address parameters MasterSDALow Master SDA Low Voltage MasterSCLLow Master SCL Low Voltage MasterThdDAT Master Data Hold Time MasterTsuDAT Mas
64. hardware setup value for the reference voltage supplied to the bus in Analyzer Supplied mode Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set reference voltage strVolts Example Call make sure in analyzer supplied mode set_reference voltage 2 3 set voltage to 2 3 V Input Parameters strVolts String containing the voltage to set The string is presumed to represent a floating point numerical value Return Value The actual voltage that is set is returned as a string the analyzer picks the setting that most closely matches the specified value If unsuccessful or not in analyzer supplied mode an empty string is returned 328 Scripting Language set rising edge drive modell Description Turns on or off the Accelerated Rising Edge Drive which accelerates the rising edge when analyzer is driving the bus Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set rising edge drive mode nMode Example Call set _ rising edge drive mode 1 turns on the Rising Edge Drive Input Parameters nMode Integer indicating the on off mode to be set 0 for off and 1 for on Return Value TRUE configuration set successfully FALSE configuration failed Scripting Language 329 set timing skew Description Sets new timing skew parameters for the analyzer Following execution of this function the timing relationship between SCL and SDA during analyzer driven communications wi
65. if found that text is brought into view and highlighted 350 Scripting Language Icon Name Function Description Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of interest is entered along with the replacement text The current script is searched and any occurrences of the search text are substituted with the replacement text Syntax Check Checks the syntax of the current script without executing it The result of the syntax check is displayed in a popup message box If a syntax error is found any line associated with the error will also be marked in the left hand gutter Note that some errors cannot be detected before execution such as function calls with an invalid number of arguments or unexpected argument types E Print Prints the current script file Help Provides quick access to the online help topics Scripting Language Table 25 Editor Tool Bar Icon Descriptions 351 Chapter 14 Glitch Pattern Injection Glitch Pattern Injection overview and descriptions Overview The Glitch Pattern Injection feature allows you to inject glitches into the normal flow of traffic by forcing the SDA and SCL signals to high or low levels Using this tool you can inject most simple to very complex glitch patterns onto the target bus This tool allows you to stress your unit under test with glitch errors and validate its robustness Especially when desig
66. is disabled an empty string is returned Scripting Language 319 send message PEC Description Sends a message ie performs a write operation with a SMBus Packet Error Checking PEC byte to the specified target slave address The PEC is a CRC 8 error checking byte calculated on all the message bytes including addresses and read write bits The PEC is appended to the message as the last data byte The message to be sent is formatted as a string of comma or space separated hexadecimal byte values and Error Injection keywords Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype send_message_PEC nAddress bl0BitAddr strMessage bStopBit Example Call send two bytes with a SMBus PEC byte to address 0x18 send_message_PEC 0x18 FALSE 01 40 TRUE Input Parameters nAddress Integer representing the address of the device to send to b10BitAddr Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether address is 10 bit strMessage String containing the data to be sent Consists of comma or space separated hexadecimal byte values and Error Injection keywords Remember when using Error Injection to send address errors that the keyword must precede any byte values in the string bStopBit Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether to send the STOP bit at the end of the transaction Return Value A string indicating how many bytes were sent or an error message if an error occurred If address was NAK d the string Add
67. is displayed When set to Starting from 1 the trace list rows will start at number one and increment sequentially This is the default setting When set to Trigger is line 0 the line containing the trigger will be zero lines before the trigger will be negative and lines after the trigger will be positive Click on the Trigger is line 0 option and observe how the Line number column changes around the Trigger line as shown in Figure 72 aa DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled o S ISS AN File Trace Tools Window Help elx ei bmi S HA Boe te Xe ym EA x i Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us 04 sl i 12 Preferences ka 2 267 0 01101 11 2 293 1 Adid 10 Monitor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats 2 476 4 Monitor 9 2 632 1 R 8 Line Column 2730 1 snr La F Starting from 1 default 3441 1 5 3469 1 Debugger 5 Timestamp Start 3494 1 4 3 520 1 r 9 Starting from 0 default Trigger is time 0 J E 3545 1 E A 2 Timestamp Display SET Programmer SZ 3 884 1 WE Relate tat i SES 1 Other Opti 4 694 1 er Options 2 4 735 1 3 J Prompt for saving trace data prior to CLEAR or RUN 4761 1 4 V Lock Timing with Trace 4 786 1 3 D Lock to Top Listing Lit Lock to Selected Listing Lir sen 1 6 o op Listing
68. kHz 352 kHz 397 kHz 446 kHz 500 kHz 556 kHz 595 kHz 658 kHz 694 kHz 758 kHz 806 kHz 862 kHz 893 kHz 962 kHz 1 000 MHz 1 471 MHz 1 923 MHz 2 500 MHz 3 125 MHz 4 167 MHz 5 000 MHz 322 Scripting Language set discrete Levelil Description Sets the static state of the specified discrete I O line Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set discrete level nDiscreteNumber nState Example Call set discrete level 2 0 set discrete I O signal 2 to low Input Parameters nDiscreteNumber Integer indicating the discrete line to set 1 or 2 nState Integer indicating the state to which the discrete will be set 0 for ow and 1 for high Return Value A string representing the actual value of the discrete bit An empty string if setting was unsuccessful Scripting Language 323 set discrete voltaogeil Description Sets a new TTL voltage level for the high state of the discrete I O signals When sensing inputs the CAS 1000 will also use this setting to automatically determine adequate signal threshold values Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set discrete voltage strVolts Example Call set discrete I O TTL high voltage level to 3 0 V set discrete voltage 3 0 Input Parameters strVolts String containing the voltage to set The string is presumed to represent a floating point numerical value Return Value The actual voltage that is set is returned
69. last three menu items are identical to that of the Monitor windows detailed in the Monitor section Editor File Menu The File menu shown in Figure 206 includes options to load and save projects as well as script files The options related to the loading and saving of projects are identical to those described in the Monitor Menu Bar section of the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter TD New Project Open Project KI Save Project Save Project As TH New File Ctrl N f OpenFile Chrlto el Save File Ctrl 5 Save File As Exit Figure 206 Editor File Menu New File Opens a new empty script into the Editor All bookmarks are cleared If the current script has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it Open File Loads a script file into the Editor All bookmarks are cleared If the current script has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it Save File Saves the currently open script to a SCR text file Note that this does not save any set bookmarks Save File As Same as Save File above except that it always prompts for a new filename before saving Recent Files Provides a list of recently used project files for quick access Exit Terminates the I2C Exerciser application Scripting Language 347 Editor Edit Menu The Edit menu shown in Figure 207 provides commands that apply to the editing of the current script gt Undo Ctrl Z cu Redo Ctrl A
70. loading and saving of projects the Emulated Slave File menu shown in Figure 186 also enables the user to load and save data files Opening a slave data file will automatically associate it with the current Emulated Slave device The options related to the loading and saving of projects are identical to those described in the Monitor Menu Bar section of the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter New Project gt d K Open Project OI Save Project Save Project As Open Data File Ctrl O Save Data File Ctrl S oO VV Print Preview Print Ctrl P Qh Exit Figure 186 Emulated Slave File Menu Open Data File Loads the content from another file into the Script Source text area If the current file has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it The newly opened file will be automatically associated with the current Emulated Slave device Save Data File Saves the currently open Emulated Slave data to a SDF text file Print Preview Previews the current script before printing it Print Prints the current script Recent Files Provides a list of recently used project files for quick access Exit Terminates the I2C Exerciser application 254 UC Device Emulator Emulated Slave Edit Menu The Edit menu shown in Figure 187 provides commands that apply to the editing of the current slave data file gt Undo Ctrl Z Ca Redo Ctrl amp Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C E3 Paste Ctrl
71. low for 25 milliseconds or longer during capturing of bus traffic If a timeout occurs while the CAS 1000 I2C is driving the bus it will abandon all transactions and generate a STOP condition to return the bus to the idle state 118 Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor Preferences Preferences relevant to the Monitor Window can be selected by opening the Preferences dialog from the Tools menu The Preferences dialog can be used to specify the monitor colors and other monitor options as well as address format Monitor Colors This pane enables altering of the colors of the trigger and cursor backgrounds and text in the trace listing It also enables the background color pattern color scheme between line groupings to be changed The options for the color scheme are no color alternating background color per row or alternating background color per messages default The color for background and text assigned to the alternating line groups can also be selected Any changes made take effect immediately A Use Defaults button restores the original default settings Trigger Other Text CL Color Scheme Background N Alternate color per message Text i Text 1 a Background a Background 1 C Figure 116 Monitor Colors Pane Bus Traffic Monitor 119 Trigger Changes the text and background color of the Trigger trace listing Cursor A Changes the text and background color of the cursor marked A
72. of the behavioral limits of target slave devices Refer to the Settings section of the Configuration Manager description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter The Debugger command keywords listed in Table 7 are used for error injection These special commands cause the debugger to generate the errors described in the table when performing the transaction immediately following the keyword ADDR keywords must be placed at the beginning of the line where they appear Error injection keywords are colored maroon in the Debugger script text are Nor When injecting errors make sure that Collision Detection is disabled To disable Collision Detection open the Configuration Manager from the Tools menu and check the Disable Collision Detection checkbox in the Settings pane For more information on this option refer to the Configuration and Preferences chapter 148 Interactive Debugger Keyword Description BAD_START_ADDR Causes the timing of the SDA and SCL edges to be reversed during conveyance of the START condition NO_ACK_ADDR Causes the address cycle ACKnowledge bit to be skipped O_ACK_DATA Causes the data cycle ACKnowledge bit to be skipped LONG_ADDR Lengthens the address cycle by causing one extra bit to be sent during the cycle ie 8 bits instead of 7 LONG_DATA Lengthens the data cycle by causing one extra bit to be sent during the cycle ie 9 bits instead of 8 SHORT_ADDR Shortens the a
73. of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current script is searched for the specified text and if found that text is brought into view and highlighted Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of interest is entered along with the replacement text The current script is searched and any occurrences of the search text are substituted with the replacement text 248 UC Device Emulator Syntax Check Checks the syntax of the current script without executing it The result of the syntax check is displayed in a popup message box If a syntax error is found any line associated with the error will also be marked in the left hand gutter Note that some errors cannot be detected before execution such as function calls with an invalid number of arguments or unexpected argument types Emulated Master Execute Menu The Execute menu shown in Figure 182 contains commands pertaining to running and stepping through the current script H Step F10 H Run Until Cursor p Bun F5 I Break Stop Figure 182 Emulated Master Execute Menu Step Executes the script one line at a time starting with the next unexecuted line Run Until Cursor Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line and stops just before executing the line at the cursor position If a breakpoint i
74. of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing i Continue Anyway STOP Installation Figure 11 Windows XP Logo Test Warning Pop up Window Installation 15 16 The warning pop up windows may be hidden behind the installation window If this happens the installation progress bar will stop updating and the installation may appear to be hung Bring the warning pop up windows to the foreground by clicking on the Software Installation button on the Windows task bar as shown in Figure 12 Then click on the Continue Anyway button to safely ignore the warnings and proceed with the installation 1 ScanExpress Boundary Scan Tools Setup Updating System The tools you selected are currently being installed Removing backup files File C Config Msit11a25 rbf Time remaining 1 seconds start ig ScanExpress Boundar ct Cy PROGRA 1 CORE E Software Installation Figure 12 Software Installation Button on the Windows XP Task Bar Installation The Installation Completed screen shown in Figure 13 will appear to indicate that the installation is complete Click on the Finish button to exit from the installation program a DC Exerciser InstallAware Wizard Completing the Installation Wizard for DC Exerciser You have successfully completed the Installation Wizar
75. on any data transaction in the Data Byte column will cause a pop up Data Bytes window to appear making it possible to view and scroll through all data in the selected message Click on line 18 in the Data Byte column and the pop up window shown in Figure 44 will appear allowing you to see all of the data bytes in that message which are not all visible in the Data Byte column This pop up window will remain open until you close it and will continue to update if you click in the Data Byte column for any other data transaction 24 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Cole Ee AA File Trace Tools Window Help F x sh ph SS GE Be xe e Ao E o a Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz VO 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us D 1 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 0 E 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1E 5C 34 0A 28 Meld 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 287 Monitor Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 511C 443 Gm 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1 252 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3E 1 280 k e 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 1 1 1 464 pg E F 17 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1 843 KE 18 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1A70 4F 45 1 884 Programmer 35 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 2 476 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 1C 0C 2 632 38 Address Ta
76. picker 8 Preferences KH Monitor Colors Monitor Options l Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats l Trigger Other Text le Color Scheme cen E dene per message 7 Cursor A Text w Text 1 f v Background i Background 1 Us Automatic Ee Text SESE REEE a BEEBE ERS Background ieee E a jround 2 EoD Ft Eve l DW SIIIIIRR Timing View HU L SDA Signal More Colors jing Marker E SCL Signal e v Use Defaults Figure 66 Monitor Colors Preferences Screen Changing Cursor A Background Color 64 Getting Started After making these color changes observe that the Cursor A line in the Monitor window trace list has immediately been painted with the newly selected colors as shown in Figure 67 All of the other items on the Monitor Colors tab can be similarly changed aa DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled e S is AN Eile Trace Tools Window Help x gE ki 8 8 Be xa YR a Ro x Shortcuts ES Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RW NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us VO 1 a 80 Tagged Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 81 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read iii eer ae e ma See Monitor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats 84 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Trigger Other li
77. rate the valid range is from 1160 ns to 1240 ns 228 Third Party Application Interface 2C_ShutdownHardware Forces an orderly shutdown of the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer and its USB disconnection This function must be invoked prior to any new I2C_InitHardware call for trouble free operation Otherwise the analyzer must be unplugged and re plugged into the PC before being initialized again This function may not return immediately until the disconnection is complete Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport void _cdecl I2C_ShutdownHardware void Return Value None Parameters None Third Party Application Interface 229 I2C_SlaveGetStatus Returns the current status of the slave specified Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SlaveGetStatus int nID int pnAddr int pnStatus int pnLoops Return Value 1 if successful 0 if error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters nID ID number of the slave device to get the status for Valid numbers are from 1 to 10 pnAdadr Pointer to a buffer to hold the current address of the slave device pnStatus Pointer to a buffer to hold the current status of the slave device The meaning of the status number is following 2 Running Otherwise Not running 4 Completed Specified data stream is all consumed 5 Aborted Emulation was terminated
78. row of the timing display indicates the meaning of the waveforms relative to the transition cycle identified by the field descriptor in the row above The following labels are used e 0 1 Designates the bit level conveyed during an address or data cycle e AN Designates the ACK NAK bit After an address or data cycle either an A is shown meaning that the transaction is acknowledged or an N is shown meaning that the transaction is not acknowledged e P Designates a STOP condition e S Designates a START or repeated START condition e WIR Designates the transfer direction indicator bit During an address cycle either a W is shown meaning that a master is writing data to a target slave device or an R is shown meaning that a master is reading data from a target slave device Bus Traffic Monitor 109 Scale controls These controls adjust the zoom level of the timing graph waveforms e Scale text box This indicates the length of time between each of the larger tick marks across the top of the timing display based on the current zoom level e buttons These buttons enable zooming out or in to show the timing waveforms expanded more detail or contracted more transitions over the length of the graph Zooming is relative to the point at the center of the timing graph which remains fixed as both ends of the waveforms stretch closer to or farther from it e Auto Fit checkbox
79. the buffer such that the trigger s position in the buffer space reaches that which is specified by the Trigger Buffer Position setting of Early Middle or Late Pre trigger transactions would then constitute a portion of all transactions in the filled buffer equal to at most 15 50 or 85 respectively The percentage of pre trigger transactions is less than this amount when there are not enough transactions collected before the trigger event occurs At any time the capturing of transactions can be stopped by the user in which case the rules for the positioning of the trigger transaction in the buffer space do not apply When DC Exerciser is collecting bus data in Run Repetitive mode occurrence of the trigger event will not cause the capture process to stop The monitor will stop capturing transactions only when the user explicitly invokes the stop command Since the buffer space is limited old transactions will be thrown out in order to accommodate the new ones once the buffer becomes full In such cases the trigger transaction may also get thrown out 168 Configuration and Preferences The Trigger Out option provides a link between the incoming trigger events to a trigger out signal through one of the discrete I O s When the Trigger Out option is set to one of two discrete I O s the signal will pulse high or low according to the Active Pulse setting when the specified trigger event occurs The width of the pulse
80. the raw data byte values conveyed to or from a target slave device during a transaction one byte per trace listing line Compact Mode Causes the Data Byte column display to switch to Compact mode When using Compact mode all data byte transactions following an address transaction will be displayed on a single trace listing line SMBus Mode Causes the Data Byte column display to switch to SMBus mode When using SMBus mode each data byte value of the transaction is decoded into a text SMBus message if the value is associated in an SMBus decoding file refer to the SMBus section of this chapter Bus Traffic Monitor 129 Find Function You can use the Find function to search for entries in the trace buffer matching user specified criteria Figure 126 and Figure 127 show the regular and compact version of the Find dialog box The regular full size dialog allows the user to configure the various transaction search conditions including don t care entries If the user plans to search for the same set of conditions frequently clicking on the Less button will cause the dialog to shrink to its compact size This allows the user to repeatedly search for the current transaction criteria while reducing screen clutter The Load From Selected Monitor Trace Line button facilitates quick parameter entry by reading the specifications from the currently selected trace line The Find operation can either hop to the next found line or tag all buffe
81. the target bus When the target is to supply its own voltage examine the Voltage setting dropdown box to verify that it is set to the expected voltage level of your target Modifying this setting will also cause the Bus Signal Threshold levels to automatically adjust to new default values Note that the voltage source should remain set to Target Supplied Optionally the following settings could be customized as needed Further explanation of these settings can be found in the Setting Details section later in this chapter 1 2 3 4 5 Adjust Bus Signal Threshold levels from the automatic defaults if required when considering hysteresis and noise avoidance issues with the target Set the DC Exerciser s Buffer Depth to a desired amount Select the discrete Input Output Signals directions voltage level and external SMB connections Set the analyzer Drive Clock Rate to a desired value Make sure bus rise time RC time constant will allow this rate to operate properly If you are expecting an excessively slow rising bus high RC time constant then check the Disable Collision Detection box and or turn on the Accelerated Rising Edge Drive option Saving the project by selecting File Save Project from the menu bar will allow future reuse of these settings with this target Case 2 The target does not supply any pull up voltage In the case where the target does not supply pull up voltage the CAS 1000 I2C mus
82. the various windows of DC Exerciser and is identical to the Monitor Window Menu described in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Debugger Help Menu The Help menu accesses the on line help features and is identical to the Monitor Help Menu described in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Debugger Tool Bar The Debugger Tool Bar shown in Figure 139 provides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Debugger window Simply click the tool bar button to perform the desired command Table 9 describes the tool bar functions Positioning the mouse cursor over each tool bar button also displays a pop up tooltip providing a short description of the command Dae Gi le gl Figure 139 Debugger Tool Bar Icon Name Function Description D New Command File Clears the Debugger windows Send text box in preparation for entering new debugger commands and data If the text box contains existing unsaved commands and data a prompt is displayed to save it oa Open Command File Opens a previously saved command file and restores the saved debugger commands and data to the Debugger windows Send text box If the text box contains existing unsaved commands and data a prompt is displayed to save it GJ Save Command File Saves the debugger commands and data from the Debugger window s Send text box to a DCF text file If not already working with an opened command file a prompt is displayed to save it Save Data File
83. timing edges in the entire trace buffer The Auto Fit option when checked will automatically adjust the time scale so that one full transaction is visible on the right side of the center orange marker line With the timing display still showing the timing edges beginning at line 100 as shown in Figure 51 click on the zoom button in the scale area The timing display will zoom in as shown in Figure 52 52 Getting Started Notice that the time scale has been reduced from 50us div to 20us div and that the edges appear much larger now revealing more detail 97 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 55 10 712 1 98 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 12 10 738 1 99 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 10 921 1 Foo cursors Date Target aoc rat Read fis 2c ort 101 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 DONE 11 775 1 102 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 11 886 1 103 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 6A 11 914 1 104 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 12 098 1 105 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 52 12125 1 106 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 D2 12 151 1 107 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 12 177 1 108 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 12 230 1 109 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 CHANSEL 12 284 1 Scale 20 us div Auto Fit Line 100 H Interval A to B 9 422762 ms DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 170 1 170 2 Figure 52 Monitor Window Timing Display
84. to a Target Chapter 5 Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor window overview and component descriptions The Monitor window is the primary information display of the I2C Exerciser Data that is passively collected from the target CC bus by the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer is presented in both a trace listing and a graphical timing representation Using the Monitor window samples of bus traffic are easily acquired and traversed for review The Monitor main screen is shown in Figure 106 Typical applications include e Passively collecting and storing TC bus traffic e Examining transaction details such as target read write address data byte transfers slave acknowledgement and protocol violations e Viewing all data and clock signal transitions as timing waveforms e Searching for a specified trigger transaction e Filtering classes of transactions for inclusion or exclusion e Finding and marking transactions of interest e Making time measurements between signal transitions ju Monitor Untitled Lo LS Ese Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz O 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us 31 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 9A 2 215 32 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 AF 2 241 33 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 AE 2 267 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 2 293 EE EREEEE Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 2 632 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 E 2 730 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3
85. trace listing and other related dialogs This can be used to enhance the user readability of transactions Symbol Type Addr AddrType R W Data Byte Width PLL Address 7 Bit Any FAULT Data 7 Bit Any OA 4 1Byte ADC Address 7 Bit Any WARNING Data 7 Bit Any 1C 1 Byte CHANSEL Data 7 Bit Any 0B 1 Byte DONE Data 7 Bit Any 0C 1 Byte OK Data 10 Bit Any 9A 1 Byte DANGER Data 7 Bit Any 0D 1 Byte BUSY Data 7 Bit Any 0E 1 Byte LOWTEMP Data 7 Bit Any 1A 1 Byte MODE Data 7 Bit Any 1B 1 Byte Figure 153 Symbols Pane 172 Configuration and Preferences Using the Add button beneath the list box a new symbol can be defined and appended to the list The Edit button allows alteration of an existing selected symbol definition The Remove and Remove All buttons enable the deletion of a selected symbol definition or the entire list of symbol definitions The Symbol Definition dialog that is displayed when using the Add or Edit buttons is shown in Figure 154 Symbol Definition Symbol Type Address Value v r Byte Addr Y Position VC ke AddrType 7 Bit Width 1 Byte bef RAW Any Fei Figure 154 Symbol Definition Dialog For Data Bytes the value located at a specific byte number position in a message can define a certain symbol which might relate to a device specific structure For example the n th byte of a slave device might be a register
86. transactions Enabling this Disable Collision Detection option accommodates such slow busses and allows the CAS 1000 I2C driving to proceed but without the PC arbitration mechanism Therefore the user needs to keep any target IC bus master s quiet while the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus when collision detection is disabled Accelerated Rising Edge Drive In general when a driver on the bus makes a positive signal transition the rise time is determined by the RC time constant of the bus The rise time governs the upper limit on effective clock rates When the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus it can apply a strong rising drive during the signal transition to overcome the RC time constant creating a rapid edge This can then allow an increase in the clock rate for a given RC value of the bus If this option is set to AUTO the CAS 1000 DC will engage the fast rising edge mechanism automatically whenever it is operating with the 1 C high speed mode Hs mode protocol note however that the High Speed Mode emulation is not currently supported by the CAS 1000 I2C and so the AUTO seiting will have the same effect as OFF If this option is set to ON the CAS 1000 I2C employs the mechanism at all times Setting this option to OFF fully disables the mechanism letting the pull ups or the target capacitance determine rise times High Speed Mode This setting controls the use of the UC high speed mode Hs mode protocol note that the High Speed Mode emul
87. under development and is not ready to be deployed in the system Validating software behavior under special and or extreme conditions Checking system compliance with future expansions Checking system performance with varying DC bus traffic volume Modeling device behavior before the silicon is actually developed The Emulation tool supports the following features and capabilities Emulating up to 1 bus master and up to 10 bus slave devices Thoroughly exercising external 1 C bus over its entire range Validating behavior of all target slave devices Fully initializing target slave devices Extracting target slave device contents Enabling target master interaction with non existent slaves Mimicking a suite of resources environment as seen by the external CC bus Simulating and testing of nonexistent I C bus devices The single emulated master device operates according to commands in a script text file which progresses its bus interactions This supports essentially unlimited read and write bus cycles to from slave devices When emulating a bus master the CAS 1000 I2C communicates with and responds to slave read information as dictated by the script file Programmed conditional branching and schedule control enables a comprehensive bus and target exercising sequence ranging from simple target initialization to complex behavioral stimulation stressing and evaluation Up to 10 independent IC bus slave devices can be emulated concurrently Each slave
88. voltage that is set is returned as a string If unsuccessful an empty string is returned The actual value will be rounded to 0 05 Volt increments ranging from 0 00 to 5 00 Volts 326 Scripting Language set pullup resietanpcell Description Overwrites a new hardware setup value for the pull up resistors for both SDA and SCL bus signals The pull up resistor value is relevant only in Analyzer Supplied mode Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set pullup resistance strOhms Example Call make sure in analyzer supplied mode set_pullup resistance 7400 set resistor value to 7400 Ohms Input Parameters strOhms String containing the Ohms to set The string is presumed to represent an integer value Return Value The actual resistance value that is set is returned as a string If unsuccessful an empty string is returned The actual value will be rounded to the nearest number in the following list 50250 49450 48650 47850 47100 46300 45500 44700 43900 43100 42300 41500 40750 39950 39150 38350 37550 36750 35950 35150 34400 33600 32800 32000 31200 30400 29600 28800 28050 27250 26450 25650 24850 24050 23250 22450 21700 20900 20100 19300 18500 17700 16900 16100 15350 14550 13750 12950 12150 11350 10550 9750 9000 8200 7400 6600 5800 5000 4200 3450 2650 1850 1000 250 Scripting Language 327 set reference voltageil Description Overwrites a new
89. will be indicated in the Result column This column entry may contain N A if there is no minimum specified Minimum and maximum parameter values are loaded from a file as described in the Parameter Specification File section later in this chapter Max This column indicates the maximum passing value for the measurement If the actual measurement returns higher than this then Failed will be indicated in the Result column This column entry may contain N A if there is no maximum specified Maximum and minimum parameter values are loaded from a file as described in the Parameter Specification File section later in this chapter Units This column indicates the units of measurement for the parameter volts Kohms pF ns or KHz Result This column indicates the status of the particular measurement When there is no value present in the Actual column meaning that the measurement has yet to be taken this column entry contains the text Not Tested When a value is present in the Actual column this entry can be Passed or Failed depending on whether the measurement result is within the range specified by the Min and Max columns If both the Min and the Max entries indicate N A then any measurement value is considered to pass For timing characteristics if both the value in the Actual column and the value in the Min column are lt 60 ns or if both the value in the Actual column and the value in
90. 0 b1iOBit FALSE ve test output variables PAGE 00 00 strOutBytes 02 FE 04 FC 00 ve display output bytes print strOutBytes print n 7 combine page number amp output bytes for sending strTemp string_concatenate PAGE strOutBytes 7 7 send msg send_message nAddr bl0Bit strTemp TRUE update progress bar 33 progress 33 7 break needed because EEPROM expects more data to be sent nCount 0 do send 0x00 up to 5 time until ACK strResult send_message nAddr b1l0Bit 00 TRUE if nCount bi break while string_compare strResult Address byte NAKed 0 update progress bar 66 progress 66 read back bytes from page 0 send_message nAddr b10Bit PAGE FALSE strInBytes receive_message nAddr FALSE 5 TRUE LIVE AddrFormat FE Trace Off Bus Idle SCL Low SDA Low 1 0 1 High Figure 205 DC Exerciser Editor Window Layout Component Description 1 Menu Bar Contains the menu bar for the active Editor window 2 Tool Bar Provides quick single click access to commonly used commands for the active Editor window 3 Editor Allows editing of the script file source 346 Table 24 Editor Window Areas Scripting Language Editor Menu Bar When the Editor window is active the Menu Bar accesses functions including File Edit Tools Window and Help tailored to the this screen The
91. 00101 1 960 22 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 01110010 1 986 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 01001001 2 011 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 01001111 2 037 25 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 E 01001111 2 062 ad m Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFomat FE Trace Off Bus SEL SDA 701 ES Figure 41 Monitor Window Trace List Data Column with Data Bytes in Binary Format Getting Started 43 Using the method just described re enable symbol translation and change the display format back to hexadecimal The Data Byte column heading pop up menu also allows the toggling of Compact Mode This special mode displays all of the data bytes for each message on a single line in the trace list Enable Compact Mode by right clicking on the Data Byte column and select the Compact Mode entry as shown in Figure 42 44 Figure 42 Monitor Window Trace List Data Byte Column Right Click Pop up Menu 4 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled e 6 AN File Trace Tools Window Help x SH gt All S 8 BE BE xe vm we Ro Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz VO 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us a 1 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 Hide Column 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1E Trace Layout All 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write
92. 1 1 1 1 464 Debugger Addre Target 7 Bit Write 1 1 a nam mem HOO mm im mmm H Addre Target 18 pn Re 402 1 1 843 D a EEN Programmer Addre Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Re 107 1 1 2 476 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Re 104 1 1 1C DONE 2 632 38 Addre Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 4 4 2444 z Data Target z 7 Bit Gi GG 1 EENS WS Addre Analyzer 7 Bit 1 NE EEN Syre 1 Z t3 1 sZ se 47sata smo GH Addre Target 48 7 Bit 1 o 28 70 4F 4S 72 49 43F 42F 79 11 47 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Re 402 1 10 4F 4F 27 9A AF 4F 12 51 Addre Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Re 107 1 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Re 104 1 54 Addre Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 55 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 56 Addre Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 1 D m Scale 50 us div Auto Fit Line 18 H Intg Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 1 01 M02 Figure 44 Monitor Window Trace List in Compact Mode with Data Bytes Pop up Window When you have finished viewing the trace list in Compact Mode close the Data Bytes pop up window Then select the Normal Mode selection from the Data Bytes column heading menu to put the trace list display back into Normal mode 46 Getting Started You can right click on any column heading and select Hide Column to remove the selected column from the trace list display This may be useful when the user is not interested in some of the data columns and hiding them can reduce screen clutter Additionally
93. 1000 12C analyzer connection instructions and pin assignments Connecting the TC Signals The CAS 1000 I2C connects to the target s CC bus through the RJ45 socket on the front panel labeled Serial Bus This connector provides access to the CC bus and discrete UO signals NOTE 1 The CAS 1000 I2C should not be connected to a target I C bus without also being plugged in to the USB 2 0 port of a powered host PC otherwise the target CC bus may not function properly NoTE 2 The RJ45 connector is not for Ethernet and should NEVER be mistakenly connected to a network The only proper connection to the host PC is through the USB 2 0 port Two types of test cables are available to plug into the Serial Bus connector according to your target needs One included in the standard CAS 1000 I2C package terminates in sleeved flying leads with detachable mini clips for arbitrary target test point hookup The pin assignments of this cable are presented in Table 2 The other optional cable terminates to a 4 pin crimp target connector that is compatible with the Philips DC demo board Table 3 shows the pin assignments of this cable In addition SMB connectors are provided to allow synchronization with external instruments These connectors are labeled AT1 and AT2 on the CAS 1000 I2C front panel and are compatible with standard 50 ohm coaxial cables not included oe hae Signal Description Cable Wire Color SE 1 1 01 Program
94. 141 This allows the user to examine the memory content of the DC EEPROM device without dumping the entire data to a file The components of the Read Contents window are described in Table 11 Read Contents Address Data 00000000 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 06 OO OF 00000010 00 08 OO 09 OO OA OO OB OO OC OO OD OO OE OO OF 00000020 00 10 00 11 00 12 0013 00 14 00 15 00 16 O00 1 00000030 D0 18 00 19 00 14 00 1B 00 1C OO 1D OO 1E OO 1F 00000040 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 23 00 24 00 25 00 26 00 27 00000050 00 28 00 29 00 ZA OO 2B 00 2C 00 2D 00 2E 00 2F 00000060 00 30 00 31 00 32 00 33 00 34 00 35 00 36 O00 37 00000070 00 38 00 39 00 34 00 3B 00 3C 00 3D 00 3E 00 3F 00000000 oo 40 00 41 OO 42 00 43 00 44 00 45 00 46 00 47 00000090 oo 48 00 49 00 44 OO 4B 00 AC 00 4D OO AE OO 4F 00000040 00 50 00 51 00 52 00 53 00 54 00 55 00 56 00 57 00000080 00 58 00 59 00 AA 00 5B 00 SC 00 SD 00 SE OO SF ooooooco 00 60 00 61 00 62 00 63 00 64 00 65 00 66 00 67 ooooooDO 00 68 00 69 00 6A 00 6B 00 6C 00 6D 00 6E 00 6F 000000E0 00 70 00 71 00 72 00 73 00 74 00 75 00 76 00 77 000000F0 00 78 00 79 00 18 00 7B OO 7C 00 7D OO 7E OO 7F Address Figure 141 Programmer Read Window Icon Name Description Go to Beginning Moves to the beginning of the EEPROM memory Go to End Moves to the end of the EEPROM memory Back Moves one page backward the EEPROM memory Forward Moves one page forward in the
95. 3 Dias cca aE aa e a e a aan Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 2 632 37 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 DONE 2 730 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3 441 z 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 17 3 469 f 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 5D 3 494 41 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 35 3 520 42 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 OF 3 545 43 Address Analyzer Read 107 1 1 3 729 oH Data Target Read Bd eg em 3 884 Prrooer L oaa T Taye 30 Tat Road Pacer 3002 46 Address Target 18 7 Bit Read 402 4 694 47 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 3D 4 735 48 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 401 4 1 63 4761 49 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 1 1 52 4 786 50 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 1 16 4811 51 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 4 995 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 1F 5 151 s zca Data J anna Ins nana ana a 4 nuov cnan Figure 107 Monitor Trace Listing Column Descriptions Line This column contains a line number for each trace line The numbering can be relative to the start of the collected traffic or to the line that has been marked as Trigger depending on the preference that has been set Refer to the Monitor Options section of the Preferences Dialog description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter Marker This column is used to mark particular lines of interest It may contain one of the following identifiers e Trigger A trigger is a special user defined tran
96. 4 List of Figures Figure 1 CC Bus TOPOLOGY E 1 Figure 2 Illustration of the CAG 7000 2 Figure 3 DC Exerciser Installation Wizard 00 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeesenaeeeseaeess 9 Figure Windows Run Diglog ccis223ccc c2bsecedaceccevadedacecdan pceeiasdd ceca thas REEE EE REEE ERRARTE 10 Figure 5 License Agreement SCree n c cecccceceseseececseeceeedeesceebeseeceeenennceceasnseceebeneeadeeneeaeeenseeadeeneandeeetanse 10 Figure 6 Customer Registration Green 11 Figure 7 Destination Folder Screen 2 2 0 ccccceesceeeeeeeceeeseeeeeenseceeeeenceneeeeneesceeedaaeceeaaeeaeeseceeaeeegeeenseeeeeeeee 12 Figure 8 Select Program Folder Screenn c c cccccccecccsesceececenceeeeseeceeeensecesenenseeensenseseesaneeeesseneeeensaneeetenente 13 Figure 9 Completing the Installation Wizard Screen ceecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeseeneeeeeeaaes 14 Figure 10 Windows Vista Logo Test Warning Pop Up VWimdow sssssssssssissssrrssesrrsserrssttrrsstrnssrennssrennee 15 Figure 11 Windows XP Logo Test Warning Pop up Wimdow 15 Figure 12 Software Installation Button on the Windows XP Task Bar 16 Figure 13 Installation Completed Screen ececcceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneaeeesenaeeeseaes 17 Figure 14 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome Screen Windows AP 18 Figure 15 Found New Hardware Wizard Install Options Windows SP 19 Figure 1
97. 4 7 Assign address AO when adding to the Emulation Manager 08 77 Run with the Read_ATEMEL_AT24C04 scr master script to simulate EEPR 09 PEPR EE FES EE EE ELLE EE EE EE E EE SOS EE E E E EE bal Pages 12 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 06 00 OF vv 13 00 08 00 09 00 OA 00 OB 00 OC 00 OD 00 OE 00 OF vv 14 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 7 15 00 18 00 19 00 14 00 1B 00 1C 00 1D 00 1E 00 1F 4 16 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 23 00 24 00 25 00 26 00 27 v v 17 00 28 00 29 00 24 00 2B 00 2C 00 2D 00 2E 00 2F 7 7 18 00 30 00 31 00 32 00 33 00 34 00 35 00 36 00 37 7 7 19 00 38 00 39 00 34 00 3B 00 3C 00 3D 00 3E 00 3F 20 00 40 00 41 00 42 00 43 00 44 00 45 00 46 00 47 77 21 00 48 00 49 00 44 00 4B 00 4C 00 4D 00 4E 00 4F 77 10 22 00 50 00 51 00 52 00 53 00 54 00 55 00 56 00 57 vv 11 23 00 58 00 59 00 SA 00 5B 00 5C 00 SD 00 SE 00 SF 77 12 24 00 60 00 61 00 62 00 63 00 64 00 65 00 66 00 67 77 13 25 00 68 00 69 00 64 00 6B 00 6C 00 6D 00 6E 00 6F 77 14 26 00 70 00 71 00 72 00 73 00 74 00 75 00 76 00 7 77 15 27 00 78 00 79 00 74 00 7B 00 7C 00 7D 00 7E 00 ZE 77 16 DO 4 nD Oe OMe Figure 185 Emulated Slave Window UC Device Emulator 253 Emulated Slave Menu Bar When the Emulated Slave window is active the Menu Bar contains entries relevant to the Emulated Slave functions including File Tools Window and Help A description of each menu follows Emulated Slave File Menu In addition to facilitating the
98. 401 1 1 5C AutoFit Columns 7 Monitor 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 34 Al noad i 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write waa OA aie 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 Binary T Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 a 51 Decimal Debugger 8 Data Target 36 pt Read wa 41 4 1c Disable Symbols 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 symbols T 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3E Ee 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 1 14 Normal Mode Programmer 12 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 400 1 4 Compact Mode 13 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 2E SMBus Mode 14 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 F1 1 575 15 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 1 1 0B 1 601 17 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1 843 18 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 4 4A 1 884 19 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 1 1 70 1 909 20 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 1 1 4F 1 935 21 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 45 1 960 22 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 72 1 986 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 49 2 011 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 AE 2 037 25 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 4F 2 062 X Scale 50 us div Auto Fit Line 1 gt Interval A to B 9 422762 ms Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SE SDA POT POZ Getting Started The trace list data will be reformatted as shown in Figure 43 Some messages may contain more data bytes than will fit on the screen When the display is in Compact Mode clicking
99. 441 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 17 3 469 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 1 1 5D 3 494 41 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 4 35 3 520 42 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 OF 3 545 43 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 3 729 Data Target 7 Bit Read mE KEEN 3 884 os Daa ea 26 Tor aa omer T3052 46 Address Target 18 7 Bit Read 402 4 694 47 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 3D 4 735 48 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 401 1 63 4 761 49 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 1 52 4 786 50 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 16 4811 51 Address Analyzer 7 Bit Read 4 4 995 52 Data Target 7 Bit Read 1 TE 5 151 4 ca Nata EE Cem Nand nuov cnan Figure 106 Monitor Window Bus Traffic Monitor 105 Trace Listing The trace listing located in the top portion of the Monitor window provides the fundamental presentation of traffic acquired from the target C bus Each row is considered to represent a transaction which describes a complete read write address or data byte sequence that is conveyed over the bus All of the transaction details are included as columns in the listing Figure 107 shows the Monitor window trace listing Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz 01 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us jja 31 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 9A 2 215 32 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 AF 2 241 33 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 4F 2 267 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 2 29
100. 6 Windows XP Logo Test Warning Pop up Wimdow 20 Figure 17 Found New Hardware Wizard Installation Complete Windows SP 21 Figure 18 Windows Device Manager Windows SP 22 Figure 19 Initial I2C Exerciser Warning Message when CAS 1000 I2C is Not Initially Connected 25 Figure 20 Tools Menu Demo Mode Selection ccecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseecaeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 26 Figure 21 Status Bar Indicating Demo Mode ee ceeceeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 26 Figure 22 Begin Monitor Data Collection eececcecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeseneaeeeeeneeeeeseeaeeesenaeeeseaes 27 Figure 23 Demo Mode Reminder Pop up Wimdow s sssnsssssssseitnrsessttettrtntsrsstttttrnnnnsstttntnnne nest tnnn nnne neee ne nn 27 Figure 24 RUN Status Window eege ele ege eege Eelere 28 Figure 25 Monitor Window Centered on Trigger Lime 29 Figure 26 Monitor Window Right Click Pop Up Menu 30 Figure 27 Monitor Window Trace List Positioned on Trigger Line 0 2 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 31 Figure 28 Monitor Window Right Click Pop up Menu Selecting Trigger Gettings 32 Figure 29 Configuration Manager Trigger Setup Screen eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 33 Figure 30 Monitor Window Trace List Column Headmgs 34 Figure 31 I2C Exerciser Status TEE 34 Figure 32 Go to Start Tool Bar Button ss gag degt aE ege tee eege E REER 35 Figure 33 Mo
101. 702 Figure 50 Monitor Window Trace List Positioned on Cursor A Line Getting Started 51 Now right click in the trace list area of the Monitor window and select the Go to Cursor B pop up menu entry This will cause the trace list and timing display to reposition to the Cursor B line as shown in Figure 51 The Cursor B line can be seen on line 100 in the trace list Both the trace list line and vertical marker in the timing display are colored magenta to help distinguish them from other display elements Note that the timing display s Line field is displaying 100 and that the magenta colored vertical marker for Cursor B is positioned on the first edge of this data word 4 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Soo AN Eile Trace Tools Window Help amp x eh gt All S BH GE 2 xB ee or Ro x Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RW Nak Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time ei WO1 a 86 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 9368 1 onor 87 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 22 9395 1 All 88 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 5A 9 421 1 Monitor 89 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 31 9 446 4 GE 90 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 OF 9 472 1 KG 91 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 9 655 1 92 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 61 9 811 1 Debugger 93 Tagged Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 DANGER 9909 1 94 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 10 620 1 F ER
102. 8 Installation 5 The dialog shown in Figure 15 will pop up Click on Install the software automatically Recommended and click on the Next button Found New Hardware Wizard Installation This wizard helps you install software for Corelis CAS 1000 2C Firmware Loader 0440 If your hardware came with an installation CD a lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do C Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Figure 15 Found New Hardware Wizard Install Options Windows XP 19 6 The Hardware Wizard will attempt to locate the driver that was installed with the DC Exerciser 20 software Under Windows XP a warning dialog box will pop up as shown in Figure 16 You can safely ignore the warning and continue the installation process by pressing the Continue Anyway button Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Corelis C4S 1000 12C Firmware Loader 0440 has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows xP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway Figure 16 Windows X
103. 8 v Addr 18 S gem AddrType 7 Bit x AddrType 7 Bit T an s e gs GG Passed T No Stop No Stop vi ADDRESS MODE FE 33 ve tutorial script EE 00 address 2A 21 30 OD 0A 33 pause 500 milliseconds address 18 FF 00 pause 500 address C4 21 30 OD OA Figure 84 Tutorial Script Loaded Into Debugger Notice the first line of the debugger script This is a comment line that specifies the address mode FE or 7F that must be used with this script The current address mode is shown in the status bar at the bottom of the main window It should report the default FE mode with the text AddrFormat FE to match the expected behavior of the script instructions Recall from earlier in the chapter that this setting is changed via the Formats tab of the Preferences dialog Tools Preferences When you save a debugger command file this line is automatically inserted at the beginning to remind you of the address mode needed for the script to execute correctly Getting Started 81 Click on the Send button to execute the script and the bytes sent will be echoed to the Receive area text box Then return to the Monitor window to view the captured data You will see in the trace list that the bytes were sent to various bus addresses as specified by the script This is shown in Figure 85 below 5 DC Exerciser Untitled toee File Trace Tools Window Help W PhO SEE E Se Sege r 8 e x ke it o S
104. Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 KH onor 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1E Find Ka Ai 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 BC E Monitor 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 34 me 5 Data Target 54 7 Bt Write 403 FAULT Less Tagan Fndnext Jl ges e 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 7 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 51 Seege Debugger 8 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 WARNING T d R Type Any Se NAK any e 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 SS i 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 3E Addr any z Error Any H k Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 H a Programmer Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 400 AddrType Any bi 1 0 1 Aen MS a EEECg Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 F1 RM Any Si Rot any ibd Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 16 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 CHANSEL SS Byte 17 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 Hen E Position an 7 e Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1A Mask Width l L Je ata Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 70 Hex J S 20 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 21 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 45 Load From Selected Monitor Trace Line Defeuits 22 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 72 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 49 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2 037 0 25 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2 062 0 in f 24 25 Addr Addr Data Data S010110 0WN S01 01100A 00101110A 11110001jA 00001011N Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat F
105. C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf TRUE Send message 0x18 FALSE 12 34 AB CD TRUE Glitch Pattern Injection 359 Example 2 In the following example the glitch pattern is also loaded when the load_glitch function is called However the trigger is not armed until the ARM_GLITCH keyword is seen in the data stream Therefore the trigger will be applied to the data bytes 2 3 and 4 of the message only with the condition specified in the loaded file If the trigger was specified for an address cycle it would not find the match and would never inject the glitch This type of injection is useful when you want to inject the glitch to a particular data byte within a message main load_glitch C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf FALSE Send message 0x18 FALSE 12 ARM_GLITCH 34 AB CD TRUE Example 3 In the following example the glitch pattern and the trigger are armed before the master receives the message The trigger will be effective for the whole message beginning from the address byte For injecting glitch while master is receiving data the arming must happen with the load_glitch function because the ARM_GLITCH keyword cannot be used for specifying a location within the data stream main load_glitch C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples simplel gpf TRUE receive_message 0x18 FALSE 4 TRUE Example 4 The following
106. COREL S CAS 1000 I2C E I2C Bus Analyzer Exerciser Programmer and Tester User s Manual Corelis Inc 12607 Hiddencreek Way Cerritos CA 90703 Telephone 562 926 6727 Fax 562 404 6196 Document Part Number 70357 2 Copyright 2006 2009 Corelis Inc PRINTING HISTORY Edition 1 February 2006 Edition 2 March 2006 Edition 3 May 2006 Edition 4 June 2006 Edition 5 November 2006 Edition 6 October 2007 Edition 7 July 2008 Edition 8 January 2009 GENERAL NOTICE Preface Information contained in this document is subject to change without notice CORELIS shall not be liable for errors contained herein for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of material contained in this manual This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights reserved No part of this document may be reproduced or translated to other languages without the prior written consent of CORELIS This manual is a CORELIS proprietary document and may not be transferred to another party without the prior written permission of CORELIS CORELIS assumes no responsibility for the use of or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by CORELIS ENVIRONMENTAL NOTICE psd a This product must be disposed of in accordance with the WEEE directive TRADEMARK NOTICE I C Bus is a registered trademark of Philips Electronics N V Pentium
107. Calibration Monitor Configuration Manager F8 inr Preferences F7 anr Debugger E 4001001 Programmer Figure 77 Tools Menu Deselect Demo Mode LIVE AddrFormat FE Trace Off Bus Idle SCL High SDA Figure 78 Status Bar Indicating Live Data Mode Getting Started 75 When the DC Exerciser is first used to interact with the bus in Live Mode as you will do in the next step it checks the electrical characteristics of the target bus to determine if there may be a possible conflict with the electrical settings of the current project Because you have no target connected during this tutorial you can expect to see the warning message shown in Figure 79 below DC Exerciser EX 7 Target supplied voltage detected NONE Project Settings Target Supplied Voltage 3 30 High Threshold Voltage 1 807 Low Threshold Voltage 0 9047 WARNING A target supplied reference voltage has NOT been detected This may result in an inactive bus which the C4S 10002C E cannot drive Do you want to open the Configuration Manager with the recommended Analyzer Supplied voltage settings Select No to continue with the current project settings Figure 79 Analyzer Supplied Mode Prompt If you see this message click on the Yes button to open the Configuration Manager with the 12C Exerciser s recommended electrical settings Then simply click on the Close button at the bottom of the Configuration Manager window to accept the recommended
108. Column Heading Getting Started 47 After hiding the UO 2 column and repositioning the I O 1 column the Monitor window should now look like Figure 47 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled oll E Ai File Trace Tools Window Help 5 x GM Zb 44 2a xa YR Mo Ee a x shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us vO 1 a 1 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 0 1 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1E 28 1 Hot 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 DC 53 1 F Monitor 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 34 78 1 al 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 0A 104 1 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 287 1 7 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 51 443 1 Debugger 8 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1c 541 41 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 252 1 E 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 3E 1280 1 H 1 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 1464 1 Programmer 12 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 400 1 522 1 13 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 2E 1 550 1 14 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 FA 1 575 1 we Tagged Data Target 7 Bit Write 1 601 1 ir at er HOG i a aR ye Address Target 7 Bit Read 1 843 1 18 Data Analyzer ze 7 Bit Read 402 4A 1 884 1 19 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 70 1 909 1 20 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 AE 1 935 1 21 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 45 1 960 0 22
109. Ctrl S Save Debugger Command File As Ki Save Debugger Data Exit Figure 138 Debugger File Menu New Debugger Command File Clears the Debugger windows Send text box in preparation for entering new debugger commands and data If the text box contains existing unsaved commands and data a prompt is displayed to save it Open Debugger Command File Opens a previously saved command file and restores the saved debugger commands and data to the Debugger window s Send text box If the text box contains existing unsaved commands and data a prompt is displayed to save it Save Debugger Command File Saves the debugger commands and data from the Debugger window s Send text box to a DCF text file If not already working with an opened command file a prompt is displayed to save it Save Debugger Command File As Same as Save Debugger Command File above except that it always prompts for a new filename before saving Save Debugger Data Stores the data collected from the bus in the Receive text box into a DDF text file Recent Files Provides a list of recently used project files for quick access Exit Terminates the DC Exerciser application Interactive Debugger 153 Debugger Tools Menu The Tools menu provides a path to the major application function windows This is identical to the Monitor Tools Menu described in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Debugger Window Menu The Window menu manages
110. Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C DS Paste Ctrl V Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark A Previous Bookmark Clear Bookmarks a Eind Ctrl F Z Replace Ctri H Syntax Check Figure 207 Editor Edit Menu Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation Redo Restores a previously undone editing operation Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at the line where the cursor is located or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current script is searched for the specified text and if found that text is brought into view and highlighted Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of inte
111. Data Exit Figure 147 Programmer File Menu New Programmer Configuration File Initializes the Programmer configuration to its defaults If the active Programmer configuration contains unsaved settings you will be prompted to save the configuration Open Programmer Configuration File Loads a previously saved configuration from file If the active Programmer configuration contains unsaved settings you will be prompted to save the configuration Save Programmer Configuration File Saves the Programmer configuration to a PCF text file If you are not already working with an open configuration file you will be prompted for a filename Save Programmer Configuration File As Same as Save above except the user is prompted for a new file name to avoid overwriting the previously loaded file Dump Data Stores the data read from a device to a file EXO HES BIN TXT Recent Files Provides a list of recently used project files for quick access Exit Terminates the DC Exerciser application Bus Traffic Monitor 163 Programmer Tools Menu The Tools menu provides a path to the major application function windows This is identical to the Monitor Tools Menu selections in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Programmer Window Menu The Window menu manages the various windows of 12C Exerciser and is identical to the Monitor Window Menu in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Programmer Help Menu The He
112. Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 2F 10 661 1 KE 96 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 57 10 687 1 Programmer 97 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 55 10 712 4 98 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 12 10 738 4 99 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 10 921 4 foo cursore Data Tage apc ret Rea fis 2e aora 101 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 DONE 11 175 1 102 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 11 886 1 103 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 6A 11914 1 104 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 12 098 1 105 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 52 12 125 1 106 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 D2 12 151 1 107 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 12 177 1 E 108 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 12 230 1 109 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 CHANSEL 12 284 1 Scale 50 us div Auto Fit Line mell Interval AtoB 9 422762ms Ready DEMO AddrFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 701 1 02 Figure 51 Monitor Window Trace List Positioned on Cursor B Line The zoom function focuses around the center of the display Clicking on either the or zoom buttons in the Scale area will change the time scale and cause the display to zoom out or zoom in allowing you to see less detail but more edges or more detail but fewer edges You can also right click anywhere in the timing display and select Zoom in or Zoom out from the pop up menu to change the zoom level If you zoom out far enough in the timing display you can see all of the
113. Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 72 1 986 0 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 49 2 011 0 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4F 2 037 0 4 z D JAuto Fit Line 1 Interval A to B 9 422762 ms Ready DEMO AddFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL ISDA 101 170 2 j 48 Figure 47 Monitor Window Trace List with Rearranged I O Columns Getting Started If you wish to unhide one or more previously hidden columns or wish to restore the column layout to its default state right click on any column heading and select the Trace Layout menu The Trace Layout dialog will appear as shown in Figure 48 showing each column and whether or not it is visible Click on the Default Column Layout button to restore the default column settings and then click on the Close button Trace Layout Visible Column Name Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex d AddrType RAV NAK Error KHz I O 1 02 Data Byte Hex SISISISISISIEIESSE lt Enable All Columns Default Column Layout Close Figure 48 Trace Layout Dialog Getting Started 49 Timing Display The lower portion of the Monitor window contains a graphical representation of the DC bus signal transitions depicted as a timing diagram similar to a logic analyzer A picture of the timing display is shown in Figure 49 It displays the actual state and edge times of the signals as they transitioned on the bus while conveying transactions 54 Address
114. Data Set up Time tsu par Bus Free Time tgur SCL Frequency Esc SCL High Period Duer SCL Low Period tow SCL Rise Time fol SCL Fall Time tic SDA Rise Time tpa SDA Fall Time tpa Slave Parameters SDA Low Voltage Data Hold Time tup par Data Set up Time ona SDA Rise Time t pa SDA Fall Time tpa Parameters Scope Actual This column indicates the actual resultant value from the measurement If this column entry is empty then the parameter has not yet been measured For timing characteristics certain special measurement limitations apply The CAS 1000 I2C analyzer has a 512 sample measurement buffer and runs at a sample rate of 50 MHz This provides approximately 10 us 10 000 ns worth of analog data for measurement If a timing characteristic measurement would be greater than this amount of time then it cannot be determined and the Actual column will contain gt 10000 all timing results are in nanoseconds Similarly the analyzer has a lower limit on measurement accuracy and any result that would be less than 60 ns will be indicated as lt 60 Note that all timing measurements may be 20 ns The actual value of SCL Frequency Fscl will be indicated as lt 100 when either SCL High Period Thi or SCL Low Period Tlow is measured as gt 1000 Min This column indicates the minimum passing value for the measurement If the actual measurement returns lower than this then Failed
115. Debugger Options Pane ieetere eniinn eE A aE AE NE EA EREA E 150 I2C Exerciser Debugger Window Layout 152 Debugger File Menus ijsccsssiscceeeiacceeitian E e EEEREN 153 Debugger Tool Bafecedsr ieri nk E ER EEE AER 154 Programmer Ve EE 157 Programmer Read Window cccccccsseccceeteecccceteeedeeeteeseceenenecceeteneccceneeeeceeeseeagentaeeceeeneeedeennees 159 Programming Progress WiNdOW c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene nese eeneee ee teeeeetaeeeeesieeeeetieeeersieeeeeeaa 160 Verifying Progress VWimdow isseire iieri riina EaR t AEE A AAEN A EA Aa Aani TE 160 Erasing Progress Window seuss nois reaa ielas ARA iier EREE S TATA FEATS ARS Taa 160 Programmer Options Pane o leirer ieiiernr aras i EAEAN AEEA EASE EASAC RA EA 161 I2C Exerciser Programmer VWimdow 162 Programmer Bile Menu seora A EAE EAO ete 163 Programmer ToolBar erii ae e AA NEEN eee 164 Configuration Manager Dialog Panes Settings selected 167 Tiggers PANG eron arara SE LIE PEE des geen day Edge ee Ze E d e 169 Eeer Eenegkeet 170 Filter Definition Dialog Similar to Ed 171 NIDDER cicero ws ceases och E A ee 172 Symbol Definition Delosch enee ege e EEGENEN ee 173 SMBUS PANG ees eeneg dev sh causes OEE E E RE A ene 174 SMBus Decoder File Dialog erai ASSEL ee aes EE aes neice 175 SOMINGS PANO rec Geesse eege ee es 176 Elek nee eege eege ea Eege e ee 180 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figu
116. E Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 01 70 2 Figure 58 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Find 2E Data Result Getting Started 59 Go to the start of the trace list using the Go to Start tool bar button as previously shown Change the Data Byte Value field to 72 as shown in Figure 59 Click on the Tag All button and you will be prompted to clear all existing tags in the trace listing as shown in Figure 60 Click on the Yes button and the search will commence Find Transfer Type Any v NAK Any v Addr X Hex Any v Error Any AddrType Any e UO 1 Am e RAW Any v I O 2 Any v Data Byte Value Byte Hex z F Position BON S Mask idth Hex wite anuna Figure 59 Find a Data Value of 72 Tag H Currently tagged rows will be cleared Do you want to proceed Figure 60 Clear Tagged Rows Prompt 60 Getting Started When the search is complete the pop up window in Figure 61 will appear to notify you how many trace lines matched the search criteria Click on the OK button and the trace list will display the first tagged line as shown in Figure 62 Lines 22 and 80 will be tagged since they contain the data value 72 Tag All Ea i Found 2 matched transactions Figure 61 Matched Transactions Prompt 4 RC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled aea AN File Trace Tools Window Help 2 x ad gt mh Il amp 4 AR Bs
117. FALSE to be used Return Values An integer indicating what the user had clicked TRUE If user clicked on Yes or OK FALSE If user clicked on No 310 Scripting Language pause Description Halts execution of script commands for the specified amount of milliseconds before continuing Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype pause nMilliseconds Example Call pause 1000 pause execution for 1 second Input Parameters nMilliseconds Integer indicating amount of time in milliseconds to pause Return Value None Scripting Language 311 print Description Echoes a specified string to the Test window or Emulated Master window Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype print strOutput Example Call send Hello world to the output window with a carriage return print Hello world n Input Parameters strOutput String containing the text to echo Return Value None 312 Scripting Language progress Description Updates the progress bar in the Test window or Emulated Master window by setting its percentage to a specified value Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype progress nPercent Example Call progress 95 set progress bar to 95 Input Parameters nPercent Integer specifying the percentage to which the progress bar will be set Return Values None Scripting Language 313 pulse discrete
118. Flying Leads Serial Bus Connector Pin Assignments s ssssssssseertnnseesttrnrrnnstrrrtrnnrnneserrrenn renne 92 Table 3 4 Pin Crimp Cable Pin Assignments 0 0 ccecceeee etter teeter ee ee tte ee ee taeeeeeeiieeeee teases siieeeeesieeeeneaa 93 Table 4 Monitor Window Layout 0 cceceicneee ee eeneee erent ee ee tiene erties ee eaeee eee eee ee eaeeeeesaeeeeeneeeeeeneeee 123 T ble 5 Monitor Tool Bar FUNCI NS secs taszsettce cect date act odcces Dee a aaa aaaea ar aa aaa aiaia aaae 137 Table 6 Debugger Script KEyWOrds massi eeir ieeia aii ra aenar ee te ee ee REAR Eaa A ERER ENTERAR kna KAERRA RANEK AE 145 Table 7 Debugger Error Injection KeyWords ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeeseeeaeeeeseneaeeeseeaeeeseenaees 149 Table 8 Debugger Window Layout 152 Table 9 Debugger Tool Bar FUNCTIONS cccceceeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeececeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeesecsnaeeeeeeeensensaaeeeeess 154 Table 10 Programmer Function Descriptions sssssesssseessesrtnrstesttttntrnsttesttttttnnnttstttnnnn nnanet tEnn nnmnnn eenn 158 Table 11 Programmer Read Contents Window Function Descriptions cccceeceeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeees 159 Table 12 Programmer Window Areas aeea aa ae ea aata a eaea aeaaea aa eaa anaana 162 Table 13 Programmer Tool Bar Functions 200 ececcccecceeeeeeeceeeec cece eeeeeeeecaaeaeeeeeeesesecccnsaeeeeeeeeeseesanaeeeeees 164 Table 14 Configuration Manager Panes nn
119. Hardware was never called otherwise a pointer to a string containing the actual resulting low threshold voltage closest available to requested Parameters szVoltage The string holding text of the new bus low threshold level as a floating point decimal value in volts 218 Third Party Application Interface 2C_SetBusPullupResistance Overwrite configuration pull up resistors with provided value same for both bus signals Note that high pull up values may increase the signal rise times impacting the bus monitoring function and affecting clock rate performance This is also affected by Accelerated Rising Edge Drive and threshold values Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_SetBusPullupResistance char szResistance Return Value NULL if I2c_InitHardware was never called otherwise a pointer to a string containing the actual resulting resistor value closest available to requested Parameters szResistance The string holding text of the new pull up resistor values as a floating point decimal value in ohms Third Party Application Interface 219 2C_SetBusVo tageSource Selects the bus reference voltage source as either provided by the target or by the analyzer programmable level the target pull ups should be removed Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SetBusVoltageSource int nSource ji Return Value 0 if I2C_InitHardware was never called otherwise 1
120. I2c_InitHardware was never called otherwise a pointer to a string containing the actual resulting voltage closest available to requested Parameters szVoltage The string holding text of the new TTL high voltage level of the discrete I O as a floating point decimal value in volts Third Party Application Interface 223 2C_SetFEAddrFormat Defines the mode of byte representation used throughout the set of DLL commands for 7 bit addresses That is the 7 bits of the protocol address is always given in a byte but these bits can be placed in the byte either left justified where the LSB is zero FE mode or right justified where the MSB is zero 7F mode Suppose the protocol slave address is binary 0110101 it can be represented in a byte as hex 6A left justified FE mode or 35 right justified 7F mode Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SetFEAddrFormat int bEnable Return Value 0 if I2C_InitHardware was never called otherwise 1 Parameters bEnable 1 for FE mode 0 for 7F mode 224 Third Party Application Interface 2C_SetMonitorCallback Sets application defined callback function for processing transaction data This callback function is called whenever CAS 1000 I2C detects any new transactions on the target DC bus The callback function should perform minimal necessary work and return immediately to avoid overflowing of CAS 1000 I2C buffer When this API function is called the cu
121. If checked the zoom level automatically adjusts to an optimum scale such that about 20 SCL clock periods are shown over the timing graph Line controls These controls reflect the location of the timing graph s Link Edge Marker described below relative to the trace listing and allow easy navigation through the transactions e Line text box This indicates the trace listing line that corresponds to the location of the Link Edge Marker in the timing waveform whether in view or not An arbitrary number may be entered here to jump to that transaction line The Link Edge Marker will then attach to the beginning of the transaction waveform and the graph will center on this new location e Line buttons These left and right arrow buttons assign the Link Edge Marker to the previous or following transaction respectively The graph will center on this new location Link Edge Marker This vertical line in the waveform graph indicates the beginning of a particular transaction It corresponds to the trace listing line that is identified in the Line text box described above Interval A to B This indicates the time difference between the position of Cursor A and Cursor B SDA SCL waveforms These waveforms show the graphical time sequence of signal states as they transition from low to high Cross hairs indicator As the mouse cursor is positioned over the timing graph the time at its position and the nearest correspondin
122. Line o ele isting Line 4995 1 7 START Hold Time Checking 5151 1 8 5 249 1 Minimum Hold Time 0 16us v 9 5 960 1 10 5 988 1 12 6 199 1 X 69 042 us Corelis Ready DEMO AddFormat FE Trace Off Bus GEL SDA 170 1 70 2 Figure 72 Monitor Window Trace List with Trigger at Line Zero Numbering 70 Getting Started The Timestamp Start option operates in a similar fashion When set to Starting from 0 timestamps will increment sequentially starting from the first trace list entry This is the default setting When set to Trigger is time 0 the line entry containing the trigger will have a timestamp of zero with lines before the trigger having a negative timestamp and lines after having a positive timestamp Click on the Trigger is time 0 option and observe how the Time column changes around the Trigger line as shown in Figure 73 aa DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled e II ISS AN File Trace Tools Window Help x SAH rho 2288 BE xe vr wc al O x Shortcuts ine Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType Rw NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us V0 4 IS Les 42 Preferences Wa 1715 0 01101 11 1 690 1 Add 10 Monitor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats 4 506 4 Monitor 9 1 350 1 TAF 8 Line Column 1252 4 ane EE 7 Starting from 1 default Trigger is line 0 541 1 6 513 1 Debugger
123. N f Open Script File Ctrl 0 KH Save Script File Ctrl S Save Script File s Print Preview amp Print Ctrl P Exit Figure 194 Test File Menu New Script File Closes the currently open script file and creates a new empty script If the currently open script file contains unsaved modifications a prompt is displayed to save it Open Script File Loads the content of a previously saved script file into the Script Source text area All breakpoints are removed If the currently open script file contains unsaved modifications a prompt is displayed to save it Save Script File Saves the current script to a SCR text file If not already working with an opened script file a prompt is displayed to save it This does not save the breakpoints from the file Save Script File As Same as Save Script File above except that it always prompts for a new filename before saving Print Preview Previews the current script before printing it Print Prints the current script Recent Files Provides a list of recently used project files for quick access Exit Terminates the DC Exerciser application 268 Script Driven Bus Tester Test Edit Menu The Edit menu shown in Figure 195 provides commands that apply to the editing of the current script gt Undo Ctrl Z cu Redo Ctrl A Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C DS Paste Ctrl V Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark A Previous Bookmark Cl
124. Overwrites configuration bus reference voltage with provided value Overwrites configuration receiver high threshold voltage with provided value Overwrites configuration provided value receiver low threshold voltage with Overwrites configuration pull up resistor value for both bus signals with provided value Selects the bus reference voltage source as either provided by the target or by the analyzer programmable level Overwrites configuration SCL rate with provided value when the analyzer is driving the bus Sets the output level of one of the discrete I O signals 197 Function Description I2C_SetDiscreteVoltage Overwrite configuration TTL voltage level for the high state of the discrete I O signals I2C_SetFEAddrFormat Defines the mode of byte representation used throughout the set of DLL commands for 7 bit addresses I2C_SetMonitorCallback Sets application defined callback function for processing transaction data captured by the analyzer I2C_SetRisingEdgeDriveMode Overwrites configuration rising edge drive setting with provided selection I2C_SetTimingSkew Sets new timing skew parameters for the analyzer I2C_ShutdownHardware I2C_SlaveGet Status I2C_SlaveStart I2C_SlaveStartSDF I2C_SlaveStop T2C_SlaveStopAll 198 Forces an orderly shutdown of the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer and its USB disconnection Returns the current status of a slave Starts a slave emulation Starts a slav
125. P Logo Test Warning Pop up Window Installation 7 After the necessary files are copied to the system the dialog box shown in Figure 17 will appear indicating that the driver has been successfully installed Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for e Corelis CAS 1000 12C Firmware Loader 0440 Click Finish to close the wizard Figure 17 Found New Hardware Wizard Installation Complete Windows XP Installation 21 8 Click on the Finish button to close the Hardware Wizard dialog box 9 Another Found New Hardware Wizard should appear again Repeat steps 3 to 8 10 The installation of the driver is now complete and Windows will proceed to detect and configure the CAS 1000 I2C Verify that the CAS 1000 I2C was correctly detected by checking for its entry in the Windows Device Manager To open the Device Manager right click on the My Computer icon on the desktop and then select Properties from the pop up menu Click on the Hardware tab and then click on the Device Manager button An entry named Corelis CAS 1000 I2C 04A1 should be listed in the Universal Serial Bus controllers section as shown in Figure 18 E Device Manager File Action view Help Fa e GG 9 d Computer amp Disk drives EI Display adapters ZA DYD CD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers gy Human Interface Devices gt Keyboards Mice and other pointing dev
126. Read Other VG 85 Data Error v Color Scheme isl 86 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write GE Debugger 87 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Background E Alternate color per message gt 88 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write B H 89 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Cursor A P 90 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Text u Text 1 u Programmer 91 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read ey eet 92 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read Background P Background 1 X 93 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 94 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read Erari 95 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Text e Text 2 a 96 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 97 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Background 99 e Jl 98 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Timing View SDA Signal Sa S Beginning Marker X a 101 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Ess Ee 102 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write sci sina Ey 103 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 104 Address Target ADC 7 Bit _ Write sd Scale 20 us div Auto Fit Line 100 Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 1 0 1 1 0 2 Figure 65 Monitor Colors Preferences Screen Getting Started 63 Since Cursor A is visible in the trace list we will change its background color to observe how these color configuration items work Click on the Cursor A Background control and select the color Blue from the pop up color picker as shown in Figure 66 Using the same method click on the Cursor A Text control and select the color White from the pop up color
127. Receive D ta E 142 DEBUGGER aa a a T E Ee E EEN 144 Error Jnleetlon 2 Segkech eegene EES ENEASEEENSEE EENS a 148 Debugger Opt E 150 Debugger Window Reference scccceseecceceseneeeeeeenenseeeeneeseeesneeseeeeneeseeesneeesesesneeseeesneeseseneesesesnaneeenes 152 Chapter 7 Serial EEPROM Programmer ccccccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 156 Programmer Operations ccccsccccseeeseeeeeeeeesenaeeesneeeneeeessaesaseeesnseeeseeeesaeseaseaeeeneseseaesaseeeenseaeseeeseaees 157 Programmer Options tee eege 161 Programmer Window Reference sscsssessessessessesssesesesesesesesesnsesnessnessuenseesseeesueesaeesagessoessaessaseees 162 Chapter 8 Configuration and Preference cccccessssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Configuration Manager cccsccccseccsseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeneeeeeeaesenaaesasneeeeneaeseaesasaaeeeneeeeseaesaseaesaseeeseeeeseneeneas 166 Preferences Dial siicncc cecstccescecececceteceescetie cecnceerenscntecesconctasevenceeesasuedivevenceuewesuetie cusetuereeducheecetterenscstee 184 Using Project Files E aAA i ubecenet secnetdesdconetes cenemecesccevayewctunetsrscumecsvetesssenutgeeanamer 189 Calibration eege 191 Chapter9 Third Party Application Interface css eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 194 EA NEE 194 Dynamic Link Library DLL c ecccesseeeeeeeeee eee eeeneeeeeeenee seen eneeseeeseneeseeesneeseseseeeseeeseeeseseseneeseneeseeeenes 195 General Call
128. Run Status dialog box lists the name of the trace data file currently being 178 Configuration and Preferences logged to After finishing capturing you may double click on the listed filenames to load the trace data to the Monitor Window Driving Bus Clock Rate Considerations When adjusting the SCL clock rate at which the analyzer operates the bus as a master during Debugger and Emulation functions the user must be aware of limitations imposed by the target bus itself For example if the bus rise time is too slow for the selected rate signals take a long time to reach the high threshold voltage it may appear to the analyzer that another master is colliding and overriding its own SDA level For very long rise times the signal might not even reach this level before turning around to fall This may result in the analyzer protocol tracker reporting errors or it may even hang the bus if it seems like a new clock state has not arrived Such a bus is therefore not suitable for the selected clock rate without additional methods to account for it The Disable Collision Detection option restores better clock rate capability but eliminates the possibility of legitimate collisions getting detected and flagged in the trace listing Forcing the Accelerated Rising Edge Drive mode on even when not in high speed mode will allow better driving clock rate range since the analyzer will force rising edges up quickly despite the excess capacitance This of cou
129. SDA SCL Figure 1 CC Bus Topology The System Management Bus or SMBus was defined by Intel Corporation in 1995 and is based on the I C bus architecture It is used in personal computers and servers for low speed system management communications SMBus is a two wire interface through which simple system and power management related chips can communicate with the rest of the system A system using SMBus as a control bus for these system and power management related tasks pass messages to and from devices by addressed transfers enabling Product Overview 1 moderate transfer rates using minimal board resources With System Management Bus for example a device can provide manufacturer information tell the system what its model part number is save its state for a suspend event report different types of errors accept control parameters and return its status The SMBus may share the same host device and physical bus with standard IC components Intel originally conceived the SMBus as the communication bus to accommodate Smart Batteries and other system and power management components Introduction to the CAS 1000 I2C The Corelis CAS 1000 I2C is an I C bus SMBus analyzer exerciser programmer and tester This advanced instrument is used to e Monitor and log PC bus traffic in real time e Generate traffic to exercise the bus and communicate with its slave components e Program and read in system EEPROMs e Emulate I C master
130. Showing Edges Zoomed in at Line 100 Getting Started 53 The Interval A to B field always displays the calculated time difference between the position of Cursor A and Cursor B Reposition Cursor A by clicking on the small green triangle on the left side of the Field row and while holding the mouse button down drag it over the last edge of the previous transaction as shown in Figure 53 Notice that while you are dragging the Cursor a tool tip follows the cursor and constantly updates to show you the current absolute time of the current cursor position and the difference in time between Cursors A and B Once Cursor A is positioned over the last edge of the previous transaction release the mouse button to place Cursor A there The Interval A to B field now displays the difference in time between Cursor A and Cursor B which in this case is measuring the gap in time between the end of the transaction on trace line 99 and the start of the transaction on trace line 100 97 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 55 10 712 1 98 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 12 10 738 4 89 Cursor A Address Analizer 06 rot Read M 07 tet a Dag Cursors Data Target ADC 7st Read Ee nee P 101 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 DONE 41 975 4 102 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 11 886 1 103 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 6A 11 914 1 104 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 12 098 1 105 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 52 12 125 41 106 Data
131. Symbols definition screen to be displayed as shown in Figure 34 This screen allows the user to add new symbol definition rules and to edit or remove existing symbol definition rules Triggers Fiters Symbols SMBus Settings Files Symbol Type Addr AddrType BIN Data Byte Width PLL Address 7 Bit Any FAULT Data 7 Bit Any OA 4 1 Byte ADC Address 7 Bit Any WARNING Data 7 Bit Any 1C 1 Byte CHANSEL Data 7 Bit Any 0B 1 Byte DONE Data 7 Bit Any 0C 1 Byte OK Data 10 Bit Any 9A 1 Byte DANGER Data 7 Bit Any OD 1 Byte BUSY Data 7 Bit Any 0E 1 Byte LOWTEMP Data 7 Bit Any 1A 1 Byte MODE Data 7 Bit Any 1B 1 Byte Figure 34 Configuration Manager Symbols Definition Screen Getting Started 37 Click on the Add button and the Symbol Definition dialog shown in Figure 35 will appear In the Symbol field type DAC which is an acronym for Digital to Analog Converter In the Addr field type 18 This will cause the string DAC to be displayed in the address column for any trace list entries with a 7 bit hex address of 18 Click on the OK button to accept the new symbol definition rule Symbol Definition Symbol DAC Type Address Addr 18 AddrType 7 Bit RAW Any Value Byte Position Figure 35 Symbol Definition Dialog 38 Getting Started The Configuration Manager Symbols screen will now contain the newly added DAC entry
132. Target 1E 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 30 904 SS Data Target dE 7 Bit Write on 1 5A 30 932 Address Target 58 7 Bit Write 1 31 116 Gemeen Data Target 58 7 Bit Write 1 31 169 Se Tagged Data Target 58 7 Bit Write NAK i5 1 ie 31 195 v Scale 10 ps div Auto Fit Line L _5 H gt Interval A to B 9 422762 ms arc f aa adr O PZ rs ETC E in So oT a E RE Figure 49 Monitor Window Timing Display The bus clock line SCL is shown at the bottom of the timing display with the bus data line SDA positioned just above it This allows the value of the data line to be easily determined as the clock line rises and falls The Bit row displays one of the following letters over each recognized sequence of bus transitions to indicate what has occurred A Start bit occurred indicating a new message is beginning A Stop bit occurred indicating the end of a message Master indication that this message is performing a read operation Master indication that this message is performing a write operation A value of 0 is being conveyed in either an address or data transaction A value of 1 is being conveyed in either an address or data transaction The current address or data transaction is being acknowledged ACK The current address or data transaction is being not acknowledged NAK Zpot CSDUN The Field row provides a higher level decoding of bus transition groupings and identifies e
133. Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 D2 12 151 1 107 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 12 177 1 E 108 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 CHANSEL 12 230 1 109 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 CHANSEL 12 284 1 Scale 20 us div Auto Fit Line 100 LL Interval AtoB 69 042us DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 1 0 1 170 2 Figure 53 Monitor Window Timing Display Measuring the Time Between Cursors A amp B 54 Getting Started Step 6 Find Operations Push the Go to Start tool bar button as shown in Figure 54 to bring the trace list view to the first entries in the trace listing This will also cause the first line in the trace list to be highlighted The Find function will now search for entries starting with the first entry all the way to the end of the trace buffer contents 01101 Diet Aalt Figure 54 Go to Start Tool Bar Button Getting Started 55 Click on the Find tool bar button as shown in Figure 55 below It will bring up the Find dialog shown in Trace Tools Window Help see bio SS GM xX vk 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Figure 55 Find Tool Bar Button Figure 56 oug Mul Monitor 56 Transfer Type aw gt addrType any 7 RAW Data Byte IS m e M Byte Position any 7 wdi aiina Load From Selected Monitor Trace Line Figure 56 Fi
134. The Trigger line can be seen on line 45 in the trace list which is identified by a red background and it is also indicated at the top of the timing display by a red flag with the symbol T Ke bus transaction characteristics that constitute a Trigger are configured by the user prior to starting data collection The CAS 1000 I2C searches for the user specified set of conditions while collecting trace data in order to mark the Trigger line and place it in a specific position in the buffer 43 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Lol zl lim File Trace Tools Window Help all oi bh ll SS AA xE SS or oa EECH a SL EE Shortcuts line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RAW NAK Error Eal Sp VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us CR S 46 Address Target 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 4 694 lll 47 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 4 3D 4 735 Monitor 48 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 401 1 1 63 4 761 a 49 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 1 1 52 4 786 ree 50 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 1 16 4311 51 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 4 995 Debugger 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 14 1 1F 5 151 53 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 BUSY 5 249 KR 54 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 5 960 Rz 55 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 5A 5 988 Programmer 56 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 4 1 6 171 E 57 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 33 6 199 F 58 Data Target ADC 7 B
135. Time TimingSkewHoldTime SMBusTimeout Is8BitAddrFormat Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_LoadSetup char szFilename ji Return Value NULL if the loading the parameters was successful otherwise a pointer to a string containing an error message Parameters szFilename The string holding the full path including the filename of the project file containing the instrument settings 206 Third Party Application Interface 2C_MeasureBus Performs a specified measurement on the TC bus The measured value is stored in the integer variable referenced by the pnData pointer You can also use the I2C_GetLastStatus function following this call to get a string formatted measurement value including the units and any error messages Prototype extern C declspec dllexport char szBusParameter int pnData unsigned long lParam I2C_MeasureBus Return Value 1 if successful 0 if error occurred char _cdecl Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the last successful measurement value as a formatted text string including units or an error message Parameters szBusParameter String indicating the specific measurement to perform The table below shows the list of parameters Parameter Description Unit Measurement Type SDA Current SDA Logical Level SIGNAL_LEVEL SCL Curren
136. Trace Run Stop submenu shown in Figure 122 provides run control of the Monitor window trace buffer P Run Single F11 br Run Repetitive CHE I Pause Shift F11 Stop F12 Figure 122 Trace Execute Submenu Run Single Begins bus traffic acquisition until the number of acquired transactions equals the configured trace buffer depth The Run Status dialog shown in Figure 123 will be displayed showing the progression of this activity until it completes either by the trace buffer becoming full or by the user manually stopping acquisition The trace listing will scroll and update as new traffic is detected on the 12C test bus If a Trigger is enabled the Monitor will keep acquiring transactions even if the buffer becomes full until it detects the triggering event When the event is detected additional transactions will be acquired until either the specified trigger position early middle or late is reached or the user stops it manually Some Monitor window commands are disabled while bus traffic is being accumulated Run Repetitive Begins bus traffic acquisition which will continue forever until the user stops the process A Run Repetitive Status dialog similar to the Run Status Dialog in Figure 123 with identical functionality as noted above for Run Single will appear to show progress If the buffer becomes full the buffer will wrap and new entries will overwrite the oldest entries When collecting transactions in this mod
137. UE or 0 FALSE indicating whether to arm the glitch trigger immediately The trigger can be armed during the I2C_SendData function call if this parameter is set to FALSE This provides a flexibility of arming the glitch trigger right before the n byte of the data being sent Third Party Application Interface 211 2C_Send_Data Sends a message ie performs a write operation to the specified target slave address This function may not return quickly up to the timeout interval depending on the time it takes to send and confirm completion Use the I2C_GetLastTransferStatus function following this call to determine if the address cycle got NAK ed NOTE This function is available for backward compatibility only Use the new I2C_SendData function instead if possible Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_Send_Data int nAddress int blOBitAddress unsigned char pSendData unsigned char pReceiveData int nDataCount int bUseStopBits Return Value 1 if I2C_InitHardware was never called 2 if a timeout occurred otherwise the number of bytes sent may be 0 if transfer was aborted due to address NAK Parameters nAdadress This is the 7 bit or 10 bit address of the destination slave depending on following parameter b10BitAddress If one the above address is a 10 bit value If zero it is a 7 bit address pSenaData A pointer to a block of memory where the send data bytes are provided pReceiveD
138. Write NAK 100 0 1 2B 102 054 17 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 1 0 102 057 18 Data Target 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 1 0 9F 102 057 19 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 102 062 20 Data Target 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 E8 102 062 a 21 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 0 0 102 066 i 22 Data Target 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 0 0 A1 102 067 23 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 0 1 102 074 24 Data Target 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 0 1 2B 102 074 25 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 1 0 102 079 26 Data Target 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 1 0 OF 102 079 27 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 102 083 2e ata Taroet Tag TU e write Nak io 1 es 02084 D m Scale 50 us div AutoFit Line 28 gt Interval A to B Ons G ort ee Too E ET REI HEED HESE Figure 88 Monitor Debugger Discrete UO Manipulation 84 Getting Started Step 5 Close the Debugger Click on the Stop button in the 12C Exerciser tool bar indicated by the collecting data icon to stop the Monitor from Return to the Run Status window that was opened when data capturing started you may have to restore it from minimized state if you had minimized it earlier Since you are done capturing data click on the Close button at the bottom of the window Click on the Debugger entry in the Shortcut Bar to return to the Debugger window and close the debugger session by
139. a Target 7 Bit Read EE a e Address Target 7 Bit Read 4694 1 Interval A to B 69 042 us Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 1 0 E 10 2 A Figure 62 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Find 72 Data Result Getting Started 61 You can click on the Go to Tagged Row tool bar button shown in Figure 63 to move to the second search result as shown in Figure 64 Repeatedly clicking on the Go to Tagged Row tool bar button will cause the trace list to alternate between the two tagged lines 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled anh File Trace Tools Window Help Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Figure 63 Go to Tagged Row Tool Bar Button DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled oleo AN Eile Irace Tools Window Help amp x sh klo BEA BE xe e ri JB Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us O 1 Tagged Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 72 gasel 4 01101 81 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 EE Find Sl bal oe 82 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 21 Monitor 83 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 m i 84 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 21 es ag Jee 1 cose 85 Data Eror 86 Address Target 54 7 Bit Writ
140. a name like PLL instead of a numeric bus address like 1E 116 Bus Traffic Monitor SMBus This dialog shown in Figure 114 shows a list of associations between bus addresses and SMBus devices Device entries shaded gray are reserved by the SMBus Specification v 2 0 Those devices cannot be removed but their associated addresses can be re associated with a different device if necessary For other entries each address may only be associated with one device Device Name Addr File SMBus Host 10 SMBus Alert Response 12 Default SMBus Device Addr CH Smar Battery 16 C Program Files i2C Exerciser Dec Smart Battery Charger 12 C Program Files l2C Exerciser Dec Smart Battery System Manager 14 C Program Files l2C Exerciser Dec Figure 114 SMBus Pane Bus Traffic Monitor 117 Each entry in the device list box contains the device name bus address value and the decoding file The device name is the name of the SMBus device that is associated with the address value and will be displayed in the Address column of the trace listing The bus address value specifies the slave address that is being associated This 7 bit address is displayed in hex according to the current FE or EF display mode The last piece of information is the path to the file containing the protocol decoding information for the device Decoding files for devices that are not built in are provided in the Decoder subfold
141. access to the online help topics Table 20 Emulated Slave Tool Bar Functions UC Device Emulator 257 Emulated Slave Clock Stretching 12C bus protocol allows an addressed slave to delay its response to a bus master message by stretching the SCL clock signal just before the acknowledgement bit This feature is supported by the CAS 1000 to enable users to test how well their master device works when the clock is stretched When CAS 1000 is emulating a slave device the clock period for the acknowledgement bit can be stretched up to 5 2 ms The stretch time and the particular message byte number is user programmable Clock Stretching is done by using a special enable_clock_stretching macro in the slave data file sdf which specifies at which byte during a write message the stretching should occur and how long it should be An example of using the macro is shown below In this case the SCL clock signal low 0 period prior to the third data byte acknowledgement bit is stretched for 20 us enable_clock_stretching 3 20000 clock stretched on third byte for 20 us When using the clock stretching this macro should be the only item in the slave data file since the write transaction does not require any data to be returned by the slave Only one slave can be active when using this feature and the emulated slave continues to be active until the user aborts the slave emulation session That is in the above case each third b
142. aces a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Ke Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard A Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at a line or removes a bookmark if one is already set A Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script A Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script Aa Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current script is searched for the specified text and if found that text is brought into view and highlighted Ar Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of interest is entered along with the replacement text The current script is searched and any occurrences of the search text are substituted with the replacement text Syntax Check Checks the syntax of the current script without executing it The result of the syntax check is displayed in a popup message box If a syntax error is found any line associated with the error will also be marked in the left hand gutter Note that some errors c
143. address bits left justified in byte A6 A0 0 default 7F mode 7 address bits right justified in byte 0 A6 A0 Figure 118 Formats Pane 122 Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor Window Reference The Monitor window shown in Figure 119 can be opened using the either the Monitor entry in the Shortcut Bar or in the Tools menu By default the Monitor window is opened when the I2C Exerciser starts Table 4 describes the numbered areas of the 12C Exerciser Monitor window 4 DC Exerciser Untitled GJ obe File Trace Tools Window Help SN Elo SS S BE xX YR ar Ro Gr E itled ES us Shortcuts Au Monitor Untitled a T Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RW NAK Error KHz VO 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us D 01101 K 34 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 1 12 2 293 TEES E Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read wea a 2 476 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 14 1 1c 2 632 an 37 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 14 1 DONE 2 730 E 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 4 4 3 441 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 41 1 17 3 469 d Debugger 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 5D 3 494 mor 41 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 35 3 520 es 42 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 OF 3 545 ke 43 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 3 729 na Data Target Read 3 884 CE E ZN E E E Address Target 7 Bit Read 4 694 47 Data
144. ady LIVE AddFomat FE Trace Off Bus Ide SCL High SD Hoh 01 Higa W02High Figure 191 Test Window Component Description 1 Menu Bar Contains the menu bar for the active Test window 2 Tool Bar Provides quick single click access to commonly used commands for the active Test window 3 Test Displays the script source and test results Window Table 21 Test Window Areas 262 Script Driven Bus Tester Test Window Operations The Test window shown in Figure 192 lists the script text file containing the scrollable Test program instructions which get executed to validate a target TC bus This is similar to a master emulation file but is focused on making a go no go decision about the target bus Besides interacting with the target it typically includes measurements and observes target behavior to assess its condition It can loop a given number of times and be setup to stop if an error is indicated A Passed Failed indication is under the control of the script program Tests can be run paused or stopped using the respective toolbar buttons Breakpoints are specific lines in the source code that the user specifies prior to executing the script A breakpoint can be enabled or disabled When the script execution reaches an enabled breakpoint it will stop execution prior to executing that line Depending on what the user chooses the execution can continue onto the next enabled breakpoint or stop ent
145. al Mode Getting Started 41 45 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Lo IST fae AN File Trace Tools Window Help ellx ae gt hil amp xa yE o Ro Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hew AddrType RW NAK Error ll 01 V02 Data Byte Hex Time us z 41 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 4 1 D E 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 E 28 alu 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 BC 53 a Monitor 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 34 78 sal 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 0A 104 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 287 T Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 51 443 Debugger 8 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 1C 541 e 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1 252 E 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3E 1 280 H 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 1 4 1 464 Programmer 12 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 1 522 13 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 2E 1 550 14 Data Target ae 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 1 575 15 Tagged Data Target 7 Bit Write EEN 1 1 601 E es Ee E 7 Address Target 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 843 18 Data Analyzer ste 7 Bit Read 402 S 1 1A 1 884 19 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 1 1 70 1 909 20 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 1 1 4F 1 935 21 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 45 1 960 22 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 72 1 986 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 4 49 2
146. al contains easy to navigate tutorials and reference information that are presented in a logical progression The following briefly summarizes each chapter Chapter 1 Product Overview This chapter provides you with an introduction to the CC bus and SMBus as well as a description of the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer and software application features Chapter 2 Installation In this chapter you will learn how to install the 12C Exerciser software and the CAS 1000 I2C hardware Chapter 3 Getting Started This chapter introduces you to the basic usage of the CAS 1000 I2C for monitoring and generating bus traffic writing debug scripts and working with EEPROM devices Although it is possible to explore the capabilities of the CAS 1000 I2C on your own working through this chapter will provide you with an immediate feel for its ease of use and core functionality Chapter 4 Connecting to a Target This chapter provides you with instructions on how to hook up the CAS 1000 I2C to a target board and describes the initial software settings that you should be aware of to have the CAS 1000 I2C working properly Chapter 5 Bus Traffic Monitor This chapter describes the features of the Monitor window which is used to collect and analyze traffic from the target TC bus Chapter 6 Interactive Debugger This chapter describes the features of the Debugger which is used to manually generate traffic and interact with the target C bus Chapter 7 Seria
147. ally the hardware This will not require a live target or even an attached CAS 1000 I2C controller The demo mode feature of DC Exerciser allows the user to quickly observe and become familiar with the basic bus tracing features This mode creates simulated traffic for display in the Monitor window imitating a connection to virtual targets on an I C bus The steps outlined in the demo tutorial focus mainly on understanding the information provided in the Monitor window including both the trace list and timing display You will learn how to collect C bus traffic view it in the trace list and timing display navigate through the data and utilize various options and features 24 Getting Started Step 1 Start 12C Exerciser Start the DC Exerciser application by opening the Windows Start menu clicking on Programs or All Programs then clicking on the DC Exerciser program group and finally clicking on the 12C Exerciser entry A splash screen will be displayed for a few seconds and then the main I2C Exerciser window will appear with the Monitor window active By default the program will try to detect if the CAS 1000 I2C is connected and will enter Live Data mode if the controller is found If the CAS 1000 I2C is not attached to the host PC you will get the warning message shown in Figure 19 indicating that the controller was not detected and the program will automatically start in Demo Mode If the warning appears click on the OK button to cl
148. ameter Specification File Example 280 Parameters Scope Waveform Display The left side of the Parameters Scope window contains a waveform graph that enables various signal edge transitions to be viewed after measurements have been performed Beneath the graph are controls allowing particular edge transitions to be captured and displayed without running the measurement operation The graph and controls are shown in Figure 202 Waveform User Triggered D Waveform Trigger Setup Signal Edge Direction Buffer Position SDA sing Falling Early Late Cyde Address Data OFF RE START Sr START S STOP P Figure 202 Parameters Scope Waveform Controls Waveform dropdown This dropdown box allows selection of the edge transition data for display in the graph The entries in the dropdown correspond to the various target master and target slave measurements A special entry labeled User Triggered selects the data that is captured using the Waveform Trigger Setup controls beneath the graph described later The dropdown list includes the following entries e User Triggered Master SCL Rise Time TrCL Master SCL Fall Time TfCL Master SDA Rise Time TrDA Master SDA Fall Time TfDA Slave SDA Rise Time TrDA Slave SDA Fall Time TfDA Parameters Scope 281 Graph The graph displays the analog SDA and SCL signal data at a selected signal edge transition Signals are drawn in the graph in the same color as in th
149. amp Display a Absolute C Relative to last Other Options V Prompt for saving trace data prior to CLEAR or RUN V Lock Timing with Trace Lock to Top Listing Line Lock to Selected Listing Line START Hold Time Checking Minimum Hold Time 0 16 us M Use Defaults Figure 162 Monitor Options Pane Line Column sets the numbering of entries in the trace list to start from one at the first entry default or start from zero at the trigger with earlier transactions being negative Timestamp Start sets whether time zero starts at the first entry default or at the trigger with earlier transactions being negative Timestamp Display controls how timestamps are determined for trace list entries When set to Absolute the first trace list entry is set to time zero and each entry s timestamp represents the length of time since the first entry When set to Relative to last each trace list entry s timestamp represents the length of time since the previous entry Configuration and Preferences 185 Other Options The first preference sets whether or not a prompt to save data pops up whenever the trace list will be cleared The second preference allows the Timing display to be locked to the trace screen on the first line rather than aligning with the selected line START Hold Time Checking sets the minimum START hold time value which will be checked against every transaction Errors will be f
150. and SMBus are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Other products and services named in this book are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies All trademarks and registered trademarks in this book are the property of their respective holders Preface PRODUCT WARRANTY AND SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE For product warranty and software maintenance information see the PRODUCT WARRANTY AND SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE POLICY statement included with your product shipment EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE CUSTOMER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES CORELIS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Corelis products For assistance contact your nearest Corelis Sales and Service Office RETURN POLICY No items returned to CORELIS for warranty service or any other reason shall be accepted unless first authorized by CORELIS either direct or through its authorized sales representatives All returned items must be shipped pre paid and clearly display a Return Merchandise Authorization RMA number on the shipping carton Freight collect items will NOT be accepted Customers or authorized sales representatives must first contact CORELIS with notice of requ
151. and test the injection on the spot When you are finished with designing the glitch pattern you can save the information to a Glitch Pattern File gpf for a later use In addition you can view the waveform of actual glitches being injected to the target bus if they fall within the 9 us sample buffer window Figure 209 shows the Glitch Pattern Editor window which can be opened by selecting the Glitch Pattern Editor menu item from the Tools menu The alternating background colors of light and dark gray represent the clock cycles one clock per color stripe The time indicators shown at the top are relative to the start of a glitch pattern beginning a short delay after the trigger event The configurable clock frequency is shown at the bottom left corner of the window 4 For each clock cycle you can select high low or floating levels for the SDA and SCL signals The high level is shown as green or yellow lines at the upper part of each signal row 2 The low level is shown as green or yellow lines at the lower part 3 The floating level is indicated with white lines in the middle of the signal rows 1 To change these levels for each clock cycle click on the desired location on the graph using your mouse pointer You may also drag the mouse while holding down the left mouse button to set levels for multiple clocks PS BE Glitch Pattern Editor Untitled 320 0 640 0 960 0 ns ns S Zoom Glitch Injection Trigger Setup
152. annot be detected before execution such as function calls with an invalid number of arguments or unexpected argument types Print Prints the current script file Qa Help Provides quick access to the online help topics Table 19 Emulated Master Tool Bar Functions 252 UC Device Emulator Emulated Slave Window The Emulated Slave window shown in Figure 185 is displayed when the user clicks on the View button from the Emulation Manager window while a slave device is selected or double clicks the Emulation Manager s File column entry for a slave device A slave script simply contains a list of bytes to send in sequential order When a master device performs a slave read write the emulated slave returns the next byte in its send buffer The loop cycle count determines the number of times to refill the buffer once the buffer is empty Because the slave device does not know when a master read write access occurs ahead of time the user can not pause an executing slave device Moreover each slave device has a name and an associated address thus the dialog displays both of those at the top of the window in the Slave Information section The progress bar displays the percentage of the buffer that has been sent s Sample Slave Data File Ue Fare 05 EREEREER EEEL REELE ERELL EE EE ELEELE E REELE LERLE REELE ER REEERE 06 Data file for emulating 1st half of ATMEL AT24C04 EEPROM 32 pages
153. are described below TH New Project gt Open Project H Save Project Save Project As Open Trace Data Ctrl O RH Save Trace Data Ctrl S Export Trace Data Export Timing Data Figure 120 Monitor File Menu New Project Creates a new empty project and initializes all settings to their defaults If an existing unsaved project is active you will be prompted to save it Open Project Opens a previously saved project restoring all settings window positions and data to their saved values If an existing unsaved project is active you will be prompted to save it Save Project Saves all settings data and window positions to the current project If the project has not been given a name you will be prompted for a filename Save Project As This item performs the same function as the Save Project command except that it always prompts you for a new filename before saving Open Trace Data Opens and loads a previously saved trace buffer in the Monitor Trace listing and Timing field Save Trace Data Saves the current trace buffer data of the Monitor listing into a binary TDF file Export Trace Data Allows saving of the current trace buffer data of the Monitor listing as an ASCII CSV comma separated value text file Export Timing Data Allows saving of the current trace buffer data of the Monitor timing information as an ASCII CSV comma separated value text file
154. ared If the current script has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it os Open File Loads a script file into the Editor All bookmarks are cleared If the current script has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it H Save File Saves the currently open script to a SCR text file Note that this does not save any set bookmarks K Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation Ca Redo Restores a previously undone editing operation y Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Kal Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard A Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at a line or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the i current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script A8 Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current script is searched for the specified text and
155. as a string the analyzer picks the setting that most closely matches the specified value If unsuccessful or not in analyzer supplied mode an empty string is returned 324 Scripting Language set high voltage thresold Description Overwrites a new hardware setup value for the high threshold voltage of the analyzer for detecting signal levels Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set_high_voltage_threshold strVolts Example Call set_high_voltage_threshold 1 85 set the high threshold to 1 85 Volts Input Parameters strVolts String containing the high level threshold in volts The string is presumed to represent a floating point numerical value Return Value The actual high threshold voltage that is set is returned as a string If unsuccessful an empty string is returned The actual value will be rounded to 0 05 Volt increments ranging from 0 00 to 5 00 Volts Scripting Language 325 set Low voltage thresold Description Overwrites a new hardware setup value for the low threshold voltage of the analyzer for detecting signal levels Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set_low_voltage_threshold strVolts Example Call set_low_voltage_threshold 0 85 set the high threshold to 0 85 Volts Input Parameters strVolts String containing the low level threshold in volts The string is presumed to represent a floating point numerical value Return Value The actual low threshold
156. as shown in Figure 36 Click on the Close button to close the Configuration Manager Symbols screen Triggers Fiters Symbols ae settings Fies Symbol Type Addr AddrType BIN Data Byte Width PLL Address 1E 7 Bit Any FAULT Data 7 Bit Any OA 4 1 Byte ADC Address 7 Bit Any WARNING Data 7 Bit Any 1C 1 Byte CHANSEL Data 7 Bit Any 0B 1 Byte DONE Data 7 Bit Any 0C 1 Byte OK Data 10 Bit Any 9A 1 Byte Data 7 Bit Any 0D 1 Byte Data 7 Bit Any OE 1 Byte Data 7 Bit Any 1A 1 Byte Data 7 Bit Any 1B 1 Byte Address 7 Bit Any Figure 36 Configuration Manager Symbols Definition Screen with DAC Symbol Getting Started 39 With the trace list still showing the beginning of the Demo data you will now see that lines 17 through 34 are now all displaying the symbol DAC in the address column instead of the raw address value of 18 Lines 46 through 50 lines 78 through 82 and lines 94 through 98 are similarly affected The trace list display with the new symbol entry is shown in Figure 37 4 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Co e E AN File Trace Tools Window Help x ei poi S SS A xa YER o Ro he Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz VO 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us a 1 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 0 01101 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1E 28 a 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Wr
157. as shown in Figure 98 The Configuration Manager can be opened from the 12C Exerciser s menu bar by selecting Tools Configuration Manager or by pressing the lt F8 gt key For detailed descriptions of each setting see the Settings Reference section later in this chapter Configuration Manager Triggers Filters Symbols smBus H Bus Electrical Features Voltage Source Bus Signal Thresholds Target Supplied Analyzer Supplied High Level Volts Intended Pull up P Ett Low Level 0 90 Volts Voltage Volts Auto Detect Drive Clock Rate Disable Collision Detection Accelerated Rising Edge Drive Hi Speed Mode Auto On OOff Auto On Off Input Output Signals High Level Function I vi A ol E lee en Monitor Buffer Options Depth Transactions Figure 98 Configuration Manager Connecting to a Target 95 Scenario 1 New Changed Target A scenario such as this occurs when the DC Exerciser is launched without a previously saved project file or if File New Project is selected from the menu bar Case 1 The target supplies its own pull up voltage This is the most common case and you usually need only verify that the intended pull up voltage setting is correct so that appropriate bus signal thresholds are used When the target supplies its own pull up and can respond to 100 KHz access nominal rise times should enable the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer to monitor and drive
158. ata A pointer to a block of memory where the successfully sent data bytes are returned This is an optional parameter which can be NULL nDataCount The number of bytes contained in the above block of memory bUseStopBits If one a stop cycle terminates the message after the last data byte sent otherwise no stop cycle is issued the analyzer continues to control the bus with SCL low ready to perform a coming Repeat Start on the next access 212 Third Party Application Interface 2C_SendData Sends a message ie performs a write operation to the specified target slave address This function may not return quickly up to the timeout interval depending on the time it takes to send and confirm completion Use the I2C_GetLastStatus function following this call to determine if the address cycle got NAK ed The optional u Param parameter can be used to set the location of the glitch trigger arming within the data bytes being sent Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SendData int nAddress int blOBitAddress unsigned char pSendData unsigned char pReceiveData int nDataCount int bUseStopBit unsigned long ulParam Return Value Number of bytes successfully sent UH error occurred 1 if address was NAK d 2 if a timeout occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters nAdadress This is the 7 bit
159. ation is not currently supported by the CAS 1000 I2C and so these selections are disabled 102 Connecting to a Target Input Output Signals The discrete Input Output signals I O 1 and I O 2 augment the normal CC bus signals SDA and SCL to support sensing or stimulation of a connected target or to support synchronization with external instruments They can be individually steered as outward or inward signals and mapped to the SMB connectors AT1 and AT2 on the CAS 1000 I2C The Input Output Signals group of settings shown in Figure 104 allow configuration of these discrete I O lines Input Output Signals High Level Function I O 1 In X Drive SMB AT1 3 30 e Volts meamea W s I O 2 In v Source Target v Figure 104 Input Output Signals High Level Specifies the TTL high voltage level of the I O signals When sensing inputs the CAS 1000 I2C will also use this setting to automatically determine commensurate signal threshold values Function These settings control the inward outward direction of the discrete I O signals O 1 Specifies the discrete signal I O 1 to be an input an output TTL driver or an output open drain driver Drive SMB ATI If I O 1 discrete signal is set as an output selecting this option will map the state of the I O 1 line to the AT1 SMB connector on the CAS 1000 I2C for signaling external instruments Not applicable when UO 1 is an input UO 2 Specifies the disc
160. ator Window Menu The Window menu manages the various windows of DC Exerciser and is identical to the Monitor Window Menu described in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulator Help Menu The Help menu accesses the on line help features and is identical to the Monitor Help Menu described in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulator Tool Bar The Emulator Tool Bar shown in Figure 177 provides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Emulator window Simply click the tool bar button to perform the desired command Table 18 describes the tool bar functions Positioning the mouse cursor over each tool bar button will also display a pop up tooltip providing a short description of the command UC Device Emulator 241 Figure 177 Emulator Tool Bar Icon Name Function Description gt Run Executes all active devices g Stop Aborts execution of all active devices Help Provides quick access to the online help topics 242 Table 18 Emulator Tool Bar Functions I C Device Emulator Emulated Master Window The Emulated Master window shown in Figure 178 is displayed when the user clicks on the View button from the Emulation Manager window while a master device is selected or double clicks the File column entry for a master device The Emulated Master dialog displays the status of the selected script The user can create breakpoints and edit the source code as well as start and stop the e
161. be selected by the user for editing or removal Using the Add button beneath the list box a new filter can be defined and appended to the list The Edit button enables alteration of an existing selected filter The Remove and Remove All buttons enable the deletion of a selected filter or the entire set of filters The Filter Definition dialog for setting the transaction criteria for each filter is similar to those for the Find and Trigger dialogs This dialog shown in Figure 111 is displayed when using the Add or Edit buttons Filter Definition as Filter Transfer Type Address v NAK Any Addr Any z Error Any v AddrType Any S 1 0 1 Any RW Any z 1 02 Am Z Data Byte me SCH ene e E Position as ee Figure 111 Filter Definition Dialog similar to Edit 114 Bus Traffic Monitor Symbols This dialog shown in Figure 112 displays a list that can contain symbolic text strings along with associated parameters that specify the criteria which determine where the symbolic text will replace a numeric value in the trace listing and other related dialogs This can be used to enhance the user readability of transactions Symbol Type Addr AddrType R W Data Byte Width PLL Address 7 Bit Any FAULT Data 7 Bit Any OA A 1Byte ADC Address 7 Bit Any WARNING Data 7 Bit Any 1C 1 Byte CHANSEL Data 7 Bit Any 0B 1 Byte DONE Data 7 Bit Any 0C 1 Byte OK Data 10 B
162. being negative Timestamp Start Sets whether time zero starts at the first entry default or at the trigger with earlier transactions being negative Timestamp Display Controls how timestamps are determined for trace list entries When set to Absolute the first trace list entry is set to time zero and each entry s timestamp represents the length of time since the first entry When set to Relative to last each trace list entry s timestamp represents the length of time since the previous entry Bus Traffic Monitor 121 Other Options The first preference sets whether or not a prompt to save data pops up whenever the trace list will be cleared The second preference allows the Timing display to be locked to the trace screen on the first line rather than aligning with the selected line START Hold Time Checking sets the minimum START hold time value which will be checked against every transaction Errors will be flagged for the messages not meeting the specified minimum value Formats This pane enables selection of how a 7 binary bit address representation is formatted for hexadecimal display does not apply to 10 bit addresses or to non hex representations such as symbolic The FE format default shows the hexadecimal byte value with the 7 address bits left justified in the byte The 7F format shows the 7 address bits right justified in the byte Preferences 7 bit Hex Address Format FE mode 7
163. between the falling edge of SCL and the SDA signal edge The selectable ranges of the setup and hold times vary depending on the current SCL rate They are roughly one eighth of a clock period on either negative or positive side in 20 ns steps For example for a 100 KHz SCL rate the selectable range is from 1160 ns to 1240 ns Users may select the values using the up down arrows or type them in directly The typed in values will be rounded to the nearest 20 ns steps automatically The user should keep in mind that at certain points in the signal stream the protocol changes the driver of the signal such as during address ACK NAK when the master the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer in this case relinquishes SDA control to the slave In the shifted case this releasing of the bus is also delayed as is the re establishment of driving control in the following bit The resulting waveform will then be effected by the behavior of the interaction between these time shifted data bits and the slave 182 Configuration and Preferences Configuration Manager ese Triggers Filters Symbols SMBus Target Slaves Settings Files Close Figure 160 Timing Skew Pane Configuration and Preferences 183 Preferences Dialog The Preferences Dialog allows the user to change the preferences for the various tools provided by the DC Exerciser in one easily accessible location The user can access the last used Preferences tab by using the Tools
164. bility Product Overview 5 Programmable Clock Rate The CAS 1000 I2C clock rate is software programmable when it drives the bus It supports Standard mode Fast mode and Fast mode Plus transfers up to 5 Mbits sec and many intermediate rates The target bus conditions especially pull up values and parasitic capacitance can limit the upper rate of operation The ability of the analyzer to track the signals is also affected by receive threshold voltage settings The user should be aware of the analog behavior of the bus signals especially slow rise times and their relationship to transitions at higher clock rates This clock rate setting does not apply to target master clocks which are not driven but are only monitored by the CAS 1000 I2C In such cases the rate is automatically tracked up to 5 MHz When the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus it also automatically synchronizes the clock signal in compliance with the UC specification s multi master requirements Discrete I O Signals Two programmable general purpose lines can be operated under PC host software control and are available to stimulate the target system or sense target conditions in coordination with its testing Each line is programmable as an input a TTL output or an open drain output The voltage level of these signals is programmable independent of IC bus levels The state of these signals is monitored and displayed in the trace listing while collecting bus traffic and they can
165. bration will proceed through four steps analyzer supplied bus voltages discrete UO line output voltages SCL pull up resistors and SDA pull up resistors The progress of each step is reported in the Calibration Status window as shown in Figure 171 When all steps have completed successfully the status window may be closed by clicking on the Done button as shown in Figure 172 and the calibrated CAS 1000 I2C is ready for use Calibration Status Part 2 of 7 Calibrating analyzer supplied bus voltages Figure 171 Calibration Status Calibration Status Calibration Complete Figure 172 Calibration Complete Configuration and Preferences 192 Configuration and Preferences 193 Chapter 9 Third Party Application Interface Description of using the CAS 1000 12C with third party software Overview The CAS 1000 I2C provides the ability to operate some of its features by using function calls from third party software In this manner such applications can access the connected CC bus of the target including observing its traffic interacting with it and performing bus measurements This effectively provides such software with a portal to the connected CC bus One set of common third party applications includes the National Instruments LabWindows CVI and LabView software These are capable of accessing external routines by using DLL function calls Therefore the DLL library described in this chapter can be used b
166. bus traffic acquisition until the number of acquired transactions equals the configured trace buffer depth See the Trace Execute submenu Run Single entry described earlier EI Run Repetitive Begins bus traffic acquisition which will continue forever until the user stops the process See the Trace Execute submenu Run Repetitive entry described earlier il Pause Pauses bus traffic acquisition and enables all Monitor window commands amp Stop Immediately stops bus traffic acquisition and enables all Monitor window commands f Go to Trigger Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the Trigger into view at the top of the screen Ji Goto Tagged Row Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the next tagged line into view at the top of the screen K Go to Start Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the first trace buffer line into view at the top of the screen c Go to End Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the last trace buffer line into view at the bottom of the screen Ee line into view at the top of the screen e Go to Cursor B Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the Cursor B line into view at the top of the screen 136 Bus Traffic Monitor Icon Name Function Description Clear Trace Data Deletes all of the trace buffer contents and clears the trace list and timing display If the c
167. by the program pnLoops Pointer to a buffer to hold the number of loops for the slave device 230 Third Party Application Interface 2C_SlaveStart Starts a slave emulation with specified parameters This function takes a pointer to a data buffer in the memory and feeds the data to the slave device You may not specify duplicate ID or address with any slaves currently running Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SlaveStart int nID int nAddr int nLoops int nByteCount unsigned char pucData Return Value 1 if successful 0 if error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters nID ID number of the slave to activate Valid numbers are from 1 to 10 Error will occur if a slave with an identical ID number is already running nAdadr Address of the slave device to be emulated Only 7 bit address is valid and the default format is in FE mode You may use I2C_SetFEAddrFormat function to change the format Error will occur if a slave with an identical address is already running nLoops Number of times to loop through the specified data set You may set it to 1 to specify infinite number of loops nDataCount Number of data bytes in the data set pucData Pointer to a block of memory where the data bytes are provided Third Party Application Interface 231 I2C_SlaveStartS DF Starts a slave emulation with
168. can record and store endless hours of CC bus traffic limited only by the available disk space When this option is selected the captured Monitor trace data is saved to files as described below The trace data is stored in files with the extension tdf each of which holds up to 1M of consecutive Se bus transactions The trace data path and base filename are user specified and then a numerical index is appended to each filename _nnnn to indicate the chronological order in which the data was captured and saved Note that each 1M transaction trace data file uses about 260MB of disk space as it contains all captured I C bus transaction data including signal waveforms timing and time stamp information Use the Monitor Window s Run Repetitive button to continuously capture the traffic Data will be captured into a tdf file and once the file exceeds 1M transactions another file will be opened to continue storing transactions and so forth Note that when the Run or the Run Repetitive button is clicked and trace data files with the same base filename already exist in the specified location the user will be prompted to overwrite them While running the Monitor Window displays the most recent 1M transactions of data and the Run Status dialog box lists the name of the trace data file currently being logged to After finishing capturing you may double click on the listed filenames to load the trace data to the Monitor Window 104 Connecting
169. ce 74 N A 400 pF Passed Waveform Trigger Setup Signal Edge Direction Buffer Position System Master Slave S Falling Early Late Slave Information en L o 9 hdd SE oF EE RE START Sr START 5 STOP P Arm Figure 199 Parameters Scope Window Parameters Scope 275 Parameter Measurements The right side of the Parameters Scope window contains the listing of measurable parameters and the controls for taking measurements This is shown in Figure 200 Standard Mode Fast Mode Fast Mode Plus Parameter Actual Min Max Units Result Reference Voltage 3 26 NA N A Volts Passed SDA Pull up Resistance 1 05 N A N A Kohms Passed SCL Pull up Resistance 108 NIA N A Kohms Passed SDA High Voltage 3 27 NIA N A Volts Passed SCL High Voltage 3 27 NWA N A Volts Passed SDA Capacitance 57 N A 400 pF Passed SCL Capacitance 74 N A 400 pF Passed System Master Slave Slave Information Name v Address v 7 Bit Measure Custom x3 o H it Lo i Figure 200 Parameters Scope Measurement Controls Parameter column This column identifies the electrical or timing characteristic that is measured The following can be measured System Parameters Reference Voltage SDA SCL Pull up Resistances Master Parameters SDA SCL Low Voltages Start Hold Time typ sta SDA SCL High Voltages SDA SCL Capacitances Start Set up Time tsu sta Stop Set up Time tsu sto Data Hold Time typ pat
170. cenario occurs when no target is attached to the bus Because a nonexistent target means that there will be a lack of pull up voltage the software will behave as in Case 2 of Scenario 1 above Depending on whether the program is already set up you will either perform the necessary setup or do nothing at all Case 1 Program not set up When you first try to interact with the bus a reference voltage will not be detected and you will be prompted to change to Analyzer Supplied Select Yes and follow the steps in Case 2 of Scenario 1 described above With no target attached the CAS 1000 I2C will effectively talk to itself Case 2 Program already set up If the program is already set up such as from a loaded project or from prior usage you should not need to do anything Connecting to a Target 99 Setting Details All of the CAS 1000 I2C settings that are of principal concern when connecting to a target can be found in the Settings pane of the Configuration Manager shown in Figure 101 This can be opened by pressing lt F8 gt or selecting Tools Configuration Manager from the menu bar and then selecting the Settings tab Each of the setting groupings is described in the following sections For details on the other panes of the Configuration Manager as well as the Preferences dialog refer to the Configuration and Preferences chapter Configuration Manager Bus Electrical Features Voltage Source C Target Supplied Intended Pull u
171. citance or high pull up capacitance combinations which cause its rise time to be slow a false collision may be repeatedly detected and prevent the CAS 1000 I2C from completing its transactions Enabling this Disable Collision Detection option accommodates such slow busses and allows the CAS 1000 I2C driving to proceed but without the C arbitration mechanism Therefore the user needs to keep any target I C bus master s quiet while the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus when collision detection is disabled Configuration and Preferences 177 Accelerated Rising Edge Drive In general when a driver on the bus makes a positive signal transition the rise time is determined by the RC time constant of the bus The rise time governs the upper limit on effective clock rates When the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus it can apply a strong rising drive during the signal transition to overcome the RC time constant creating a rapid edge This can then allow an increase in the clock rate for a given RC value of the bus If this option is set to AUTO the CAS 1000 I2C E will engage the fast rising edge mechanism automatically whenever it is operating with the Ke high speed mode Hs mode protocol note however that the High Speed Mode emulation is not currently supported by the CAS 1000 I2C and so the AUTO setting will have the same effect as OFF If this option is set to ON the CAS 1000 I2C employs the mechanism at all times Setting this option to OFF fully disab
172. ck_stretching sdf lt Figure 189 Configuring Emulated Slave Device Start the slave emulation by pressing the F5 key Click on the OK button if a warning comes up Start the Debugger tool by clicking on the Tools menu and selecting the Debugger menu item Using the Debugger send 3 bytes e g 12 34 AB to the default slave address 0x18 6 After doing this you will notice in the Monitor s timing window that a SCL low period is stretched for about 20 us at the acknowledgement bit of the third data byte as shown in Figure 8 18 ak Scale 50 us div C Auto Fit Line 68 lt gt Interval A to B 20 371 us P E i 14 1 FIELD fie a Data Y Data BIT eee oT o SDA SCL Figure 190 Clock Stretched on ACK Bit UC Device Emulator 259 Chapter 11 Script Driven Bus Tester Test window overview and component descriptions The Test window provides tools for testing of the target CC bus to make sure that it performs within desired limits It is oriented around comprehensively evaluating the target CC bus and making a go no go decision about its performance characteristics In essence the Test mode is a superset of the bus master Emulator feature of the CAS 1000 I2C with additional capabilities specially designed for Acceptance Test Procedure at engineering or production time Note that while in Test mode one or more emulated slaves may be launched to augment target observations Test Mode Features include e
173. cle is not acknowledged Error Blank for normal bus protocol transactions or will indicate Error if the CAS 1000 I2C detected a protocol violation If an error was detected the user can click on the Error text and a pop up window will appear describing the cause of error Observe line 85 which is an example of such an entry KHz Displays the best estimate of the average clock rate for the transaction in units of Kilohertz UO 1 Displays the current state of discrete I O line 1 regardless of whether the discrete is configured as an input or output I O 2 Displays the current state of discrete I O line 2 regardless of whether the discrete is configured as an input or output Data Byte Displays the byte value conveyed by this transaction to or from a slave device This column can be displayed in hexadecimal decimal or binary format The current display format is shown in parenthesis in the column heading Time Displays the timestamp assigned to the beginning time of each transaction Supported time display units are nanoseconds microseconds milliseconds and seconds The current time unit format is shown in parenthesis in the column heading The Monitor window tool bar shown in Figure 32 provides buttons for quickly repositioning the trace list display to various points of interest You can quickly jump to the trigger to the next tagged row to the beginning or end of the buffer or to Cursor A or Cursor B You ca
174. clicking on the X button in the upper right corner of the window A message box will come up as shown in Figure 89 below giving you a chance to save your debugger script Click on the No button and the Debugger will close g Wa Debugger Untitled Ee Receive DC Exerciser Debugger Ce vi Discrete Addressi0 11 SetDiscrete SetDiscrete Al SetDiscrete 2B SetDiscrete SetDiscrete oF SetDiscrete 2 1 ES A Do you want to save the Debugger Command Data Figure 89 Debugger Close Getting Started 85 Step 6 SMBus Decoding The CAS 1000 I2C software features SMBus decoding for common SMBus devices Ordinarily the raw data of the DC transactions between SMBus devices must be manually decoded into meaningful information With the SMBus decoding feature a specific device address can be associated with a text file containing decoding information which allows the DC Exerciser software to do the interpretation automatically There are three parts to viewing decoded SMBus data These can be done in any order collect the data associate a decoding file with a device address and switch to SMBus Mode Trace data for this step has already been collected and saved in the file tc74 tdf This file is located in the Demo subfolder of the DC Exerciser installation folder For a default installation this would be C Program Files I2C Exerciser Demo From the Monitor win
175. component descriptions The Parameters Scope window provides access to a variety of target CC bus measurements Using this tool electrical characteristics of the bus can be quickly collected along with the timing characteristics of target master or slave devices All of the measured parameters can be compared to minimum and maximum values stored in a specification file resulting in a basic pass or fail indication of whether the bus parameters fall within the specified limits During the measurement process the analog data of certain signal state transitions are collected and made available for review in a graphical waveform display The Parameters Scope main screen is shown in Figure 199 In summary typical applications include e Examining basic target bus electrical and timing parameters e Establishing that various bus characteristics are within specification e Viewing actual signal transition waveforms at select measurement points e Viewing actual signal transition waveforms at user specified protocol points Parameters Scope Less Waveform User Triggered Isi Standard Mode Fast Mode Fast Mode Plus Custom Parameter Actual Min Max Units Result Reference Voltage 3 26 N A N A Volts Passed SDA Pull up Resistance 1 05 N A N A Kohms Passed SCL Pull up Resistance 1 08 N A N A Kohms Passed SDA High Voltage 3 27 NA N A Volts Passed SCL High Voltage 3 27 N A N A Volts Passed SDA Capacitance 57 N A 400 pF Passed SCL Capacitan
176. contribute to trigger conditions Each one of the two discrete lines can source 12 mA and can be used as a limited programmable power source to a target when configured as a TTL output Power Requirements The CAS 1000 I2C receives the standard power available from the host USB port Built in Self Test The CAS 1000 I2C has a built in self test capability Logic is provided to loop back bus signals from the target connector This enables a basic go no go confidence testing of its operation It is launched from the Tools menu and requires that there be no external target attached Calibration Since the electrical characteristics of each individual CAS 1000 I2C and host USB bus can be slightly different the CAS 1000 I2C includes a calibration feature to optimize output when using it to supply pull up voltage to a target bus Calibration also adjusts the output voltage of the two discrete I O signals JTAG Testing and In System Programming The CAS 1000 I2C includes an IEEE 1149 1 JTAG Test Access Port TAP This port can be used to perform boundary scan testing and in system programming of flash EEPROMs and CPLDs on the target system The optional Corelis ScanExpress software is needed to enable the boundary scan testing and in system programming feature This feature is mutually exclusive to the CC functionality and requires it to be put into the TAP mode 6 Product Overview Host Computer Requirements DC Exerciser is a 32 bit Microsoft
177. d and enter the hex value 3E into this box Even though there is no target attached to the analyzer you are able to send the byte 3E to the bus Click on the Send button and the byte value should be echoed in the Receive section text box on the right side of the window as shown below in Figure 81 Note that the option to echo the sent data default can be controlled in the Debugger preferences Tools Preferences Debugger Options If turned off the sent data would not be shown in the receive section text box In Analyzer Supplied mode the CAS 1000 I2C controller supplies the pull up voltage for the CC bus If you were still in Target Supplied mode since there is no target connected there would be no pull up supply to the bus making the lines undefined when high Therefore any attempt to send or receive messages would likely result in a timeout error You can confirm and adjust the voltage source settings from the Settings pane of the Configuration Manager Tools Configuration Manager Settings e mm Debugger Untitled fs II ex Figure 81 Byte Sent From the Debugger 78 Getting Started Click on the Receive button now The value FF will appear in the Receive area text box Without a target attached to communicate with this is the only value that should ever be received since the bus is floating high Enter the number 3 in the Bytes field and then click on the Receive button again to tell the
178. d for 12C Exerciser To close this wizard click Finish Figure 13 Installation Completed Screen Installation 17 CAS 1000 I2C E Hardware Installation The CAS 1000 I2C controller is a hot plug USB device You must first install the DC Exerciser software before installing the CAS 1000 I2C controller Drivers for the CAS 1000 I2C controller are installed with the I2C Exerciser software and not installing the software and drivers first may result in improper unit configuration and operation Installation Steps 1 You should have already installed the DC Exerciser at this point If not please do so before continuing with hardware installation 2 Connect a USB 2 0 compatible cable from the CAS 1000 I2C USB 2 0 connector to any available USB 2 0 connector on your PC 3 If you are running Windows XP the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box should automatically appear as shown in Figure 14 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only O Yes now O Click Nest to continue Figure 14 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome Screen Windows XP 4 Click on No not this time and click on the Next button 1
179. d in the trace listing or excluded from the trace listing The radio buttons at the top of the dialog determine this selection or turn off filtering completely The Include and Exclude selections each have their own separate set of filters which are displayed in the dialog s list box A filter from the list can be selected by the user for editing or removal Configuration and Preferences 170 Using the Add button beneath the list box a new filter can be defined and appended to the list The Edit button enables alteration of an existing selected filter The Remove and Remove All buttons enable the deletion of a selected filter or the entire set of filters The Filter Definition dialog for setting the transaction criteria for each filter is similar to those for the Find and Trigger dialogs This dialog shown in Figure 152 is displayed when using the Add or Edit buttons Filter Definition x mer Transfer Type Address v NAK Any bd Addr Any el Error Any be AddrType any ei HOi eem Sg RW Any UO 2 Any S Data Byte Value any zue sie ba onitor Trace Line Figure 152 Filter Definition Dialog similar to Edit Configuration and Preferences 171 Symbols Pane This dialog shown in Figure 153 displays a list that can contain symbolic text strings along with associated parameters that specify the criteria which determine where the symbolic text will replace a numeric value in the
180. d_glitch C test simplel gpf FALSE bArmGlitch don t_care here inject_glitch inject glitch pattern now Input Parameters None Return Value None Scripting Language 301 integer to string Description Converts an integer to a decimal string representation of that integer Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype integer to string nValue Example Call nVal 253 str integer to _string nVal print str print 253 Input Parameters nValue The value of the integer to convert to a string Return Value A string containing the decimal representation of the input integer value 302 Scripting Language integer to string hex8 Description Converts the integer input into a string containing the hex representation of the integer The returned string will have exactly 2 hex digits If the value passed in is larger than OxFF the east significant 8 bits are used Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype integer to string hex8 nValue Example Call strSlave integer Co string hex8 0x9A slave address is at 9A Input Parameters nValue the value of the integer to convert to a string If the value is larger than OxFF the least significant 8 bits are used Return Value A string with exactly 2 digits containing the hexadecimal representation of the least significant 8 bits of the input integer value Scripting Language 303 intege
181. ddr Hex AddrType RAV NAK Error KHz 0 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us 01101 Ko Aalt a E Debugger E Ss Programmer Scale 50 us div _ Auto Fit Line D gt Interval A to B Sa PT Be LIVE AddrFormat FE Trace On Bus Idle SCL High SDA High a 1 High 170 2 High Figure 83 Capture of Debugger Send 80 Getting Started Return to the Debugger window by clicking on the Debugger Shortcut Bar icon You will now execute a simple Debugger script Refer to the nteractive Debugger chapter for details on using debugger script commands For now you will load a very short debugger script from a debugger control file Click on the Open Command File button in the tool bar represented by the icon Click on the No button if prompted for saving the current Debugger commands The Open Debugger Command File dialog window will be displayed so that you can browse for the file It is located in the Demo subfolder of the DC Exerciser installation folder For a default installation this would be C Program Files l2C Exerciser Demo Find this subfolder and select the file named tutorial dcf and then click on the Open button This debugger control file script will load into the Debugger window as shown in Figure 84 below e Sp Debugger C Program Files I2C Exerciser Demo tutorial dcf fo 1 Je Send Receive Addr 1
182. ddress cycle by causing one too few bits to be sent during the cycle SHORT_DATA Shortens the data cycle by causing one too few bits to be sent during the cycle ie 7 bits instead of 8 Z EG_HOLD_ADDR Produces a slightly negative hold time during the address cycle by causing the SDA signal to change immediately before the SCL signal falls for bits during the cycle NEG_HOLD_DATA Produces a slightly negative hold time during the data cycle by causing the SDA signal to change immediately before the SCL signal falls for bits during the cycle NEG_SETUP_ADDR Produces a slightly negative setup time during the address cycle by causing the SDA signal to change immediately after the SCL signal rises for bits during the cycle NEG_SETUP_DATA Produces a slightly negative setup time during the data cycle by causing the SDA signal to change immediately after the SCL signal rises for bits during the cycle Table 7 Debugger Error Injection Keywords The address error keywords ending with _ADDR must come at the very beginning of the sequence of data bytes For example the Debugger send sequence SHORT_ADDR 01 40 33 7F will cause the address bytes to be one bit too short The data error keywords ending with _DATA must come right before the data byte you want the error to be injected to For example the Debugger send sequence 01 LONG_DATA 40
183. dees eR an Aaa ie ae pad aati ncdee onan 272 Parameters Scope WiNCOW cccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceacaeceeeeesesenaeaeeeeeeesecacceeeeeeeeeseeseaeees 275 Parameters Scope Measurement Controle nense rnnr nenene 276 Parameter Specification File Example ssssssnenseeeenertenseesttnrtnrstrtrttnnrnnsettrtnnnnnnennn nenene 280 Parameters Scope Waveform Controls ssssssssssessnerrenseesttnrtnnstretttnntnnsstertnnnnnssrennn nenene 281 Edito VV IND OW Seren nce ies eee a Oe a a chia die eee rag at aaa ate 344 Editor Popup MG Qu ae 205 deser rr e ee eeh 345 I2C Exerciser Editor Window Layout cccceeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeesenaeeeeeeaes 346 Editor Fle Men s se es state citer aaa ee ye ar lege ee har ee ths 347 Editon Edit Met eege E 348 Eton VOol Steeg eech 350 Glitch Pattern Editor Window ccccccceceeeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeececaaeaeeeeeeesescaaeeeeeeeeeseceenieeeeeeeeeeees 354 Glitch Injection Trigger CONnditions seecae eein AEAEE E EAE EEEE E R Ei 355 Default Gltch Patter Setting rre irani rar AATA AA N E edn eee 356 SDA Low Glitch Injected by Data SDA Rising edge Triggering Condition 0 ee 356 SDA Low Glitch Waveform 000 022 ccccceceeccceceeeeeeec ce ae cece cece seceaaaeceeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeeeeesenciaeeeeeeeseteee 357 Figure 214 Glitch Pattern Editor File Menu List of Tables Table 1 Optional Interface Cables sss feces a icin Ad ves Ra Roe Eee 8 Table 2
184. defaults You can then continue with the tutorial 76 Getting Started Step 2 Send and Receive with Debugger Click on the Debugger icon in the shortcut bar on the far left side of the main window to open the Debugger window Alternatively you could select the Debugger entry from the Tools menu The Debugger window will appear as shown in Figure 80 below The left area of the Debugger window is for sending data to slave devices on the CC bus and the right area for receiving data back from slave devices You can see fields on both sides for specifying the bus address and address type Both sides also have a No Stop checkbox that allows you to generate a message without a Stop cycle if necessary such that the next Address cycle will commence with a Repeated Start cycle The Run field on the send side allows you to specify the number of times that debugger commands will be looped including continuous looping The Bytes field on the receive side lets you enter the number of bytes that you want to read from the slave device at the specified bus address e mp Debugger Untitled eon ox Figure 80 Debugger Window Getting Started 77 The text box in the bottom portion of the Send area is for entering debugger commands An entry in this text box can be as simple as a single hexadecimal byte value to send You can refer to the Interactive Debugger chapter later for more details on all of the commands For now go ahea
185. der By default this file contains the maximum and minimum values defined for Fast Mode by the Ee bus Specification Version 2 1 January 2000 However this file is in a text format and can be opened with any text editor in order to customize the specification The format of the parameter specification file is simple A portion of the file is shown in Figure 201 below Each measurable parameter constitutes a section of the file represented by an identifier enclosed in the bracket characters and Comments beginning with a semicolon help to point out each parameter section and indicate the measurement units After the section identifier there are two lines one beginning with min and one with max that define the respective minimum and maximum values Simply place the desired value after the equals sign If no value is indicated after the equals sign then there is considered to be no lower or upper limit to the associated parameter measurement ParameterSpec ini Minimum and maximum values for comparing parameter scope measurement results The defaults in this file are based on the Fast Mode I2C spec SDACapacitance capacitive load for SDA pF min max 400 SCLCapacitance capacitive load for SCL pF min max 400 ThdSta START hold time ns min 600 max Tsusta START set up time ns min 600 max Tsusto STOP set up time ns min 600 Wans Figure 201 Par
186. device is assigned its own address and operates according to information in its own data file These provide real time behavior to accesses by the external bus master s Besides ACK NAK responses reads of each device respond with its sequential data values as extracted from the data file Device writes are stored along with the other traffic in the Monitor trace supporting full bidirectional data flow with the target Intentional error injection capability enables testing under marginal and or extreme conditions In addition to normal writes and reads of the bus the emulated master can employ a number of protocol and timing corruptions error injection to stress target devices and illuminate appropriate responses The controlling script files for the above virtual master devices employ a simplified C like syntax The built in Editor tool facilitates their construction including syntax assistance Since they are pure text files the user may opt to edit these off line DC Device Emulator 235 The Emulation tool enables configuring launching stopping looping and stepping these virtual devices This includes assigning names slave addresses among other features and attaching the appropriate controlling script or data file 236 DC Device Emulator Emulation Manager Window The Emulation Manager window shown in Figure 173 can be opened using either the Emulator entry on the Shortcut bar or in the Tools menu Table 17 describes the numb
187. dialog box shown in Figure 144 will pop up to show the erasing status Progress Erasing Done Figure 144 Erasing Progress Window 160 Bus Traffic Monitor Programmer Options The user can change Programmer options by accessing the Programmer Options pane of the Preferences dialog To open the Preferences dialog press F7 or select Preferences from the Tools menu Once the Preferences dialog appears select the Programmer Options pane as shown in Figure 145 Preferences Options W Verify After Programming Figure 145 Programmer Options Pane Verify After Programming If selected the programmer will verify that the data was written properly after a write operation Bus Traffic Monitor 161 Programmer Window Reference The Programmer window shown in Figure 146 can be opened using the either the Programmer entry in the Shortcut Bar or in the Tools menu Table 12 describes the numbered areas of the DC Exerciser Programmer window 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Al ol EJE File Tools Window Help Li Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz I O 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us 01101 lu Monitor Ei nr Debugger 3 IH Programmer Untitled Device Selection Programmer Manufacturer Generic 12C EEPROM Type 24xx02 256 Byte 12C EEPROM 12C Device Address A0 E Address Type Data File C Users corelis testhex tx
188. dow click on the File menu and then click on Open Trace Data Note that there is also a tool bar button for this Browse to the Demo folder mentioned above and select the file tc74 tdf Then click on the Open button The Monitor trace window will fill up with the data as shown in Figure 90 below A3 Monitor C Program Files I2C Exerciser Demo tc74 tdf Lol zl Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz I O 1 WO2 Data Byte Hex Time us D 2 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 4 1 00 96 Address Analyzer 7 Bit Read 559 982 a e S a A E a 5 Address Analyzer 7 Bit Write 1 336 024 6 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 00 1 336 120 T Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Read 99 4 4 2 081 885 8 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Read NAK 96 1 1 2E 2 081 984 9 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 3 592 941 10 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 00 3 593 036 11 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Read 99 1 1 4 032 096 12 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Read NAK 96 1 1 2F 4 032 196 13 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 6 696 122 14 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 97 1 1 01 6 696 217 15 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Read 98 1 1 7 224 145 16 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Read NAK 97 1 1 40 7 224 245 17 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 12 824 18 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 01 12 824 19 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 4 4 80 12 824 20 Address Analyzer 9A 7 Bit Write 99 1 1 17 328 21 Data Target 9A 7 Bit Write 98 1
189. e Hex Time us eh a 12 Preferences meji 2 0 01101 11 235 1 mr alla 10 Monitor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats 184 4 Monitor 9 156 4 8 Line Column 98 1 ane EE 7 Starting from 1 default Trigger is line 0 711 1 6 28 1 Debugger 5 Timestamp Start 235 1 4 25 4 E Starting from 0 default Trigger is time 0 F 3 25 1 BE 2 Timestamp Display 184 1 Programmer 1 156 1 soot EE 1 Other Opti 711 1 er jons 2 41 1 3 V Prompt for saving trace data prior to CLEAR or RUN 25 1 4 V Lock Timing with Trace 25 1 5 25 1 Lock to Top Listing Line Lock to Selected Listing Line G 184 1 7 START Hold Time Checking 156 1 8 3 98 1 Minimum Hold Time 0 16us v 9 T 1 10 2 1 12 1 Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 170 1 10 2 Figure 74 Monitor Window Trace List with Relative Timestamps There are several other miscellaneous options on this tab which will not be explored in this tutorial but are described in the Configuration and Preferences chapter Click on the Use Default button to return the Monitor Options settings back to their default settings 72 Getting Started Click on the Preferences screen Formats tab and position the screen to the right of the Monitor window as shown in Figure 75 The Formats tab controls how addresses in 7 bit mode will be displayed when shown in hex format In FE mode the LSB will always be zero a
190. e Manufacturer combo box The types that are available when using the Generic manufacturer support all of the ATMEL 24xxXXX series of DC EEPROM devices I2C Device Address combo box Specifies the TC device address of the EEPROM Initially this is set to the manufacturer s specified default address If the device is configured to use an address other than the manufacturer default that address can be entered into this field The address format complies with the Preference option in force FE mode is an 8 bit format with the 7 address bits left justified and 7F mode makes the 7 address bits right justified The example in the figure is in FE format Address Type combo box Specifies the size of the address 7 bit or 10 bit At this time the only EEPROM devices that the Programmer supports use 7 bit addresses so only 7 bit may be selected here Data File edit box and Browse button Offset combo box and edit box 158 Specifies the file containing data to be programmed Use the browse button to locate the data file Specifies an offset for the programming The drop down combo box allows for selection of whether to Add or Subtract the offset value which is entered into the edit box on the right The offset value must be entered in hexadecimal format Table 10 Programmer Function Descriptions Bus Traffic Monitor Read Button The Read button opens the Read Contents window shown in Figure
191. e having an active Trigger does not change the behavior Some Monitor window commands are disabled while bus traffic is being accumulated Pause This command pauses bus traffic acquisition and enables all Monitor window commands Subsequent Run Single or Run Repetitive command will continue to append newly acquired bus traffic to the existing trace data list Stop This command immediately stops bus traffic acquisition and enables all Monitor window commands 126 Bus Traffic Monitor Run Status Window When the Monitor window is started via the Run or Run Repetitive command the Run Status Window will appear to provide status about events and progress If a Trigger is active it will notify you when the trigger condition has been met It also provides information about when the trace buffer becomes full or wraps in addition to displaying how many transactions have been collected so far The Run Status will remain open while trace buffer collection is active and can only be closed when data collection is complete If you are not interested in the contents of this window it can either be repositioned out of the way or minimized The next time data collection begins the window will remember its last position Ai Run Status kedaj Pre trigger data Trigger Post trigger data Buffer Full Data collected successfully 109 transactions collected Data collected successfully Figure 123 Run Status Dialog Bus Traffic Mon
192. e operated instead of the line to the target This will leave the discrete high regardless of what state it started at Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_PulseDiscrete int nDiscreteNumber int nMilliseconds Return Value 0 if I2C_InitHardware was never called 1 if illegal discrete number 2 if selected discrete is not configured as an output 1 if successful Parameters nDiscreteNumber The index selecting the discrete to drive either 1 or 2 nMilliseconds Time period in milliseconds to hold the discrete low before going back to high Third Party Application Interface 209 2C_Receive_Data Launches a Receive operation as in the Debugger function conveying data bytes from a given bus address and checking for its timely completion This function may not return quickly up to the timeout interval depending on the time it takes to receive and confirm completion Use the I2C_GetLastTransferStatus function following this call to determine if the address cycle got NAK ed Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_Receive_ Data int nAddress int blOBitAddress unsigned char pReceiveData int nDataCount int bUseStopBits Return Value 1 if I2c_InitHardware was never called 2 if a timeout occurred otherwise the number of bytes received may be 0 if transfer was aborted due to address NAK Parameters nAdadress This is the 7 bit or 10 bit address of t
193. e 402 Transfer Debugger 87 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 22 TE ii D 88 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 5A R RR 89 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 31 ob w E a PS Z p 90 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 OF g es Programmer 91 Address Analyzer 36 pn Read 107 AddrType Any E I 01 Any e 92 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 61 93 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 DANGER RW Ama UOS e 94 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 gt Data Byte 95 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 2F D Byte es 96 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 57 He 72 e positon Ay Je 97 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 55 Mask FF si Width 1Byte v 98 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 12 Hex 5500 Gusar gees anae A S Raa a a o MART EE Led From Selected Monitor Trace Line Defauits 101 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 DONE 102 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 103 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 6A 11 914 1 104 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 12 098 1 Scale 20 us div AutoFit Line 20 msama interval A to Sne BS i FIELD enee ata T Daa Data Data _ _ __vats ech ep UO OORA 0A IA D111 OO1 OA i1idiiioA 0010000 1 AP SDA SCL Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 70 1 1 0 2 A Figure 64 Monitor Window Trace List Showing the Second Find 72 Data Result 62 Getting Started Step 7 Changing Preferences There are a number of user configurable preferences available from the Tools Preferences men
194. e Monitor window timing display Refer to the Monitor Colors section of the Preferences dialog described in the Configuration and Preferences chapter Waveform Trigger Setup controls These controls allow a signal edge transition to be captured and displayed in the graph Signal Specifies the bus signal for which an edge will be captured SDA or SCL Edge Direction Specifies the direction of the edge to be captured rising or falling Cycle Specifies the ke message cycle during which the edge capture will occur e Address Looks for the first matching address cycle edge Data Looks for the first matching data cycle edge RE START Sr Captures the edges of a repeated START condition START S Captures the edges of a START condition STOP P Captures the edges of a STOP condition Note that if RE START START or STOP is selected then the Signal and Edge Direction selections do not apply Buffer Position Specifies whether the captured signal edge will be stored early or late in the analog data buffer This thus determines whether the edge will appear towards the beginning or end of the graph respectively Arm button Clicking on this button arms the trigger The next signal edge matching the selected conditions triggers the capture and display of the analog data While waiting for an appropriate signal transition to occur this button becomes a Cancel button that allows the trigger to be disarmed S
195. e dialog there is a section called Input Output Signals Set both the I O 1 and I O 2 Function fields to Out TTL using the dropdown menus as shown in Figure 86 below A custom voltage can also be specified here but leave it at the default 3 30 V Click on the Close button when you are finished Input Output Signals High Level Function I O 1 Out TTL e Drive SMB AT1 3 30 Volts 17 o gt Damma soe ie Monitor Buffer Options Out Open Drain Lo N Figure 86 Set Discrete I O Modes Return to the Debugger window by clicking on the Debugger Shortcut Bar icon Click on the File menu and then click on New Debugger Command File A message will pop up asking if you wish to save the debugger command file Click on the No button Then enter the following commands into the empty Send area text box Discrete I O Test Address10 118 SetDiscrete 1 0 SetDiscrete 2 0 Al SetDiscrete 2 1 2B SetDiscrete SetDiscrete 1 1 oF SetDiscrete 2 1 E8 N o The first number that follows the SetDiscrete command specifies the line either I O 1 or I O 2 The second number specifies the state to which the signal will be set high on 1 or low on O This script will output a byte after setting each of the four possible combinations of signal states Notice that the Address10 command is used to specify that the messages will be sent to the 10 bit address 118 hex Getting Started 83 Set the script to execute twice by e
196. e emulation with data specified in SDF file Stops a slave emulation Stops all slave emulations Table 16 DC DLL Functions Third Party Application Interface 2C_ConfigureDiscretes Overwrites several configuration parameters related to driving the two discrete I O lines This includes setting each line s direction drive type TTL or open drain SMB connector linkage and voltage level Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_ConfigureDiscretes int nDiscretelFunction BOOL bDiscretelDrivesSMB_ATI int nDiscrete2Function BOOL nDiscrete2InputFromSMB_AT2 char szVoltage Return Value 0 if I2C_InitHardware was never called 1 if successful 1 if invalid nDiscrete1Function parameter 2 if invalid nDiscrete2Function parameter 3 if invalid szVoltage parameter Parameters nDiscrete1 Function 0 Input 1 TTL Output 2 Open drain Output bDiscrete1 DrivesSMB_AT1 irrelevant if Discrete 1 is configured as an input otherwise 0 drives target connector 1 drives SMB AT1 connector nDiscrete2Function 0 Input 1 TTL Output 2 Open drain Output nDiscrete2InputFromSMB_AT2 irrelevant if Discrete 2 is configured as an output otherwise 0 input comes from target connector 1 input comes from SMB AT2 szVoltage discrete output voltage between 1 25 and 3 30 rounded to nearest 0 05V Third Party Application Interface 199 2C_DisableCollisionDetection Enables an analyzer mode which i
197. e omitted Under the CC bus protocol absence of the STOP condition means that a master is not yet done transmitting The previous data transfer can then be followed by a repeated START condition and another data transfer This can be used to support some slave devices which require that the first data transfer specify the value of an offset register or a command and then the following data is read from or written to the device at that offset location Receive text box The large text area constituting the bottom portion of the Debugger s Receive controls displays the data bytes that are successfully read from the UC bus By default all data bytes that are successfully transmitted using the Debugger are automatically listed here however the user can elect to not echo the sent data Refer to the Debugger Options section of this chapter for more information on user preferences Receive button Clicking on this button begins the operation of reading from a target slave device Depending on the user preference that has been set the Debugger may abort its Receive operation if a message is not acknowledged NAK d by the specified target slave device by default the Debugger continues to receive data even when NAK d Refer to the Debugger Options section of the Preferences Dialog description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information on user preferences Status Box This indicator is located just below the Receive
198. e trigger condition is detected on the bus the user defined glitch pattern is injected into the bus traffic In order to use this powerful feature you must follow the proper steps To begin you need to create the glitch pattern and the triggering conditions using the Glitch Pattern Editor tool With this tool you are able to draw the glitch patterns define the trigger conditions test them and save them for later use in Master or Slave Emulation scripts Since this tool lets you design and test the glitch injections interactively with live targets you may choose not to use the Master or Slave Emulations However if you ever require automatic script based test sessions you can employ glitch injection commands in the emulation script files The next two sections will describe how to use the Glitch Pattern Editor and how to add the glitch injections to Master and Slave Emulation scripts Glitch Pattern Injection 353 Using the Glitch Pattern Editor A glitch pattern consists of up to 1022 clock cycles worth of SDA and SCL levels In addition the triggering condition for glitch injection is also considered a part of the glitch pattern information The Glitch Pattern Editor a very powerful and easy to use tool for creating and testing the glitch patterns interactively It allows you to draw the glitch levels of SDA and SCL signals using the mouse It also lets you change the glitch clock frequency set the trigger conditions arm the trigger
199. ear Bookmarks h Find Ctrl F Z Replace Ctril H Syntax Check Figure 195 Test Edit Menu Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation Redo Restores a previously undone editing operation Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at the line where the cursor is located or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current script is searched for the specified text and if found that text is brought into view and highlighted Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of interest is entered along with the replacement text The current test script is searched and any occurrences o
200. ed Monitor Untitled To fe iss AN File Trace Tools Window Help e x Si bmi amp SR oe SH x ym Aw Sg x Shortcuts line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time el vo 1 LE mmli 33 Preferences 2267 0 01101 34 2 293 1 allt 35 Monitor Colors Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats 2 476 4 Monitor 36 2 632 1 St 37 Line Column 2730 1 ae cl 38 Starting from 1 default Trigger is line 0 3 441 1 39 3 469 1 Debugger 40 Timestamp Start 3494 1 41 3520 1 d Starting from 0 default Trigger is time 0 d E 42 3545 1 S BE 43 Timestamp Display 3729 1 Programmer 44 3 884 1 Absolute Relative to last 46 4694 1 Other Options 47 4735 1 48 V Prompt for saving trace data prior to CLEAR or RUN 4 761 4 49 Lock Timing with Trace 4 786 1 a Lock to Top Listing Lit Lock to Selected Listing Lit Ae 51 D op Listing Line DN leci isting Line 4 995 4 52 START Hold Time Checking Bad 4 53 A 5 249 1 Minimum Hold Time 0 16us v 54 5 960 1 55 5 988 1 57 4 69 042 us Corelis Ready DEMO Addtomet FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 170 1 20 2 Figure 71 Monitor Options Preferences Screen Getting Started 69 The Monitor Options tab allows configuration of other Monitor window display options The Line Column option affects how the Line column in the trace list
201. ed In Master Emulation Slave Emulation Test Example Calls exit exit the program with a pass condition exit 20 exit the program with error condition 20 Input Parameters nExitCode An integer value indicating the error condition A value of O indicates a pass condition This parameter can be omitted causing the default value of 0 to be used Return Value None Scripting Language 299 float to setrcinell Description Converts a floating point input to a decimal string representation of that floating point value Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype float to String fValue Example Call fVal 3 14 str float_to_string fVal print str print n L n Input Parameters fValue The value of the float to convert to a string Return Value A string containing the decimal representation of the input floating point value 300 Scripting Language inject_glitch Description Injects previously loaded glitch pattern to the target bus immediately without waiting for any armed trigger event This function allows you to bypass the arming and triggering sequence of glitch injection The load_glitch or reload_glitch function must be called prior to calling this function Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype inject_glitch Example Call loads a glitch pattern from the simplel gpf file and injects it to the target bus immediately loa
202. editing of master and slave script files Glitch Pattern Editor Launches the Glitch Pattern Editor window which allows creating testing and saving of glitch patterns to be used in emulation scripts Demo Mode Switches between Demo Mode and Live Data Mode A check mark is placed to the left of this menu item to indicate that the I2C Exerciser application is in the demo mode Self Test Launches a test sequence to validate the basic proper operation of the CAS 1000 I2C hardware Bus Traffic Monitor 133 Calibration Launches an automated tool that calibrates the CAS 1000 I2C electrical outputs in order to improve analyzer supplied voltage source settings Configuration Manager Invokes the Configuration Manager window which allows the user to configure numerous system wide settings including triggers filters symbols SMBus hardware options and project files Preferences Invokes the Preferences dialog which allows the user to alter configurable settings of each individual tool window 134 Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor Window Menu The Window menu shown in Figure 130 manages the windows of I2C Exerciser Arrange Icons Shortcut Bar Close All Windows 1 Monitor Untitled 2 Debugger Untitled Figure 130 Monitor Window Menu Arrange Icons Arranges all minimized windows in order at the bottom of the main window Shortcut Bar Enables whether or not the Shortcut Bar is displayed By default t
203. eeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeeeeaaes 51 Figure 51 Monitor Window Trace List Positioned on Cursor B Line eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeneeeeeeaaes 52 Figure 52 Monitor Window Timing Display Showing Edges Zoomed in at Line 100 53 Figure 53 Monitor Window Timing Display Measuring the Time Between Cursors A AB 54 Figure 54 Go to Start Tool Bar Button 55 Figure 55 Find Tool Bar Buton Zeie aE a ses feaageedteevacea ege Ee E A er 56 Figure 56 Finds DaO a T A E E T 56 Figure 57 Find a Data Value Of EE 58 Figure 58 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Find 2E Data Result 59 Figure 59 Find a Data Value Of d 60 Figure 60 Clear Tagged ROWS Prompt center eeeaeeeseeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 60 Figure 61 Matched Transactions brommt 61 Figure 62 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Find 72 Data Result ccc eeeeeseeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 61 Figure 63 Go to Tagged Row Tool Bar Button 62 Figure 64 Monitor Window Trace List Showing the Second Find 72 Data Result 62 Figure 65 Monitor Colors Preferences Green 63 Figure 66 Monitor Colors Preferences Screen Changing Cursor A Background Color 64 Figure 67 Monitor Window with Updated Cursor A Colors eecccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaaes 65 Figure 68 Monitor Window with Updated Cursor A Colors 0 ecccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaaes 66 Figure 69 Monitor Window with Alternating ROW C
204. eference As with any text editor tools for finding and replacing text as well as cut copy paste and print are included Keyword color coding is a feature that automatically colors keywords as they are being typed When the editor recognizes that a word entered is a keyword in the scripting language or the name of a built in function that word is colored accordingly This helps minimize inadvertent misspellings and coupled with syntax checking allows the user to create syntactically correct scripts before executing them Syntax checking is a useful tool that checks the syntax of the script The user can check the syntax of the script by clicking on the Syntax Check button in the Editor Window When a keyword is not recognized or there is a missing punctuation mark the user will be alerted of that fact and the line where the error occurred will be marked In addition the script also makes sure that all the functions referenced in the script exist and that the script follows the correct structure described earlier in this chapter Bookmarking allows the user to mark certain lines in the script for later scrutiny When the user inserts lines before the bookmark the bookmarks are automatically moved along with the text This is useful in long scripts to keep track of where important parts of the script are The finding and replacing feature of the editor can mark all the lines found with a search Users familiar with regular expressions wi
205. elp Figure 22 Begin Monitor Data Collection When the program is in Demo Mode and a Run command is invoked an informational pop up window as shown in Figure 23 will appear to remind you that the program is currently in Demo Mode Click on the OK button to proceed i You are in demo mode In this mode only simulated data is displayed Figure 23 Demo Mode Reminder Pop up Window Getting Started 27 When traffic collection begins the Run Status window will be displayed to show progress information as the trace buffer fills with simulated traffic You may move or resize this window at any time to obtain a better view of the trace list lines and timing display as shown in Figure 24 Step by step color highlighted progress milestones are provided in the Run Status window This window also displays the number of bus transactions collected so far and a progress bar indicating what percentage of the trace buffer has been filled When running with a live target the user can click on the Stop button to abort data collection After the buffer is filled the Run Status window will indicate Data collected successfully and the Close will be enabled allowing the user to close the window ES DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Le Tee au File Trace Tools Window Help Teil SH ti SS ee x YE Ar Bo x Shortcuts Line Marker Type l Location Addr Hex Add
206. eneeeeneaes 97 Figure 100 Configuration Manager Analyzer Supplied ce eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaaes 98 Figure 101 Configuration Manager Settings Pane eseessessesseerrsseerrssttrrssttrnssttrrnsttrrnsttnnnstennsstnnnnneenn 100 Figure 102 Bus Electrical Features rrira ieceri r en E EE E EER E NEE EAE ET ERFAN ER IAEA EAR 101 Pig ure 103 Bus Drive E 102 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 viii Input Output SignalS esaea a araa ea doe eee ee laen 103 Monitor Butter ptons rerna n a aa a T sala lena te deaa Taaa tenders Ae 104 Montor WING OW EE 105 Monitoral raCecliStnig WEE 106 Monitor Mimi Kiel eona a ceded uaa eege gle ege See 109 Reie wl EE 112 Flas PANG iin Genie tees eae eege eege satan teat yak eelere ue ege 113 Filter Definit
207. ent Emulated Master device Similarly the current script file can be saved under a different file name which will also automatically associate the device with this new file Because the master script file is a plain text file the program does not save the breakpoint locations when saving the script The options related to the loading and saving of projects are identical to those described in the Monitor Menu Bar section of the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter TD New Project Open Project KH Save Project Save Project As f Open Script File Ctrl 0 KI Save Script File Ctrl 5 Save Script File s Print Preview amp Print Ctrl P Exit Figure 180 Emulated Master File Menu Open Script File Loads the content from another file into the Script Source text area All breakpoints and bookmarks are cleared If the current script has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it The newly opened file will be automatically associated with the current Emulated Master device Save Script File Saves the currently open script to a SCR text file Note that this does not save any set breakpoints or bookmarks Save Script File As Same as Save Script File above except that it always prompts for a new filename before saving The new script file name will be automatically associated with the current Emulated Master device Print Preview Previews the current script before printing it Print Prints the current
208. ent should occupy in the output string Blank spaces are inserted before the argument in order to fill this width If the padding specifer is preceded by a zero 0 then the zero digit is used in place of blank spaces 3 precision An optional precision specifier consisting of a period followed by an integer value that specifies the number of decimal digits to be displayed for floating point numbers or in the case of string arguments the maximum string length 4 type A required specifier indicating the type of the associated argument c character dori signed decimal integer f decimal floating point s string of characters u unsigned decimal integer D unsigned hexadecimal integer X unsigned hexadecimal integer capital letters Scripting Language 335 string substring Description Substring search helper function Its behavior is somewhat similar to the standard substring search function of the C library strstr Scans a base string for the first occurrence of some substring If not found returns an empty string otherwise returns a string starting with the first occurrence of the substring in the base string and ending with the remainder of the base string Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype string substring strl str2 Example Call Mainstr 43F7D2 substr F7 sub string substring mainstr substr sub will be F7D2 Input Parameters strl Base string to search in
209. epth ranges from 1 K 1 024 to 1 M 1 048 576 transactions Monitor Buffer Log to File This option provides continuous logging of trace data to host computer s hard disk and during Run Repetitive monitoring can record and store endless hours of UC bus traffic limited only by the available disk space When this option is selected the captured Monitor trace data is saved to files as described below The trace data is stored in files with the extension tdf each of which holds up to 1M of consecutive CC bus transactions The trace data path and base filename are user specified and then a numerical index is appended to each filename _nnnn to indicate the chronological order in which the data was captured and saved Note that each 1M transaction trace data file uses about 260MB of disk space as it contains all captured I C bus transaction data including signal waveforms timing and time stamp information Use the Monitor Window s Run Repetitive button to continuously capture the traffic Data will be captured into a tdf file and once the file exceeds 1M transactions another file will be opened to continue storing transactions and so forth Note that when the Run or the Run Repetitive button is clicked and trace data files with the same base filename already exist in the specified location the user will be prompted to overwrite them While running the Monitor Window displays the most recent 1M transactions of data and the
210. er For a default installation this would be C Program Files I2C Exerciser Decoder Browse to this folder and select the file named tc74 smb Then click on the Select button and the File field of the SMBus Decoder File dialog window will be filled in Now click on the Update button to automatically fill in the rest of the fields with information from the decoder file The dialog window will now appear as shown below in Figure 92 SMBus Decoder File Ee Choose a file to load then click on Update to load its contents File C Program Files I2C Exerciser Decoder tc74 smb Address 9A Upda Name Microchip TC74 Thermal Sensor C Cae Figure 92 SMBus Decoder File Dialog with TC74 Information Click on the OK button at the bottom of the dialog window to finish adding the device association to the SMBus association list You can see the new entry at the bottom of the list in the SMBus configuration pane Click on the Close button to close the Configuration Manager 88 Getting Started Now back in the Monitor window right click in the Data Byte column heading and click on the SMBus Mode menu item as shown in Figure 93 below SMBus messages in the Data Byte column will now be decoded for you as well as the device name in the Addr column as shown below in Figure 94 ani Monitor C Program Files I2C Exerciser Demo tc74 tdf
211. er Receive Controls Addr This field specifies the UC bus address of the target slave that is being read from An address can be entered as a hexadecimal value or an address symbol may be used if one has been defined for the target slave refer to the Symbols section the Configuration Manager description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter Additionally the field s dropdown list provides a selection of recently used address values and all of the currently defined address symbols Note that 7 bit C addresses are represented as 8 bit hexadecimal values and their format is dependant on the current address mode setting FE mode or 7F mode Please refer to the Formats section of the Preferences Dialog description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information AddrType This field specifies the bit length of the target slave address The dropdown list allows selection of either 7 Bit or 10 Bit Bytes This field specifies the number of bytes that the Debugger reads from the target slave during its Receive operation A decimal value can be entered here and the field s dropdown list provides a selection of recently used values No Stop This check box specifies whether a STOP condition is generated at the end of a message When unchecked default the STOP condition is included after all of a message s data bytes have been 142 Interactive Debugger read Checking this box causes the STOP condition to b
212. er of the installation folder The four buttons at the bottom of the window allow the user to manipulate the association list Using the Add button a new device can be associated with an address The Edit button enables alteration of an existing selected association The Remove and Remove All buttons enable deletion of the selected association or the entire list of associations When using the Add or Edit buttons the SMBus Decoder File dialog is displayed as shown in Figure 115 Click on the Browse button to select the decoder file Click on the Update button to have the information from the decoder file automatically filled into the Address and Name fields Click on the OK button to finish or the Cancel button to cancel If the address being associated is a reserved address overriding of the reserved address must be confirmed Other addresses already associated with a device will not be allowed to be re associated until they are removed from the association list SMBus Decoder File rm Choose a file to load then click on Update to load its contents ne Address X Update Figure 115 SMBus Decoder File Dialog SMBus Timeout The SMBus Timeout checkbox is used to enable the detection of a timeout condition as defined by the SMBus specification When this setting is checked an SMBus Timeout will be reported as an error line in the Monitor trace listing any time that the clock signal SCL is detected to be
213. erciser The Installation Wizard will install 12C Exerciser on your computer WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties To continue dick Next Figure 3 DC Exerciser Installation Wizard Installation 9 If the installation program does not automatically begin go to the Windows Start Menu and select Start then Run The Run dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 4 Type D setup exe where D is the CD ROM drive letter Click on the OK button to run the installation program Run Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you ees 7J D setup exe Figure 4 Windows Run Dialog Click on the Next button The License Agreement screen shown in Figure 5 will be displayed E gt a DC Exerciser InstallAware Wizard CORELIS An EIA Company Software License Agreement This is a legal agreement Agreement between you and Corelis Inc Corelis This Agreement is part of a package that includes the GC Bus Analyzer Exercizer Programmer and Tester Software products collectively the Software By installing copying downloading accessing or otherwise using any of the Software you agree to be legally bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement as to such Software If you do not accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement then click on
214. ered areas of the 12C Emulation Manager window DC Exerciser fc AN 1 IS hes File Execute Tools Window Help gt E Q onitor Untitled Shortcuts AA Emulation Manager 01101 Mr ERD Emulated Devices Monitor e n JERN E EES Type Status Name Address AddrType Runs File V master M waster 1 CAProgram Files I2C ExercisenSam Vi slave EEEE at2scoza An 7Bit 1 CAProgram Files I2C ExercisenSam Vi slave B atescoze 7Bit 1 C Program Files I2C Exerciser Sam m lt RK Parameters Scope add Edit Remove Remove All Mer Ready UNE AddrFormat FE Trace Off Bus Idle SCL High SD Hab 1 01 High 1 02 High 97 Figure 173 Emulation Manager Window Component Description 1 Menu Bar Contains the menu bar for the active Emulation Manager window 2 Tool Bar Provides quick single click access to commonly used commands for the active Emulation Manager window 3 Emulation The main Emulation Window which provides buttons and Manager an overview of emulation resources Window Table 17 Emulation Manager Areas UC Device Emulator 237 Emulation Manager The Emulation Manager Window provides an overview of all emulated devices Each line in the listing shows the features of an independent emulation item under the column headings Only one line may display the Master and always has that name assigned The other lines may include up to
215. es a direct read write interactive interface with the target CC bus Unlike the Monitor window where the CAS 1000 I2C is passively monitoring the bus the Debugger can be used to perform simple message transfers both to and from slave devices During this process the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer essentially acts as a master on the bus The Debugger main screen is shown in Figure 133 Typical applications include Generating IC bus traffic and confirming basic bus operation and integrity Establishing the presence and behavior of slave devices Poking data to or initializing slave devices Peeking the contents of slave devices Interactively checking EC devices under various signal and timing conditions and assessing bus conformance while observing signals with external instrumentation e Stress testing of bus devices by injecting protocol errors and intentionally skewing the timing relationship between clock and data e mm Debugger C Program Files I2C Exerciser Demo tutorial def Colea JE vi ADDRESS_MODE FE ve tutorial script address ZA 33 pause 500 milliseconds address 18 pause 500 address C4 21 30 OD OA Figure 133 Debugger Window Interactive Debugger 139 Send Data The left side of the Debugger window contains controls for generating messages that write data to slave devices on the target I C bus These controls are shown in Figure 134 Send a C AddrT
216. esentation of a floating point value into a floating point output string_to_integer Converts a string decimal representation of an integer into an integer output Table 23 Built In Scripting Functions 294 Scripting Language Built In Functions Detailed Descriptions compare to table Description Compares a specified value against a parameter from a specification table text file An error message will be displayed if the parameter is not found in the file The format for specification table files is described following the function details below Used In Test Prototype compare to table striInputValue strCondition strParamTitle strSpecTblPath Example Call measuredV 3 15 compare to table measuredV lt VoltageMax SpecTable spec returns TRUE if 3 15 less than VoltageMax in spec table SpecTable spec Input Parameters striInputValue String value for comparison The string is presumed to represent a floating point numerical value strCondition String specifying the comparison operator for the test Either gt lt gt lt or an strParamTitle String containing the name of the specification table file parameter to compare with strSpecTblPath String containing the name of the file where the parameter for comparison is located Remember to double any backslashes when specifying the path to avoid interpretation as an escape sequence Return Values
217. essage_box Prompts for user interaction using a message box pop up The format of the message box depends on the input arguments pause Pauses execution of the script for a specified number of milliseconds print Outputs a string to the Test window or Emulated Master window progress Updates the state of the progress bar in the Test window or Emulated Master window 292 Scripting Language Function Description pulse_discrete Sets the specified discrete I O signal to the ow state for a specified number of milliseconds and sets it to high when done Generates and returns a pseudorandom number receive_message Receives a message ie performs a read operation of specified length from the specified target slave address and returns it as a string reload_glitch Reloads previously loaded glitch pattern data to the CAS 1000 seed_random Sets a starting point for the pseudorandom number generator send_message Sends a message ie performs a write operation to the specified target slave address send_message_PEC Sends a message ie performs a write operation with a SMBus Packet Error Checking PEC byte to the specified target slave address sense_discrete_level Senses the state of the specified discrete I O signal and return it as a string X set_discrete_voltage Sets a new TTL voltage level for the high state of the discrete I O signals set_clock_rate Sets the SCL
218. est for return of merchandise RMAs can only originate from CORELIS If authorization is granted an RMA number will be forwarded to the customer either directly or through its authorized sales representative CONTACT INFORMATION The latest news tips and updates on the Corelis bus analyzer hardware and software products can be found in the Corelis user forums The forums are provided as a free service to our existing customers but an individual user name and password is required To request an account please visit forums corelis com register php For sales inquiries please contact sales corelis com For any support related questions please enter a support request at www corelis com support or email support corelis com For more information about other products and services that Corelis offers please visit www corelis com ii Preface Table of Contents Chapter 1 Product Overview gur 1 Introduction to C and SM us REENEN 1 Introduction to the CAS 1000 12C 1M oon cccceeseseeesneeenseeeeeeeeesaesesaaeensneeeneeeessaaesaseeeenseeeseaesaseaesnseeeeeneeeas 2 SOftware TOO eege 4 Hardware Features esi iscsi 2ectckcs ee dEeeEE EENS fect cette REENEN EEN DEER EE EE 5 Host Computer Requirements cccseccsseeeeeseeeeseeeesneeeeeeeeeseaeseseaeeaseeeeeeeeesgaesaseeesaeeeaeseaeseseeesnaesenseaenes 7 Chapter 2 InStallatOn siessscsscecicescccvensccecececewnscenseertewevecescunseadeensecetewenecnteensnareewenecssadbens 8 Installing the
219. ettings Pane 176 Configuration and Preferences Target Supplied Specifies that the connected target CC bus has its own pull up voltage supply In this case the target bus is self sufficient and ready for use When this setting is selected the Pull up Resistance setting is disabled Analyzer Supplied Specifies that the CAS 1000 I2C will supply pull up voltage to the target bus In this case the target has no other attached pull up voltage source and the analyzer must supply this to activate the bus When this setting is selected both the Voltage and Pull up Resistance settings are enabled Voltage In Analyzer Supplied mode this specifies the voltage to which the bus will be pulled up by the CAS 1000 I2C The user must assure that this level is compatible with the operation of any attached target bus In Target Supplied mode this specifies the voltage level that will be provided by the target so that appropriate bus signal threshold levels can be automatically set Pull up Resistance In Analyzer Supplied mode this specifies the pull up resistor value through which both bus signals SCL and SDA will be pulled up by the CAS 1000 I2C The user should consider the target UC bus capacitance such that the resultant RC time constant will not adversely affect its operation at expected clock rates by producing signal rise times that are too slow Bus Signal Threshold High Level This value establishes the minimum voltage that a bu
220. evices are executed when the Run toolbar button is clicked The user can activate or deactivate a device by selecting or deselecting the checkbox Status Specifies the current execution status of the device The status can be one of the following Ready indicates that emulation of the device has not been executed Running indicates that emulation of the device is currently being executed Paused indicates that emulation of the device is currently stopped at a particular line shown in the Emulated Master window Completed indicates that emulation of the device has successfully finished execution Aborted indicates that the user has stopped emulation of the device before it had completed executing Inactive indicates that the device is disabled and will be excluded from execution Name Specifies the name of the device The master device is named MASTER Address The address of the device displayed in the current address mode FE or EF The master device does not have an address associated with it AddrType Specifies whether the device address is a 10 bit address or a 7 bit address Runs Specifies the number of times to iterate the script or data sequence associated with this device File The location of the script or data file associated with this device Double clicking on an entry in this column will open the Emulated Master or Emulated Slave dialog In addition the Emulation Manager
221. eyed to or from a target slave device The address of the target slave is determined by the previous address cycle and is shown in the Addr column The read write qualifier indicated in the R W column designates whether the data bytes are being written to or read from the target slave For data cycle transactions the data byte s conveyed will be present in the Data Byte column Location This column indicates whether the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer is involved in the transaction For address cycle transactions Analyzer signifies that the analyzer is acting as a master through the Debugger or Emulator for example while Target signifies that a master on the target CC bus is driving For data cycle transactions Analyzer signifies that the addressed slave is in fact being emulated by the analyzer while Target signifies that a live target slave device is involved Addr This column indicates the UC bus address of the target slave device for the transaction The address is either a 7 bit 10 bit or Hs mode type depending on which is indicated in the AddrType column Various numerical formats are available for displaying the address value including hex decimal and binary The current display format is shown in parenthesis in the column heading and right clicking on the column heading will display a popup menu that allows selection of the display format If symbols are enabled and there is an address symbol defined for the targe
222. f the search text are substituted with the replacement text Syntax Check Checks the syntax of the current script without executing it The result of the syntax check is displayed in a popup message box If a syntax error is found any line associated with the error Script Driven Bus Tester 269 will also be marked in the left hand gutter Note that some errors cannot be detected before execution such as function calls with an invalid number of arguments or unexpected argument types Test Execute Menu The Execute menu shown in Figure 196 contains commands pertaining to running and stepping through the current script H Step F10 K Run Until Cursor gt Run F5 Break D Stop Figure 196 Test Execute Menu Step Executes the script one line at a time starting with the next unexecuted line Run Until Cursor Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line and stops just before executing the line at the cursor position If a breakpoint is encountered before the cursor execution will pause at the breakpoint Run Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line Script execution will continue to the end of the script unless a breakpoint is encountered or the script is paused or aborted by the user Before script execution begins the user will be prompted to save the file if the script has been modified Break Pauses script execution Stop Completely aborts script executi
223. f this dialog These panes are listed in Table 14 and described on the following pages Configuration Manager gosesecoosoesesosseseog Triggers Filters Symbols smBus Settings Fies esgeetenge et Bus Electrical Features Voltage Source Bus Signal Thresholds 9 Target Supplied Analyzer Supplied High Level Volts Intended Pull up Parameters Kees Low Level Volts Bus Drive Features Drive Clock Rate Disable Collision Detection Pull up Resistance Accelerated Rising Edge Drive Hi Speed Mode Auto On OOff Auto On Off Input Output Signals High Level Function I O 1 nn r Drive SMB AT1 ol DE wes fl zember Monitor Buffer Options Depth Transactions Figure 149 Configuration Manager Dialog Panes Settings selected Configuration and Preferences 167 Function Description Triggers Establishes the criteria that define a trigger event Also allows the setting of the trigger s position relative to the trace buffer early middle or late Filters Establishes the criteria for one or more filters that determine what transactions will be included or excluded from the trace listing Symbols Establishes the criteria for transactions that will have their particular address or data byte value replaced by a specified text string symbol SMBus Establishes the associations between bus addresses and SMBus devices using files containing SMBus decod
224. face 4 pin Crimp Connector 15431 1 12 1 C Target Interface 4 pin Crimp Connector 15431 2 24 TC Target Interface 4 pin Crimp Connector 15431 3 Table 1 Optional Interface Cables Installation Installing the 12C Exerciser Application Software You must first install the DC Exerciser application software and then connect the CAS 1000 I2C controller The application software contains the driver for the CAS 1000 I2C The CAS 1000 I2C controller is a hot pluggable USB device However you should not plug in or unplug the CAS 1000 I2C while the I2C Exerciser application is running The CAS 1000 I2C CD ROM contains the installation program Windows will automatically recognize and configure the CAS 1000 I2C the first time it is detected in your system Administrator rights are required to install the software on Windows XP If the DC Exerciser is already installed on your system skip this chapter and proceed to chapters 3 and 4 To install the software Close any Windows applications that are currently running Disable any memory resident virus checking software The software may interfere with the installation process Insert the Corelis DC Bus Analyzer Exerciser Programmer and Tester CD ROM into your CD drive The installation program should start automatically and display the Welcome to the Installation Wizard screen as shown in Figure 3 D DC Exerciser InstallAware Wizard Welcome to the Installation Wizard for DC Ex
225. g trace listing line number to that time are displayed next to the cross hairs indicator Left clicking holding and dragging the cross hairs will drag the timing display in the direction of the mouse movement Performing the same action with the CTRL key pressed will show the relative time displacement dragged out Cursor A B These are two vertical line markers which can be placed anywhere in the timing graph by left clicking and dragging The markers will remain where placed even when not in view and are used to measure time intervals see the Interval A to B component above The transaction line nearest a cursor is indicated in the trace listing with special highlighting and an entry in the Marker column 110 Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor Configurations Various configuration options relevant to the Monitor Window can be specified by opening the Configuration Manager from the Tools menu The Configuration Manager can be used to configure the Triggers Filters Symbols and SMBus features which are applicable to use of the Monitor Window Triggers This dialog shown in Figure 109 establishes transaction criteria that define the trigger event which can cause the monitor capturing process to be stopped automatically once a certain transaction occurs The transaction satisfying this event is marked as Trigger in the trace listing When DC Exerciser is collecting bus data in Run Single mode and no trigger event is defined the captu
226. get attached which is sufficient to enable you to become familiar with how the debugger component of the 12C Exerciser functions If it is not already connected you will need to connect the CAS 1000 I2C controller by attaching the provided USB cable between the USB port on the back of the CAS 1000 I2C and an available USB 2 0 port on the host computer Refer to the Installation chapter for detailed installation instructions No target should be connected to the CAS 1000 I2C controller during this portion of the tutorial Step 1 Enable Live mode As mentioned in the first part of this chapter DC Exerciser checks upon starting to see if the CAS 1000 DC is attached and automatically enters Live Data Mode if it is or Demo Mode if it is not Click on the Tools menu to see if there is a check mark next to the Demo Mode menu item and if so you will have to click on this menu item to remove the check mark and switch the program into Live Data Mode as shown below in Figure 77 You can also verify that the program is in Live Data mode by observing the program s status bar in the lower right corner of the main window as shown in Figure 78 The leftmost indicator should contain the text LIVE rciser Untitled Monitor Untitled DC Exe Untitled M Untitled iu Eile Trace Tools Window Help gt lel p in Monitor rap SS aa Debugger e Debugg p Shortcuts Programmer cation ip 01101 Self Test All
227. gh a bus passive un powered powered USB hub It may not provide adequate operating current An externally powered hub is OK USB extender cables are not recommended Hardware Reference 363 Electrical Specifications Target DC Signals Serial Bus Connector RJ45 AMP P N 406549 1 or equivalent Prior to launching the I2C Exerciser application both LEDs will be lit while plugged into a powered host PC Once the application is running the LEDs have the following meaning Green LED CAS 1000 I2C is powered and initialized Amber LED IC bus activity is detected Target Test Cables Flying Leads Target Cable 6 leads with female sleeved crimp terminal each Molex 16 02 0097 or equivalent Slips on target 0 025 inch square posts Test Clips are included Cable 12 inches other options available 4 pin Target Cable 4 pin female socket Molex 08 50 0113 crimp terminals in Molex 22 01 3047 housing 0 1 single row or equivalent Mates with friction lock header Molex 22 23 2041 or equivalent at the target Cable 12 inches other options available Bus Sampling Rate Incoming SCL frequency Master Outgoing SCL frequency Typical Timestamp Accuracy Input Bus Dynamic Range Absolute Input Voltage Limits Programmable High Input Thresholds Programmable Low Input Thresholds 50 MHz 0 Hz to 5 MHz 4 KHz to 5 MHz Programmable at assorted values lt 350 nsecs 0 5V to 5 5V
228. gnores bus collision conditions when it is driving the bus This may be useful for busses with overly slow rise times In such cases the analyzer will not see its own high SDA drive level soon enough before deciding that another master is driving the bus and colliding with it This mode will stop the analyzer from checking this condition and permit continued operation without an error condition Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_DisableCollisionDetection int nEnable Return Value 0 if I2C_InitHardware has not yet been called otherwise 1 Parameters nEnable 1 disable collision detection 0 enable collision detection 200 Third Party Application Interface 2C_GetLastStatus Reports supplemental status of the most recent call to an API function Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_GetLastStatus void Return Value The status string indicating the result of the most recent call to an API function including any error messages Parameters None Third Party Application Interface 201 2C_GetLastTransferStatus Reports supplemental status of the most recent call to I2C_Receive_Data or I2C_Send_Data The event of an address cycle NAK is provided Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_GetLastTransferStatus void Return Value NULL if there is no transfer status information otherwise the string ADDRESSNAK
229. han or equal to performs logical smaller than or equal to performs logical negation on an expression performs logical equality on an expression The bitwise operators are Operator lt lt Operator gt gt Operator Operator amp Operator bit shift left bit shift right bitwise inverse bitwise AND bitwise OR A string is represented as a sequence of characters surrounded by double quotes as in A string has the type array of characters and is initialized with the given character ASCII code bytes Unlike the C programming language individual characters in the string cannot be accessed Comments There are two types of comments block comments and line comments The characters introduce a block comment which terminates with the characters Block comments do not nest Once a block comment has begun all text afterwards is considered a comment until is seen The characters introduce a line comment They may appear anywhere in a line Any characters after the characters to the end of the line are considered to be comments and are ignored The next line following a line comment is back to normal and is no longer considered a comment Scripting Language 289 Legal Identifiers Legal identifiers are a sequence of letters and digits no white space which comprise variables or function names The first character must be a letter The underscore _ counts as a letter Identifiers are case sen
230. he Debugger may abort its Send operation if a message is not acknowledged NAK d by the specified target slave device by default the Debugger continues to send data even when NAK d Additionally all data bytes that are successfully transmitted using the Debugger are listed in the text box on the Receive side of the Debugger window by default Refer to the Debugger Options section of this chapter for more information on user preferences Status Box This indicator is located just below the Send button and displays the resulting status of the last Send operation The following can be indicated Indicates that the Send operation completed successfully with the proper number of data bytes written to the target slave Indicates that an UC bus protocol violation was detected during the Send operation Using the DC Exerciser s Monitor window to capture the Debugger s bus transactions can help to acquire more details about the cause of the error Indicates that the Send operation was not completed When a timeout occurs a message box is displayed to suggest possible reasons for the timeout Interactive Debugger 141 Receive Data The right side of the Debugger window contains controls for generating messages that read data from slave devices on the target IC bus These controls are shown in Figure 135 Receive Addr 18 id g SS AddrType 7 Bit E IR E Passed No Stop 33 FF 00 21 30 OD OA Figure 135 Debugg
231. he Shortcut Bar docks on the left side of the application window Close All Windows Provides a fast way to close all application windows The lower portion of this menu will contain a numbered list of the currently open windows You can quickly activate any window by clicking on its number Monitor Help Menu The Help menu shown in Figure 131 accesses the on line help features Help Topics 2 About I2C Exerciser Figure 131 Monitor Help Menu Help Topics Invokes the DC Exerciser online help system and displays a list of available help topics About I2C Exerciser Provides the program version number and copyright information Bus Traffic Monitor 135 Monitor Tool Bar The Monitor Tool Bar shown in Figure 132 provides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Monitor window Simply click on the tool bar button to perform the desired command Table 5 describes the tool bar functions Positioning the mouse cursor over each tool bar button will also display a pop up tooltip providing a short description of the command S E All o 88 ae Be xe vr EA Figure 132 Monitor Tool Bar Icon Name Function Description G Open Trace Data Opens and loads a previously saved trace buffer in the Monitor Trace listing and Timing display CO Save Trace Data Saves the current trace buffer data of the Monitor listing into a binary TDF file p Run Single Begins
232. he function string_compare provides string comparisons Similar to strstr in C standard string library the function string_substring finds a substring in a string pointing to its location Similar to strcat in C standard string library the function string_concatenate concatenates a second string to a first pointing to the first 286 Scripting Language Reserved Words The following identifiers are reserved for use as keywords statements and variable types and may not be used otherwise They are atoi atof break compare_to_table continue disable_tx_tracking do lse nable_tx_tracking KIE loat_to_string or toa H Hh Hh Hh O inject_glitch integer_to_string integer_to_string_hex8 integer_to_string_hex32 integer_to_string_hex64 itoa itoa_h8 itoa_h32 itoa_h64 load_glitch load_parameters main measure_bus message_box pause print progress pulse_discrete rand random_integer receive_messag reload_glitch return seed_random send_message send_message_PEC sense_discrete_level set_clock_rate set_discrete_level set_discrete_voltage set_high_voltage_threshold set_low_voltage_threshold set_pullup_resistance set_reference_voltage set_rising_edge_drive_mod set_timing_skew set_voltage_source Scripting Language 287 Grand strcat strcmp strstr string_compare string_concatenate string_format string_substring string_to_float string_to_integer then
233. he functions provided by the I2C DLL The following pages give more detailed information about each function Third Party Application Interface 195 General Calling Sequence Certain DLL function calls are required to properly initiate setup operate and shut down the CAS 1000 DC This sequence of calls is summarized as follows I2C_InitHardware required connection to PC USB port loading logic and firmware I2C_LoadSetup optional brings in previously saved setup information I2C_SetFEAddrFormat JI optional default is FE mode establish address byte format Assorted configuration and or Overwrite functions H optional setting or over writing loaded configuration Target interaction sequences H do various mission related target operations I2C_ShutdownHardware required shut down and disconnection from PC USB port The first and last function calls are mandatory The first function call will enable most of the other operations The last function call assures a clean disconnection of the CAS 1000 I2C so that it can be restarted trouble free If this is not done it may be necessary to cycle plug the analyzer in the USB port 196 Third Party Application Interface Function Reference Function Description I2C_ConfigureDiscretes I2C_DisableCollisionDetection I2C_GetLastStatus I2C_GetLastTransferStatus I2C_InitHardware T2C_InjectGlitch I2C_LoadGlitch I2C_LoadSetup I2C_MeasureBus I2C_PulseDiscrete
234. he source slave depending on following parameter b10BitAddress If 1 the above address is a 10 bit value If 0 it is a 7 bit address pReceiveData A pointer to a block of memory where the receive data bytes are to be stored nDataCount The number of storage bytes of the above block of memory bUseStopBits If 1 a stop cycle terminates the message after the last data byte read otherwise no stop cycle is issued the analyzer continues to control the bus with SCL low ready to perform a coming Repeat Start on the next access 210 Third Party Application Interface 2C_ReloadGlitch Reloads previously loaded glitch pattern data to the CAS 1000 This function can be called in place of the I2C_LoadGlitch function if the glitch pattern file intended to be used has already been loaded by an earlier I2C_LoadGlitch function call This function will reuse the glitch pattern data stored in the memory instead of reading it from the physical file Depending on the bArmGlitch parameter the trigger will be armed immediately or armed during an I2C_SendData function call The actual injection of the glitch happens when the armed trigger condition is met Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_ReloadGlitch int bArmGlitch Return Value 1 if successful O if error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters bArmGlitch Integer 1 TR
235. hlighting and syntax checking These types of script command text files consist of e Master Emulation prescribes each step to be taken as a virtual master interacting on the bus with addressed slaves This includes reading writing pausing observing bus activity operating sensing discrete I O signals and or trigger pulses looping and taking conditional branches e Test this is a super set of Master Emulation with additional commands to perform various measurements on the bus It can compare parameters against limit file table values to make in of out of specification decisions The basic outcome of this program is a PASS FAIL indication An example script program is provided below This chapter assumes that the reader has a working knowledge of writing programs in C and is familiar with its syntax There is no attempt to teach C programming but instead its methods will be applied to the subject script commands by means of example Scripting Language 285 The Essential Syntax Elements The various script command files are comprised of variables statements if else while break etc commands built in function calls read write the bus etc operators lt gt etc calls to user defined functions and comments It is organized into callable functions with the top entry level being the mandatory main function The built in functions constitute standard commands to the CAS 1000 I2C while user defined fu
236. hortcuts ina Monitor Untitled Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz I O 1 VO 2 Data Byte Hex Time us 01101 All Data Target 18 7 Bit Write NAK 100 3E 100 Address Analyzer 2A 7 Bit Write NAK 100 5 817 671 Data Target 2A 7 Bit Write NAK 100 33 5 817 771 Address Analyzer 18 7 Bit Write NAK 100 6 319 847 Data Target 18 7 Bit Write NAK 100 FF 6 319 952 Data Target 18 7 Bit Write NAK 100 00 6 320 043 Address Analyzer C4 7 Bit Write NAK 100 6 828 209 Data Target C4 7 Bit Write NAK 100 21 6 828 309 Data Target C4 7 Bit Write NAK 100 30 6 828 404 Data Target CA Write NAK 100 6 828 499 Monitor A mom dem bk ob Kaz Debugger z 1001004 Programmer 1 7 Bit 1 1 DD e bata target ten Te Tue ng Te lees zer Scale 50 us div Auto Fit gt Interval A to B Ons eci dea Data Al ELE DE El LEE O HE HO 0 B0 LL O TIN Oo 0 ONO T0 A 0E weli LIVE AddFomat FE Trace Dn Bus Ide SCL High SDA High L 1 High 170 2 High Figure 85 Capture of Debugger Script 82 Getting Started Step 4 Manipulate Discrete LC Signals Suppose that you want to use the I O 1 and I O 2 general purpose lines to stimulate a target device To drive these signals you must first set the discrete I O modes to output Open the Configuration Manager by clicking on its entry in the DC Exerciser s Tools menu and then click on the Settings tab Near the bottom of th
237. ication function windows This is identical to the Monitor Tools Menu selections in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulated Master Window Menu The Window menu manages the various windows of 12C Exerciser and is identical to the Monitor Window Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulated Master Help Menu The Help menu accesses the on line help features and is identical to the Monitor Help Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter 250 UC Device Emulator Emulated Master Tool Bar The Emulated Master Tool Bar provides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Emulated Master window Simply click the tool bar button to perform the specific command The tool bar buttons are shown in Figure 184 and described in Table 19 T Ky gt Il RW M w Figure 184 Emulated Master Tool Bar Mp nca A Ep AAAA Ai VE Icon Name Function Description GG Open Script Loads the content from another file into the Script Source text area All breakpoints and bookmarks are cleared If the current script has been modified a prompt will be displayed to save it The newly opened file will be automatically associated with the current Emulated Master device D Save Script Saves the currently open script to a SCR text file Note that this does not save any set breakpoints or bookmarks H Step Executes the script one line at a time starting with the next unexecuted line Te R
238. ices Monitors Network adapters Y Ports COM amp LPT BR Processors Ke SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers System devices K Universal Serial Bus controllers CS Corelis CAS 1000 12C 041 Figure 18 Windows Device Manager Windows XP 11 Plug the RJ45 connector end of the target cable into the CAS 1000 I2C socket labeled Serial Bus and the other end of the cable can be connected to the target CC bus signals The target cables and pinouts are detailed in the Connecting to a Target chapter Congratulations You have now successfully installed the CAS 1000 I2C and drivers on your computer and it is ready to be used We recommend that you preserve the original packing material for future shipment or storage of the CAS 1000 I2C 22 Installation Installation 23 Chapter 3 Getting Started I2C Exerciser operation overview and tutorial Overview This chapter will quickly introduce you to the basic usage of the Corelis DC Exerciser tool for viewing bus traffic via the CAS 1000 I2C Although it is possible to explore the capabilities of this system on your own working through this chapter is intended to give an immediate feel and appreciation for its ease of use and core functionality After you have become familiar with the program you can go back and explore the rich variety of additional options tools and methods available by browsing through the menu system reading the
239. igure 214 Glitch Pattern Editor File Menu New Glitch Pattern File Resets the pattern and settings in the Glitch Pattern Editor window to default values If the current file is modified and not saved users will be prompted for saving it before resetting Open Glitch Pattern File Opens a previously saved glitch pattern file If the current file is modified and not saved users will be prompted for saving it Save Glitch Pattern File Saves the glitch pattern data to the file currently opened If the file is Untitled users will be asked to specify a name Save Glitch Pattern File As Same as Save Glitch Pattern File above except that users are always prompted for a new filename before saving 358 Glitch Pattern Injection Adding Glitch Patterns to Master and Slave Emulation Once you have created a glitch pattern file you can now use the file to insert glitches during Master or Slave emulation sessions The ability to add glitch injection to the Master or Slave Emulation lets you create a portable test script that can be easily rerun over and over again for production or validation tests During Master Emulation when the master is sending data to a slave you will have the ability to arm the glitch pattern right before any address or data transactions When receiving data however you will be able to arm the injection only before the start of whole message During Slave Emulation when a master is reading from the
240. igure 83 Capture of Debugger SOnd ceceecceeeeeecceeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeneeeeneneaeeeeeeaes 80 Figure 84 Tutorial Script Loaded Into Debugger eee ec eeeneeeceenneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 81 Figure 85 Capture of Debugger Gent 82 Figure 86 Set Discrete UO MOdeS cccccecceeeeneeeesecectteneaececeeeceeecencanaeeedaueeesedeesdeenseceeaeeedeeseeddensseeeenatee 83 Figure 87 Debugger Discrete I O Get 84 Figure 88 Monitor Debugger Discrete I O Mantoulaton 84 Figure 89 Debugger CloSe cccceccecceecsseceeeeeneceneeseesheeeanedenecaueeeseeaneceeseeauecesecaaeseseedneceseeseesteeenneneeneeaees 85 Figure 90 SMBus Raw Data 86 Figure 91 SMBus Pane Before Associating Decoder File 87 Figure 92 SMBus Decoder File Dialog with TC74 Information 0 cccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 88 Figure 93 Switch to SMBus MOda rran ear K AAA EEA GAE EET O EAEE EA AA 89 Figure 94 SMBus Decoded Data ec eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eene nese eeneeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeneaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeseees 89 Figure 95 Decoded SMBus Message Tooltime 90 Figure 96 SMBus Data Window ssc r EE E ORE E N EE ENE a 90 Figure 97 RJ45 Connector Pin Numbering AA 93 Figure 98 Configuration Manager aeii rE EAE EEREN E ENIRE EAA E AEE ei 95 Figure 99 Analyzer Supplied Voltage Prompt ecceccceeeeeeeeeeneeeseenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeese
241. ine button the characteristics of the currently selected line in the trace buffer are used to populate the Find dialog The user can then tweak any needed changes to the search criteria fields This facilitates searching for the same or similar lines throughout the trace buffer with a minimal amount of manual data entry Each field s pull down will supply common selections previously entered values or defined symbols as appropriate Otherwise type in the desired values Getting Started 57 Go to the start of the trace list using the Go to Start tool bar button as previously shown Then in the Find window enter the value 2E into the Data Byte Value field as shown in Figure 57 58 Transfer re any Na na av me sere mn WO ue ei ms Data Byte tex E Jl partion AY hen W s ge Load From Selected Monitor Trace Line Figure 57 Find a Data Value of 2E Getting Started Click on the Find Next button and the trace listing will go to the only line containing this data value which is on line 13 as shown in Figure 58 LS DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled telale AN File Trace Tools Window Help x woh kilo 84 xE YR co a Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType Rw NAK Error KHZ Data Byte Hex Time us vO 1 Ja 1
242. ing Sequence ccseccsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeneeeeeeaeeesaaesesneeenseeeasaaesasneeenseeeseaesasnaesaseaeeeneenseeeneas 196 Function Reference ric ainissec cesses cats sece tices ceed lsctsnscatescandeus deht EEN ege nananana 197 Chapter 10 TC Device Emulator isisiiiscicssicatsscidcacscasdoasssevisassiardcaassatieaiacatdaartesasoieient 235 Emulation Manager Wind ow ccsssccccesseeceeeeneeeeeeeneeseeeeneeseeesneeseeesneesaeeesneeseeeseeesesesneeseeesneeseseeeneesnes 237 Emulated Master Window cccccseecceceseeeseeesneeseeeeneeseeeeneeseeesneeesesenneeseeeeneeseeesneeseeesneeseeesneneseseneseeeenes 243 Emulated Slave Window ee EENS 253 Emulated Slave Clock Stretching ccscccssceesseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseneneeeseeeescaesasuaeeneeeesecaesaaeeeenseaesenenenees 258 Chapter 11 Script Driven BUS Testel cccccccsessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseeeeeeees 261 Test Window Reference ccceeececesseeeeeessneeeenseeeeeenseeeeseseeeeesesueeeeseseeneeseseeeeeesaseeeeeseseeneeseseeeenseeneees 262 Chapter 12 Parameters SCODGC ccccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 275 Parameter Measurements cccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeenneeseeeseneeseeesneeseeenueeseeesneesesesneeseseseeseseeseeeenes 276 Waveform Display eege ent cece 281 Parameters Scope Window Reference cccseccsseccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesneeeesaesescaesaseaeenseeeseeesesnaesenseaeees 283 Chapter 13 Sc
243. ing information Settings Establishes the various electrical and bus settings of the analyzer Files Lists the set of support files associated with the currently loaded project Target Slaves Establishes the symbolic names for slave devices on the target CC bus and allows auto detection verification of the presence of the devices Timing Skew Establishes the settings for causing a phase shift of SDA SCL timings during master emulation or debugger use in order to stress the target bus Table 14 Configuration Manager Panes Triggers Pane This dialog shown in Figure 150 establishes transaction criteria that define the trigger event which can cause the monitor capturing process to be stopped automatically once a certain transaction occurs The transaction satisfying this event is marked as Trigger in the trace listing When DC Exerciser is collecting bus data in Run Single mode and no trigger event is defined the capturing process will stop automatically once the buffer becomes full No trigger transaction marker will appear in the trace listing If a trigger event is defined however the monitor will continue to capture new transactions even after the buffer becomes full until the trigger event occurs Old transactions will be thrown out in order to accommodate the new ones once the buffer is full If the trigger event occurs the capturing stops automatically when enough post trigger transactions have been collected to fill
244. inition program external definition function definition data definition function definition type specifier function declarator function body function declarator declarator parameter list parameter list type specifier identifier type specifier identifier parameter list Scripting Language 341 function body type decl list function statement function statement declaration list statement list data definition type specifier init declarator list 342 Scripting Language Built In Script Editor The Editor window provides an integrated tool for creating or updating script text files with syntax cognizance assistance The editor can support all three script types including Master Slave and Test Features of the Editor window include e Keyword color coding e Syntax checking e Bookmarking e Full featured find replace with support for regular expressions e Standard editing tools such as undo redo cut copy paste print and save With the Editor tool the user can develop proper code even when the target device is not present Keyword color coding shows the user in real time whether certain words and function calls are recognized Syntax checking will not only check for proper syntax but also check whether functions referenced exist The bookmark feature allows the user to mark relevant lines of the code for easy access Lines containing syntax errors are marked for easy r
245. ion Dialog Similar to Ed 114 DYMDOIS PANG tege gees eege Sege EE ee sentence Ee ee sees ea Senate 115 SYMbOI D efinttion Delage eE cd weiss Seege REENEN ENEE EES AER 116 SMBUS PAM Cisse saris tae ed E eeh Dese T ee Eed Bee Eed 117 SMBus Decoder File Dialog secera u aana E hee SEENEN Ed ERD ACEN 118 Monitor Colors EE 119 Monitor Options Pane ee 121 Foma Pane aani E E E T A ee 122 I2C Exerciser Monitor Window Layout 123 Monitor File Men 2c ccccccicceceeessee cei easce cen enue deci eusce ce enue dau evesecechebec cl N E dE 124 Monitor Trace Men anieri ai N esse doch eseci cel esse N E 125 Trace Execute Gubmen secari ri aN EA A AN A E ASEN 126 Run Status Dialog cresce i E EE cet vase A A EE 127 Trace Go To Submenu wu ce cece dee iiaia n ar A N A E S N 128 UCNE eu TEE 129 Monitor Find Dialog Reg lar ecceeeceeeeeee een ee ee eene nese taeeeeetneeeeetaeeeee teaser taeeeeeseneeeeess 130 Monitor Find Dialog Compact 130 Trace Layout Dialog ccc cence flee ieee r ria Avioli ein enedd A een A A 132 TOONS Meng edd edd NEE 133 Monitor Window Menu iccccciicccestialecisandaceteadscceussadaec EEEE TA EEEE NEER 135 Monitor Help Men s enesenn aa aa cheba EEN dee 135 Monitor Tool Bat osei eretier en EETA EEA EEE teewetda eesti te 136 Debugger nee ET 139 Debugger Send Cont ols saren eerren EEr RE naaa ERA EAE EE ERRERA 140 Debugger Receive Controls arerin srei irae eNA ARETAN IEA TERNARA E AEAEE EETA ENNEA 142
246. ion can be saved to a file e Program load the EEPROM with the contents of the referenced data file e Verify compare the EEPROM with the referenced file and indicate a pass fail outcome e Erase clear the content of the EEPROM During any of the above operations if the Monitor is running the related traffic transactions with the device can be viewed 156 Bus Traffic Monitor Programmer Operations The Programmer window shown in Figure 140 can be accessed from the Tools Programmer entry in the menu bar or from the Programmer icon in the shortcut bar It allows the user to program most common C EEPROM devices using a common data file format such as a Motorola S Record file Intel Hex file or a text file containing a list of hex values Table 10 describes the elements of the Programmer window 24xx00 16 Byte I2C EEPROM el 12C Device Address Address Type 7Bit Data File Ooo E Offset Add ly o Figure 140 Programmer Window Bus Traffic Monitor 157 Component Description Manufacturer combo box Specifies the manufacturer of the C EEPROM device to be programmed Most devices can be programmed as a Generic manufacturer device if they are compatible with the ATMEL 24xxXXX series of UC EEPROM devices Type combo box Specifies the type of the EEPROM device to program Various selections are available for supported devices from each of the manufactures in th
247. ipts can be saved to or loaded from DCF text files using the Debugger s File Menu or Tool Bar described later in this chapter for convenient reusability While not as comprehensive as the Master Emulation and Test window tools this scripting offers significant message transfer automation facility that can be combined with the capture capability of the Monitor window for immediate analysis of the target CC bus The left side of the Debugger Script text area contains a gutter that is used to mark errors when a syntax error occurs and can optionally display line numbers Syntax highlighting is also provided to help identify debugger script keywords Debugger Script Command Keywords The Debugger script keywords are listed in Table 6 on the next page Debugger commands are not case sensitive and are always immediately followed by their parameters While multiple data bytes can be listed together on a single line each command along with its associated parameters must be placed on its own separate line although a trailing comment is allowed on the same line An example debugger script follows the table of keywords Command keywords will be highlighted blue when entered in the Debugger script text area In addition to these keywords and the hex values the user may also enter symbols that are defined in the Symbols tab in the Configuration Manager These symbols can be used anywhere a hex value is expected However an address symbols can only be
248. irely Additionally the user can execute the script line by line RE Test C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples MyTestPlan scr Co le xs DC Interface Test Runs 1 KR Current Run 1 Stop On Error Status FAILED f 10 main 11 12 device info T3 nAddr s i 14 b1i0Bit FALSE 15 16 ve test output variables PAGE 00 00 18 strOutBytes 02 FE 04 FC 00 H 20 display output bytes 21 print strOutBytes 22 print n 24 combine page number amp output bytes for sending 25 strTemp string_concatenate PAGE strOutBytes v d iw L 02 FE 04 FC 00 a 00 00 00 01 00 Mismatch 4 Progressa Figure 192 Test Window Script Driven Bus Tester 263 Runs The number in the dropdown menu indicates how many times to run the test Forever indicates that the test will run indefinitely until stopped by the user Current Run Display the current iteration of the test When the test is first loaded the current run is O If the script is not currently running it displays the last iteration executed before execution terminated Stop On Error If checked the program will halt execution of the Test script when it raises an error If not the program will continue with the script Test Status Indicates the current execution status of the test script by displaying one of the following Indicates that the test script is loaded and ready
249. is about 0 5 ms and the typical delay between the actual trigger event on the bus and the trigger out pulse is approximately 1 6 ms This delay may vary from 1 5 ms to 150 ms depending on the data traffic load Configuration Manager Ex V Enable Trigger Trigger Buffer Position Trigger Out weber a Early Middle Late Event Definitions Transfer Figure 150 Triggers Pane Filters Pane A filter defines a class of transactions by specifying a set of particular transaction features Each filter can be individually activated or not via the checkbox beside the filters name The combined selection of active filters can be set to either determine which transaction classes are included or which are excluded from the trace listing Use of filters allows you to view only the bus activity of interest with items Configuration and Preferences 169 considered clutter removed If a transaction is removed from the monitor trace listing it is also effectively removed from the timing display graph where it will appear as a non busy bus The Filters pane dialog is shown in Figure 151 Configuration Manager riggers E en Fee Indude in Monitor Trace Exdude from Monitor Trace No Filters Filter Type Addr AddrType RW Data Mask Byte Width NAK Er Figure 151 Filters Pane Filters can either define transactions that will be include
250. is already set this command enables or disables the breakpoint Enable all Breakpoints Sets the status of all breakpoints to Enabled Disable all Breakpoints Sets the status of all breakpoints to Disabled Clear all Breakpoints Removes all breakpoints from the script Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at a line or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script 246 UC Device Emulator Emulated Master Menu Bar When the Emulated Master window is active the Menu Bar contains entries relevant to the Emulated Master functions including File Edit Execute Breakpoint Tools Window and Help A description of each menu follows Emulated Master File Menu In addition to facilitating the loading and saving of projects the Emulated Master File menu shown in Figure 180 also enables the user to load and save script files Opening a new master script file will automatically associate it with the curr
251. it Any 9A 1 Byte DANGER Data 7 Bit Any OD 1 Byte BUSY Data 7 Bit Any 0E 1 Byte LOWTEMP Data 7 Bit Am 1A 1 Byte MODE Data 7 Bit Any 1B 1 Byte Figure 112 Symbols Pane Bus Traffic Monitor 115 Using the Add button beneath the list box a new symbol can be defined and appended to the list The Edit button allows alteration of an existing selected symbol definition The Remove and Remove All buttons enable the deletion of a selected symbol definition or the entire list of symbol definitions The Symbol Definition dialog that is displayed when using the Add or Edit buttons is shown in Figure 113 Symbol Definition l Symbol Type Address e Value v r Byte Addr Y Position VC AddrType 7 Bit Width e v RAW Any Fei Figure 113 Symbol Definition Dialog For Data Bytes the value located at a specific byte number position in a message can define a certain symbol which might relate to a device specific structure For example the n th byte of a slave device might be a register the contents of which may be appropriately shown using some symbolic text instead of the numeric value Symbols can also operate in the reverse direction That is a symbolic text string can be entered in place of a numeric value when using the Find dialog or specifying a slave device address in the Debugger or debugger command script file Thus for example a slave device can be referenced by
252. it Write 403 1 1 E7 6 224 59 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 1 1 CHANSEL 6 250 60 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 1 1 CHANSEL 6 303 61 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 CHANSEL 6 357 62 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 6 546 63 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1A 6 573 64 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 61 6 599 65 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 32 6 624 66 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 OF 6 650 67 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 6 833 68 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 48 6 989 69 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 LOWTEMP 7 087 S Scale SO us div PJAuto Fit Line e eel Interval AtoB 9 422762ms Ce D EIN as a ee aT FS CTT UE EG HESS m Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 01 1 0 2 Figure 27 Monitor Window Trace List Positioned on Trigger Line Getting Started 31 To access the Configuration Manager Trigger setup screen right click in the trace list area and select the Trigger entry from the pop up menu as shown in Figure 28 The Configuration Manager Trigger setup screen will appear as shown in Figure 29 4 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled AA Eile Trace Tools Window Help aoe gt mil e Line Marker 30 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 01101 31 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 33 Data Analyzer ft Open Trace Data File Ctr O 34 Data Analyzer m Save Trace Data File Ctrl S 35 Addre
253. ite 401 1 1 SC 53 k Monitor 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 34 78 SR 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 FAULT 104 p 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 287 S Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 51 443 Debugger 8 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 WARNING 541 9 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1 252 F 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3E 1 280 pE 11 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 401 1 1 1 464 Programmer 12 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 1 522 13 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 2E 1 550 14 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 FA 1 575 15 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 403 1 1 CHANSEL 1 601 Frae Free TS 0 SE es F 17 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1 843 18 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 1A 1 884 19 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 1 1 70 1 909 20 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 4 1 4F 1 935 21 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 45 1 960 22 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 72 1 986 23 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 A 49 2 011 24 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 0 1 AE 2 037 25 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 D 41 AE 2 062 Ke Scale SOus div Auto Fit Line se Le IntervalAtoB 9 422762 ms Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 70 1 1702 Figure 37 Monitor Window Trace List Showing New DAC Symbolic Address Entries 40 Getting Started Right clicking on the column headings of either the Addr or Data Byte column allows the user to toggle
254. ith the project These data files include the monitor trace data file tdf the debugger command file dcf the programmer configuration file pcf and the test script file scr Note that the project file only stores the names and paths of these data files not their actual contents Once you have saved a project you can load it again later in three different ways You may start the I2C Exerciser and then select the Open Project menu item from the File menu to bring up a dialog that allows you to browse for and select the desired project file Secondly you may select the project name from among the MRU Most Recently Used list in the File menu see Figure 168 This list includes up to the last four projects that have been opened Finally you can also launch the I2C Exerciser and load a project file in a single step by double clicking on the associated project file from the Windows Explorer TH New Project a Open Project Ey Save Project Save Project As Open Trace Data Ctri o 1 Bus Test 001 i2c 2 John_default i2c 3 Targe A C 4 SMBus Drot GC Exit Figure 168 File Menu MRU Project List 190 Configuration and Preferences Calibration The CAS 1000 I2C includes a calibration feature to fine tune its electrical outputs since the pull up voltage and resistance that it is able to provide to a target bus can vary from unit to unit or even across different host USB busses Each installation of the DC Exerciser mai
255. ither an address transaction a data transaction or when the bus has transitioned to an idle state The vertical orange dotted line in the center of the timing display will identify the first timing edge that corresponds to either the currently highlighted line in the trace list or to the entry at the top of the trace list This setting can be configured on the Monitor Options tab of the Tools Preferences menu entry The default setting is to have the timing display track the currently highlighted trace line Click on different trace list transactions and observe how the timing display updates to show the newly selected transactions You can navigate in the timing display area itself by jumping forward or backward between lines via the provided arrow buttons or enter the desired trace line number in the edit field and press return The Monitor trace list will track the timing display according to the currently active display locking preference You can also use the horizontal scroll bar underneath the timing display to position the display without affecting the position of the trace listing 50 Getting Started Notice the colored flags that are displayed just above the top Field row of the timing display These flags indicate the locations of the Trigger marker and the Cursor markers A cursor is a special marker that can be positioned in the timing display at various points of interest to allow time measurements between any two points There are tw
256. itor 127 Trace Go To Submenu The Trace Go To submenu shown in Figure 124 provides navigation control for the Monitor window trace buffer El Trigger f Tagged Row OI Start GE End 7 Cursor A 2 Cursor B Figure 124 Trace Go To Submenu Trigger Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the Trigger into view at the top of the screen Tagged Row Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the next tagged line into view at the top of the screen Start Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the first trace buffer line into view at the top of the screen End Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the last trace buffer line into view at the bottom of the screen Cursor A Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the Cursor A line into view at the top of the screen Cursor B Causes the quick positioning of visible trace lines to bring the Cursor B line into view at the top of the screen 128 Bus Traffic Monitor Trace View Submenu The Trace View submenu shown in Figure 125 provides data view mode control for the Monitor window Data Byte column Normal Mode Compact Mode SMBus Mode Figure 125 Trace View Submenu Normal Mode Causes the Data Byte column display to switch to the default Normal mode When using Normal mode the Data Byte column simply indicates
257. kHz 397 kHz 446 kHz 500 kHz 556 kHz 595 kHz 658 kHz 694 kHz 758 kHz 806 kHz 862 kHz 893 kHz 962 kHz 1 000 MHz 1 471 MHz 1 923 MHz 2 500 MHz 3 125 MHz 4 167 MHz 5 000 MHz Third Party Application Interface 221 2C_SetDiscrete Drives the level of one of the discrete I O signals to the state passed in if configured as output If discrete 1 is selected and it is configured as tied to the output trigger SMB that path will be operated instead of the line to the target Note if the output is configured as open collector it is possible to normally read back a value different than driven out Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SetDiscrete int nDiscreteNumber int nLevel int nSensedLevel Return Value 0 if I2c_InitHardware was never called 1 if illegal discrete number 2 if illegal discrete level 3 if selected discrete not configured as an output 1 if successful Parameters nDiscreteNumber The index selecting the discrete to drive either 1 or 2 nLevel The binary drive level for the discrete 0 or 1 nSensedLevel If not NULL pointer to sensed value of the output after setting it 222 Third Party Application Interface 2C_SetDiscreteVo tage Overwrite configuration TTL voltage level for the high state of the discrete I O signals Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_SetDiscreteVoltage char szVoltage Return Value NULL if
258. l 85 Data Eror Text O M Color Scheme 86 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write Debugger 87 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Background 9 Alternate color per message X 88 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write F 89 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Cursor A euas 90 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Text Text 1 OO D Programmer 91 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 92 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read Background Background 1 93 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 94 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read Ee 95 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Text v Text 2 u 96 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 97 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Background GE z 98 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Timing View LEWC C 7 SDA Signal SE Beginning Marker EH X 7 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write sci signal iv Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write X Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 701 70 2 Figure 67 Monitor Window with Updated Cursor A Colors Getting Started 65 66 The Color Scheme controls how trace line groupings are displayed The options are no color alternating color per line or alternating color per message address transaction and all conveyed data to from that address The default setting is Alternate color per message but the user may prefer a different setting Click on the Color Scheme control and select the Alternate color per row entry as shown in Figure 68 E Preferences Moni
259. l EEPROM Programmer This chapter describes the features of the Programmer which is used to read and write the content of EEPROM memory devices on the target C bus Introduction xiii Chapter 8 Configuration and Preferences This chapter describes all of the various project options and settings that can be found in the Configuration Manager and Preferences dialogs Chapter 9 Third Party Application Interface This chapter provides a reference on all of the function calls available for use in third party software applications that control the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer through the provided dynamic link library DLL Chapter 10 TC Device Emulator This chapter describes the features of the Emulator which is used to emulate master and slave devices on the target I C bus Chapter 11 Script Driven Bus Tester This chapter describes the features of the Test tool which is used to execute test scripts that perform a sequence of measurements and tests of the target C bus Chapter 12 Parameters Scope This chapter describes the features of the Parameters Scope which is used to measure the electrical and timing characteristics of the target TC bus Chapter 13 Scripting Language This chapter provides a reference on the usage and syntax elements of the DC Exerciser s scripting language which is used in automated bus testing and device emulation Chapter 14 Glitch Pattern Injection This chapter describes the features of the Glitch Pa
260. laces a copy on the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl X gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl C gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl V gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Step Executes the script one line at a time starting with the next unexecuted line Run To Cursor Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line and stops just before executing the line at the cursor position If a breakpoint is encountered before the cursor execution will pause at the breakpoint Run Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line Script execution will continue to the end of the script unless a breakpoint is encountered or the script is paused or aborted by the user Before script execution begins the user will be prompted to save the file if the script has been modified Break Pauses script execution 266 Script Driven Bus Tester Stop Completely aborts script execution Toggle Breakpoint Adds a breakpoint at a line or removes a breakpoint if one is already set If the line is blank or contains only comments the breakpoint will be applied to the next line of code The lt F9 gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Enable Disable Breakpoint If a breakpoint is already set this command enables or
261. lagged for the messages not meeting the specified minimum value Debugger Options This pane enables altering of preferences for the Debugger window The first option sets whether or not data that is sent by the analyzer is tracked by the Monitor and times out if matching data bytes do not appear on the bus within 2 seconds The second option sets whether or not data that is sent by the analyzer is echoed in the Receive side text box along with all other incoming traffic during the send operation The third option sets whether or not the debugger aborts sending of the message data bytes if the address is not acknowledged The fourth option sets whether the Send command script text area should display line numbers in the gutter Preferences poceceseccecesecoccescccesececsosescesecesoceegi Monitor Colors l Monitor Options Debugger Options Options V Track Transactions V Echo Sent Data Abort Message if Address is NAK d Show Send Command Line Number Figure 163 Debugger Options Pane 186 Configuration and Preferences Programmer Options This pane enables setting of whether or not the Programmer performs a verification of written data after programming a device Preferences K Options V Verify After Programming Figure 164 Programmer Options Pane Configuration and Preferences 187 Formats This pane enables selection of how a 7 binary bit address representation is formatted for hexadecimal
262. lave or data read SDA driven by a slave towards a master cycles Right clicking anywhere in the Monitor window trace list will display the pop up menu shown in Figure 26 This menu provides easy access to navigation command and configuration functions All of these commands can also be accessed via either tool bar buttons or the regular menu system A3 Eile Trace Tools Window Help SH mle a8 GECKEGE EA zx Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RAW NAK Error 34 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 35 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read edd 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Monitor 37 Read 38 GG Open Trace Data File Ctr O EAA Lr Z 39 RH Save Trace Data Fie Clg Write E a Debugger 41 View E Tagged Row 5 gt Clear Trace Data Start Se Clear All T re 44 3 Clear All Tags End Programmer 45 Trigger Set Tag Cursor A 46 Clear Tag Cursor B 47 Filters 48 a i Read 49 ER ager Read 50 Symbols Read 51 h Find Read 52 Trace Layout Read 53 Read 7 54 gegen Timing Write 55 Settings F8 Write 56 Preferences Write 57 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write Figure 26 Monitor Window Right Click Pop up Menu 30 Getting Started While scrolling around the trace list data you will notice that some lines are highlighted with special background colors and the Marker column may contain various indications such as Trigger Cursor A Cursor B
263. lected Monitor Trace Line Defaults Figure 109 Trigger Pane 112 Bus Traffic Monitor Filters A filter defines a class of transactions by specifying a set of particular transaction features Each filter can be individually activated or not via the checkbox beside the filters name The combined selection of active filters can be set to either determine which transaction classes are included or which are excluded from the trace listing Use of filters allows you to view only the bus activity of interest with items considered clutter removed If a transaction is removed from the monitor trace listing it is also effectively removed from the timing display graph where it will appear as a non busy bus The Filters pane dialog is shown in Figure 110 Configuration Manager Triggers Filters Symbols smBus Settings Files Indude in Monitor Trace Exclude from Monitor Trace 9 No Filters Filter Type Addr AddrType RW Data Mask Byte Width NAK Er Remove All Figure 110 Filters Pane Bus Traffic Monitor 113 Filters can either define transactions that will be included in the trace listing or excluded from the trace listing The radio buttons at the top of the dialog determine this selection or turn off filtering completely The Include and Exclude selections each have their own separate set of filters which are displayed in the dialog s list box A filter from the list can
264. les the mechanism letting the pull ups or the target capacitance determine rise times High Speed Mode This setting controls the use of the UC high speed mode Hs mode protocol note that the High Speed Mode emulation is not currently supported by the CAS 1000 I2C and so these selections are disabled Input Output Signals High Level Specifies the TTL high voltage level of the I O signals When sensing inputs the CAS 1000 I2C will also use this setting to automatically determine commensurate signal threshold values UO 1 Specifies the discrete signal I O 1 to be an input an output TTL driver or an output open drain driver Drive SMB ATI If I O 1 discrete signal is set as an output selecting this option will map the state of the UO 1 line to the AT1 SMB connector on the CAS 1000 I2C for signaling external instruments Not applicable when I O 1 is an input UO 2 Specifies the discrete signal I O 2 to be an input an output TTL driver or an output open drain driver Source If I O 2 discrete signal is set as an input this setting specifies the source of the signal Selecting Target routes it through the Serial Bus RJ 45 connector on the CAS 1000 I2C Selecting SMB AT2 routes it from the AT2 SMB connector on the CAS 1000 I2C enabling triggers in from external instruments Monitor Buffer Depth This value indicates the number of transactions that occur before the monitor trace is considered to be full The transaction d
265. ll be adjusted according to the provided settings The new setting will remain in effect even after the script is completed Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set timing skew nMode nTime Example Call set the setup time to be 100 ns set_timing skew 1 100 set the hold time to be 1 2 us eet timing skew 2 1200 turn off the timing skew i e set to normal mode set_timing skew 0 0 Input Parameters nMode An integer value representing the new mode Must be 0 normal 1 setup_time or 2 hold_time nTime An integer value representing the new amount for setup or hold time The value is in nanoseconds and will be rounded to the nearest 20 ns The valid range is up to one eighth of the current SCL period on the positive side and a little less 80 ns on the negative side For example for a 100 KHz SCL rate the valid range is from 1160 ns to 1240 ns Return Value A string representing the actual rounded setup hold time value that will be used by the analyzer If unsuccessful an empty string is returned 330 Scripting Language set voltage souroell Description Sets the bus reference voltage source as either the target or the Analyzer Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set voltage source nSource Example Call set_voltage source 1 set the voltage source to be the Analyzer Input Parameters nSource Integer indicating the voltage source 0 for the targe
266. ll be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script A Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current script is searched for the specified text and if found that text is brought into view and highlighted A Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of interest is entered along with the replacement text The current script is searched and any occurrences of the search text are substituted with the replacement text Syntax Check Checks the syntax of the current script without executing it The result of the syntax check is displayed in a popup message box If a syntax error is found any line associated with the error will also be marked in the left hand gutter Note that some errors cannot be detected before execution such as function calls with an invalid number of arguments or unexpected argument types 3 Print Prints the current script file Help Provides quick access to the online help topics Script Driven Bus Tester Table 22 Test Tool Bar Functions 273 Chapter 12 Parameters Scope Parameters Scope window overview and
267. ll be timed out Also if the target slave is not responding to the address sent the returning string of the send_message and receive_message functions will indicate that the address is NAK d Since the send_message and receive_message functions wait until the result of the transaction when the tracking is on there will be a gap gt 1ms between back to back transactions Also note that when this feature is disabled the receive_message function will not be able to return the bytes read from the target You have to refer to the Monitor s trace list for the data in this case Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype enable tx tracking Example Call disable transaction tracking disable _tx_tracking generate multiple transactions with no gaps send_message 0x18 FALSE 00 01 TRUE receive_message 0x18 FALSE 4 TRUE send_message 0x18 FALSE 00 02 TRUE receive_message 0x18 FALSE 4 TRUE re enable transaction tracking enable_tx_tracking j Input Parameters None Return Value None 298 Scripting Language exit Description Terminates execution of the script and passes an exit code back to the application An exit code of zero indicates a pass condition and a non zero exit code indicates a fail condition Used In Test Prototype exit nExitCode 0 Us
268. ll enjoy the flexibility offered by regular expression support Standard editing tools such as undo redo cut copy paste print and save are included in the editor Scripting Language 343 Editor Window Operations The Editor Window shown in Figure 203 facilitates manipulating of script code and syntax checking A Syntax Check button is available at all times in the Tool Bar allowing the script to be scanned through to locate any syntax errors Since the script files being edited are completely in text format they can be edited outside of this application however the user will not enjoy the benefit of the syntax assistance and color coding when using an external text editor Editor C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples MyTestPlan scr Lo LS ex Oey Aerer 0 maint vi device info 13 nAddr Dei 14 bi0Bit FALSE 16 test output variables 17 PAGE 00 00 18 strOutBytes 02 FE 04 FC 00 20 display output bytes 21 print strOutBytes print n m vi combine page number amp output bytes for sending strTemp string_concatenate PAGE strOutBytes 2 send msg 2 S send_message nAddr b10Bit strTemp TRUE 30 update progress bar 33 progress 33 break 34 needed because EEPROM expects more data to be sent 5 nCount 0 6 do H 3 send 0x00 up to 5 time until ACK 9 strResult send_message nAddr b1l0Bit 00 TRUE A0 if 4 nCount 5 41 break
269. lp menu accesses the on line help features and is identical to the Monitor Help Menu in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Programmer Tool Bar The Programmer Tool Bar shown in Figure 148 provides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Programmer window Simply click the tool bar button to perform the desired command Table 13 describes the tool bar functions Positioning the mouse cursor over each tool bar button will also display a pop up tooltip providing a short description of the command Dae Gi le a Figure 148 Programmer Tool Bar Icon Name Function Description D New Configuration Initializes the Programmer configuration to its defaults If the active File Programmer configuration contains unsaved settings you will be prompted to save the configuration Open Configuration Loads a previously saved configuration from file If the active File Programmer configuration contains unsaved settings you will be prompted to save the configuration D Save Configuration Saves the Programmer configuration to a PCF text file If you are not File already working with an open configuration file you will be prompted for a filename gH Dump Data to a File Stores data read from a device to a file EXO HES BIN TXT Help Provides quick access to the online help topics Table 13 Programmer Tool Bar Functions 164 Bus Traffic Monitor Bus Traffic Monitor 165
270. lude it regardless of the No Stop checkbox setting Any immediately following bytes start a new message Debugger Script Keywords 145 146 Interactive Debugger Example Debugger Script Command Text File Below is an example debugger script that might be used to load an EEPROM with some values in part of its first page of memory and wiggle one of the discrete I O signals while processing ADDRESS MODE FE fill 24AA16 eeprom page 0 address AO page 0 00 address ptr data bytes 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF wait for write to complete spec 5 msec min PAUSE 30 ms address AO new wrt 10 address ptr data bytes YO AD 22 13 24 5 16 27 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F PAUSE 30 ms SETDISCRETE 1 0 lower I O 1 address AO new wrt 20 address ptr data bytes 20 2 22 235 24 25 260 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F PAUSE 30 ms address AO new wrt 30 address ptr data bytes 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F PAUSE 30 ms SETDISCRETE 1 1 raise I O 1 address AO new wrt 40 address ptr data bytes 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F Interactive Debugger 147 Error Injection The Debugger can be used to insert intentional errors into sent data This feature is often used to cause C protocol violations on the bus in order to test the b
271. mable Input Output White with Orange YELLOW 2 Reserved Orange 3 GND White with Green BLACK 4 SCL DC Clock Blue RED 5 GND White with Blue BLACK 6 SDA UC Data Green BLUE 7 1 02 Programmable Input Output White with Brown WHITE 8 Reserved Brown tied together into a single sleeve Table 2 Flying Leads Serial Bus Connector Pin Assignments 92 Connecting to a Target RJ45 Serial Bus Figure 97 RJ45 Connector Pin Numbering The 4 pin crimp cable connects to targets that have a 4 pin DC header compatible with the Philips demo board The cable is designed to mate with Molex part number 22 23 2041 or equivalent Table 3 shows the pin assignments of this cable Connecting to a Target eler SE Signal Description Wire Color 1 n c 2 GND Ground White with Green 3 SCL DC Clock Blue 4 SDA C Data Green Table 3 4 Pin Crimp Cable Pin Assignments 93 Interface Setup Aside from setting up the physical connections between the CAS 1000 I2C and the target CC bus it is important to set up various configuration options in the DC Exerciser application so that the CAS 1000 I2C is ready to interface properly with the bus and commence traffic collection and viewing with minimal complications The I2C Exerciser s Configuration Manager provides access to these settings Once configured by the user most of the settings and custom preferences are conveniently saved by the I2C Exerciser
272. mal values and their format is dependant on the current address mode setting FE mode or 7F mode Please refer to the Formats section of the Preferences dialog details in the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information 7 Bit 10 Bit These radio buttons specify the bit length of the target slave address Run Pre test Script When this option is selected the current script in the Debugger s Send window is executed before the read transactions for the Slave measurements are performed This can be useful for setting up the control registers of the target slave device prior to the read transactions Measure button Clicking on this button begins the measurement operation When measurement begins a message box will pop up to provide instructions on any target bus conditions that are required for the operation During Master measurements while waiting for traffic from the target master this button becomes a Cancel button that allows the measurement operation to be cancelled Status Box This indicator is located just above the Measure button and displays the status of the measurement operation The following can be indicated Indicates that no measurements have yielded a pass or fail result In this No Data case the Result column will contain Not Tested for all parameters Indicates that measurements are in progress This status is indicated upon clicking on the Measure button and remains until all measurement
273. me traffic by sending a byte of data e g A5 to the default address 0x18 After doing this you will notice a SDA low glitch inserted right after the first SDA rising edge of the data transaction in the Monitor s timing display In order to see it more clearly zoom in the timing display by clicking on the button three times Scale l 5us div Auto Fit Line 2 r Interval A to B Ons Figure 212 SDA Low Glitch Injected by Data SDA Rising edge Triggering Condition 356 Glitch Pattern Injection 6 Now go back to the Glitch Pattern Editor window by selecting the Glitch Pattern Editor item from the Window menu Click on the View Waveform button Then you will see the actual shape of the glitch captured by the analyzer Glitch Pattern Waveform nn CH nn CH So sch ee ee ech sch MM LA LA ee no n o 0 Figure 213 SDA Low Glitch Waveform 7 Close the waveform dialog and repeat the above steps using different patterns and triggering conditions Glitch Pattern Injection 357 If you need to generate glitches through the Master or Slave Emulation you will need to save the glitch pattern information you defined to a file This can be done by using the file menu described below New Project Open Project Oo Save Project Save Project As New Glitch Pattern File Ctrl N Open Glitch Pattern File Ctrl O Save Glitch Pattern File Ctrl S Save Glitch Pattern File As KIM C Exit F
274. mmands Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Clear Bookmarks HSL Be x Figure 204 Editor Popup Menu Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl X gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl C gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl V gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at a line or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the script Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the script Scripting Language 345 Editor Window Reference The Editor tool shown in Figure 205 can be opened from the Tools menu Table 24 describes the numbered areas of this window Corelis Ready Z Aer maint device info nAddr OxA
275. n Input Parameters nSeedNum Integer to be used as the starting point for generating pseudorandom number If not specified current time will be used instead Return Value None 318 Scripting Language send message Description Sends a message ie performs a write operation to the specified target slave address The message to be sent is formatted as a string of comma or space separated hexadecimal byte values and Error Injection keywords Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype Send message nAddress bl0BitAddr strMessage bStopBit Example Call send two bytes and then a byte with an error extra bit to address 0x18 Send message 0x18 FALSE 01 40 LONG_DATA 7F TRUE Input Parameters nAddress Integer representing the address of the device to send to b10BitAddr Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether address is 10 bit strMessage String containing the data to be sent Consists of comma or space separated hexadecimal byte values and Error Injection keywords Remember when using Error Injection to send address errors that the keyword must precede any byte values in the string bStopBit Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether to send the STOP bit at the end of the transaction Return Value A string indicating how many bytes were sent or an error message if an error occurred If address was NAK d the string Address byte NAK d is returned If transaction tracking
276. n also quickly jump to these positions in the trace list using the right click menu previously illustrated Click on the Go to Start tool bar button as shown in Figure 32 to bring the trace list view to the first entries in the trace listing This will also cause the first line in the trace list to be highlighted as shown in Figure 33 na DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled AA Eile Trace Tools Window Help SH rol o a a Eleal ee xv ERC cation Addr Hex AddrType 78 Address Target 18 7 Bit Read 01101 79 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read RBD 80 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read Monitor 81 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read Figure 32 Go to Start Tool Bar Button Observe that some address columns contain symbolic values such as PLL and ADC and some data columns contain symbolic values such as FAULT WARNING and CHANSEL The user can define symbols for both address and data to enhance device specific readability Getting Started 35 45 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Lo IST Iesel AN File Trace Tools Window Help ellx ah kilo SS d xa SS o Re Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RW NAK Error Kee 01 V02 Data Byte Hex Time us a 1 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 4 1 D E 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1E 28 alu 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 BC
277. n error is detected left clicking on the cell will display a popup that reveals the location in the transaction where the error occurred such as during the address cycle data cycle START or STOP etc Reviewing the associated timing field graph can help provide more details regarding the Error Note that an error can cause the analyzer to lose synchronization and all signal edge transitions that occur while the analyzer attempts to resynchronize will be associated with the same trace list entry KHz This column indicates the approximate average clock rate for the transaction in units of kilohertz Bus Traffic Monitor 107 UO 1 This column indicates the state of discrete I O line 1 during the transaction UO 2 This column indicates the state of discrete I O line 1 during the transaction Data Byte This column indicates the data byte values conveyed to or from the target slave device by the transaction Various numerical formats are available for displaying the values including hex decimal and binary The current display format is shown in parenthesis in the column heading and right clicking on the column heading will display a popup menu that allows selection of the display format If symbols are enabled and there is a data byte symbol defined for the target slave then that symbolic name will appear in place of the numeric value refer to the Symbols section later in this chapter When using Compact mode all data byte transac
278. n of recently used values 140 Interactive Debugger No Stop This check box specifies whether a STOP condition is generated at the end of a message When unchecked default the STOP condition is included after all of a message s data bytes have been written Checking this box causes the STOP condition to be omitted Under the TC bus protocol absence of the STOP condition means that a master is not yet done transmitting The previous data transfer can then be followed by a repeated START condition and another data transfer This can be used to support some slave devices which require that the first data transfer specify the value of an offset register or a command and then the following data is written to or read from the device at that offset location Send text box The large text area constituting the bottom portion of the Debugger s Send controls is used to specify the data bytes that are written to a target slave device These data bytes are entered as sequences of two digit hexadecimal values Debugger script commands can also be entered here in order to execute more complex Send operations or to perform Error Injection These script commands are explained later in this chapter Send button Clicking on this button begins the operation of writing to a target slave device During the Send operation this button becomes a Stop button that allows the operation to be cancelled Depending on the user preference that has been set t
279. nctions enable stratification of the logic The syntax is generally a subset of the C programming language If you can write simple C programs you should be able to easily write script command files Functions are presented in these command files in a very similar fashion to C functions including the naming convention parameters and braces containing blocks of statements The following is a more detailed description of the major elements that go into a command file Variables A variable is a named storage location that contains data that can be modified during program execution Each variable has a name that uniquely identifies it within its level of scope Variable names must begin with an alphabetic character must be no longer than 255 characters must not contain white space characters Variable can contain data of the following types string String less than 4096 characters int 64 bit unsigned integer float double precision float value To simplify the syntax of command files no variable declaration is needed The script interpreter automatically casts type of variable at runtime based on its first assignment Several helper conversion functions are provided These are float_to_string integer_to_string integer_to_string hex8 integer_to_string_hex32 and integer_to_string_hex64 functions which construct data text strings converted from a variable Similar to stremp in C standard string library t
280. nd Dialog Getting Started The Less button compacts this dialog to display only the four buttons on top to minimize any obscuring of the Monitor window This is useful when you have configured the search parameters and want to repeat the same search query many times While compacted this button changes to More enabling the user to force the dialog back to its expanded format The Tag All button launches a search throughout the trace buffer for the specified search criteria and will tag all lines which match After this type of search is completed you can use the Go to Tagged Row tool bar button on the Monitor window to easily locate and step through all of these lines The Find Next button simply moves the Monitor trace list to the next found line matching the search criteria This action can be repeated to locate all matching lines but without tagging them If the end of the buffer if reached the search will wrap and continue at the start of the trace buffer The various fields are intuitive for defining search criteria and allow searching over a wide range of conditions from very specific to entire classes of trace lines The mask feature allows enabling disabling individual bits when looking for a single byte data pattern The Byte Position indicates which data byte in a message is to be considered The Width field may not be modified and is locked at one byte for search data values When the user clicks on the Load From Selected Monitor Trace L
281. nd the 7 bits of address will be left justified within the byte This is the default setting In 7F mode the MSB will always be zero and the 7 bits of address will be right justified within the byte Both of these formats are encountered in the I2C world and the tool is flexible enough to use either format throughout 424 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled So S ss AN File Trace Tools Window Help e x eh ki S 8H BE Be xe vm Me Ro x Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location l Addr Hex AddrType Rw NAK Error KS Data Byte Hex Time us vo 1 IS 12 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Preferences E 11 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read alla 10 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read Monitor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Monitor 9 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read a 8 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 7 bit Hex Address Format ae is z Aas soe 2 ES FE mode 7 address bits left justified in byte A6 A0 0 default 4 ata Target 54 7 Bit Write Debugger 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 7F mode 7 address bits right justified in byte 0 A6 A0 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write T 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Suess 2 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read Programmer 1 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read Demonia Daa tact a8 rat Rea 4 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 2 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 3 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read
282. nfiguration rising edge drive setting with provided selection When enabled and driving the bus the analyzer will assert hard drivers on the bus momentarily during signal rising edges This should overcome parasitic capacitance on the bus resulting in fast rise times Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SetRisingEdgeDriveMode int nMode Return Value 0 if I2C_InitHardware was never called otherwise 1 Parameters nMode 0 is off 1 is on Third Party Application Interface 227 I2C_SetTimingSkew Sets new timing skew parameters for the analyzer Following execution of this function the timing relationship between SCL and SDA during analyzer driven communications will be adjusted according to the provided settings Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SetTimingSkew int nMode int nTime Return Value 1 if successful UH error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters nMode An integer value representing the new mode Must be O normal 1 setup_time or 2 hold_time nTime An integer value representing the new amount for setup or hold time The value is in nanoseconds and will be rounded to the nearest 20 ns The valid range is up to one eighth of the current SCL period on the positive side and a little less 80 ns on the negative side For example fora 100 KHz SCL
283. ning SMBus compliant devices this tool will allow you to easily test the glitch tolerance level of your devices The Glitch Pattern Injection feature supports e Single glitch on SDA and or SCL signal for durations from 20 ns to 5 2 us e Complex glitch patterns with any combination of SDA and SCL signals for 1 to 1022 clock cycles at a clock rate of 50 MHz down to 196 KHz e Configurable trigger condition using bus cycles and SDA SCL edge directions e Triggering and injection of glitches independent of bus driver target or analyzer e Capturing and viewing of the glitch waveform NOTE When the analyzer is driving the bus as an emulated master or slave the glitch pattern operates as programmed However when a target is driving the bus the outcome may vary for rising glitches injected while the target is driving the signals low This outcome is unpredictable and varies depending on the electrical characteristics of the target since the analyzer is contending with an active driving source Falling glitches do not suffer from this and always work when the bus is high since the open drain bus supports multiple low drivers The glitch pattern is a combination of forcing the SDA and or SCL signals high or low for specified durations at specified time delays from the trigger condition The trigger condition consists of a bus cycle Address Data Start Stop Restart or ACK NAK and or an edge direction of the SDA or SCL signal When th
284. nitor Window Trace List Showing Symbolic Address and Data Enttes eee 36 Figure 34 Configuration Manager Symbols Definition Screen eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 37 Figure 35 Symbol Definition Dialog 38 Figure 36 Configuration Manager Symbols Definition Screen with DAC Gvmbol 39 Figure 37 Monitor Window Trace List Showing New DAC Symbolic Address Entree 40 Figure 38 Monitor Window Trace List Data Byte Column Right Click Pop up Menu 41 Figure 39 Monitor Window Trace List Data Column with Symbols Disabled 42 Figure 40 Monitor Window Trace List Data Byte Column Right Click Pop up Menu 43 Figure 41 Monitor Window Trace List Data Column with Data Bytes in Binary Format 43 Figure 42 Monitor Window Trace List Data Byte Column Right Click Pop up Menu 44 Figure 43 Monitor Window Trace List in Compact Mode ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 45 Figure 44 Monitor Window Trace List in Compact Mode with Data Bytes Pop up Window ssssssesene 46 Figure 45 Monitor Window Trace List I O 2 Right Click Pop Up Menu 47 Figure 46 Dragging Monitor Window Trace List I O 1 Column Headmg 47 Figure 47 Monitor Window Trace List with Rearranged I O Columns 48 Figure 48 Trace layout DialOG visi s tees sess des ies edd ee Hd EAR ed leede dE 49 vi Figure 49 Monitor Window Timing Dieplay 50 Figure 50 Monitor Window Trace List Positioned on Cursor A Line cccceeeee
285. no protocol error is being searched for Select Any to specify don t care UO 1 Indicates that discrete I O line 1 should have a specific value of O or 1 during a transaction Select Any to specify don t care UO 2 Indicates that discrete I O line 1 should have a specific value of O or 1 during a transaction Select Any to specify don t care Value Specifies the data byte value of interest Select Any to specify don t care Mask Specifies a data byte mask which is applied to all data bytes before comparing them to the configured data value of interest This allows the user to isolate individual bits of interest Select FF to always compare all eight bits of each data value Byte Position Allows the user to select a specific data byte position within each message to do the data value comparison on Select Any to specify don t care Width Specifies the number of data bytes contained in the search pattern The default value is one byte Bus Traffic Monitor 131 Trace Layout The Trace Layout dialog shown in Figure 128 controls which columns will be displayed in the trace listing The dialog also allows you to restore the factory defaults for column widths visibility and order 132 Visible SSS Si si S S S S S SS Column Name Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex Add
286. ns to repeat the emulation Click on OK to add the emulated device When the Edit button is selected the Add Emulated Device dialog is also displayed with the information already filled out The user can make the necessary modifications to the device and click on OK when done A single data file can be associated with multiple slave devices Figure 175 Add Emulated Device Dialog 240 Add Emulated Device ES Type aste Name Address Address Type Runs Slave a 7 Bit B 1 X Script File I C Device Emulator Emulator Menu Bar When the Emulation Manager window is active the Menu Bar contains entries relevant to the Emulator functions including File Tools Windows and Help A description of each menu follows Emulator File Menu The File menu includes options to load and save projects These project related entries are identical to those described in the Monitor File Menu section of the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emulator Execute Menu The Execute menu shown in Figure 176 contains commands pertaining to running and stopping all active emulated devices gt Run F5 WW Stop Figure 176 Emulator Execute Menu Run Executes all active devices Stop Aborts execution of all active devices Emulator Tools Menu The Tools menu provides a path to the major application function windows This is identical to the Monitor Tools Menu described in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Emul
287. ntains a separate collection of calibration data for every CAS 1000 I2C that it operates Whenever the application detects a CAS 1000 I2C that it has not yet calibrated it will display a prompt as shown in Figure 169 DC Exerciser ES The attached C4S 1000 12C E requires calibration for optimal results when using the analyzer supplied voltage source setting It is recommended that you run the automated calibration process at this time If you wish to perform calibration later you can access the feature from the Tools menu Would you like to perform calibration now Figure 169 Calibration Prompt The calibration process can be skipped and the I2C Exerciser will not prompt again until the next time the application is launched however it is highly recommended that the calibration be performed Calibration time can fluctuate but it should complete within a minute or two and need only be performed once for a given CAS 1000 I2C Note that calibration can also be started by choosing Tools Calibration from the 12C Exerciser menu bar When calibration begins a warning message is first displayed as a reminder to make sure that there is no target attached to the CAS 1000 I2C This is shown in Figure 170 Calibration H Please make sure that the C4S 1000 12C E is disconnected from your target and click on OK to proceed Figure 170 Calibration Warning Configuration and Preferences 191 Upon clicking the OK button cali
288. ntering a 2 in the Run field Then click on the Send button to execute the script The contents of the Debugger window should appear as shown in Figure 87 below Click on the Monitor entry in the Shortcut Bar to return to the Monitor window As shown below in Figure 88 the trace list will display the messages that were sent to the 10 bit address 118 and you can see changes in the I O lines by observing to the I O 1 and I O 2 columns Send Receive d 118 18 AddrType 10 5it z AddrType 7 Bit H Run 2 Mi PS Bytes 3 7 J Passed E No Stop E No Stop Discrete I O Test a Al Address10 118 2B SetDiscrete 1 0 oF SetDiscrete 2 0 Al ES SetDiscrete 2 1 Al 2B 2B SetDiscrete 2 0 SE SetDiscrete 1 1 ES oF SetDiscrete 2 1 E8 4 D p Figure 87 Debugger Discrete UO Script ay Monitor Untitled Eee Line Marker l Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RW NAK Error KHz Deh v02 Data Byte Hex Time us a 8 Address Analyzer c4 7 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 12 363 9 Data Target CA 7 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 21 12 363 10 Data Target c4 7 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 30 12 363 11 Data Target CA 7 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 DD 12 363 12 Data Target c4 7 Bit Write NAK 100 1 1 0A 12 364 13 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 0 0 102 050 14 Data Target 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 0 0 A1 102 050 15 Address Analyzer 118 10 Bit Write NAK 100 0 1 102 053 16 Data Target 118 10 Bit
289. ntitled Figure 166 Title Bar for a New Project Configuration and Preferences 189 Once you have saved a project to a file the title bar will display the current project file name as shown in Figure 167 44 DC Exerciser SMBus Proj i2c Figure 167 Title Bar for a Saved Project The project settings are saved in a file with GC extension Along with this main i2c file several secondary files are created and associated with the project whenever you create a new project They are the trigger trg filters fil and symbols sym files Having these separate project sub files allows you to re use the settings that they contain from within another project This can be achieved by selecting the sub files from the Files tab of the Configuration Manager By default when you create and save a new project the application will automatically give the same name to these sub files as the main project file only the file extension will differ The I2C Exerciser keeps track of any changes made to a project s settings during a session Upon exiting the application or closing the current project it will ask you whether you want to save the changes or not You may choose not to save it to preserve your original project settings or to save the latest changes to the project for next time Along with the configuration settings preferences and window positions a project also remembers the names and paths of certain data files associated w
290. o cursors available Cursor A is identified by its green background and Cursor B is identified by its magenta background by default These colors can be configured on the Monitor Colors tab of the Tools Preferences menu entry If the cursors are not in the currently visible range of timing information the Field row will contain a small green Cursor A or magenta Cursor B triangle on either the extreme left or right side of the row to indicate the cursor is located before or after the visible range of timing information You can click on these markers and drag them left or right to move the corresponding cursor into the visible range of timing information When in the visible range the cursors are represented by small colored boxes with a vertical line that extends below them through the timing display Similarly a trigger is represented by a red vertical line and a small red box just above the Field row when in the visible range and represented by a red triangle above the Field row when out of the visible range Right click in the trace list area of the Monitor window and select the Go to Cursor A pop up menu entry This will cause the trace list and timing display to reposition to the Cursor A line as shown in Figure 50 The Cursor A line can be seen on line 16 in the trace list Both the trace list line and vertical marker in the timing display for Cursor A are colored green to help distinguish them from other display elements
291. oded Data Getting Started 89 If the text of the decoded data does not fit within the width of the Data Byte column positioning the mouse pointer over the entry will cause a tooltip to display with the entire decoded SMBus message Try this by placing your mouse pointer over the line 18 Data Byte column entry for several seconds as shown in Figure 95 below 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 97 1 1 CMD CONFIG 6 696 217 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Read 98 1 1 7 224 145 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Read NAK 97 1 1 RESP DATALR 7 224 245 Address Analyzer Microcthi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 12 824 Data Target Microchi 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 CMD CONFIG STANDBY 0x80 Address Analyzer Microchi 7 Bit Write 99 1 1 17228 Data Target Microcht 7 Bit Write 98 1 1 CMD CONFIG T228 Figure 95 Decoded SMBus Message ToolTip You can also open up a window containing the full decoded SMBus message by clicking on the Data Byte column entry Click on that entry for line number 18 and the window will pop up as shown in Figure 96 below SMBus Data on line 18 es Figure 96 SMBus Data Window Click on the Close button to close the SMBus Data window Getting Started 90 This completes the I2C Exerciser tutorial Please refer to chapters 5 and on for more detailed information on the I2C Exerciser graphical user interface Getting Started 91 Chapter 4 Connecting to a Target CAS
292. oder ia T E 237 Emulator Manager Wimdow tutsak ttnn tnt tunnar ennast tn nanten nanten nanena 238 Add Emulated Device Dialog 240 Emulator Execute Men 241 Emulator Tool Barst dee ENNEN EEN ENEE 242 Emulated Master Wimdow sssnssssssseesrintseesttttrtntttttttt rttr nnat ett EEE EEERAE SEEE EE EEES AES EEE En Ennn rE EEEn 243 Emulated Master Source Popup Men 245 Emulated Master File Menu 247 Emulated Master Edit Men 248 Emulated Master Execute Men 249 Emulated Master Breakpoint Men 250 Emulated Master Tool Bar 251 Emulated Slave WiNA OW eg get aa ie sieges aaa aa aa a eaa ea araea aaa ea e a aaaea Eat 253 Emulated Slave File MON izcccissi6iscctsscoccesteddhecestencace aaea a aaa ee aaa aa 254 Emulated SlavevEdit Men Usce ies aae eaae aaea a eaaa dee 255 Emulated Slave Fool Ba a e aeaaee a a a ated aaa eaaa aa ee tad Ea 256 Configuring Emulated Slave Device assesesrieesrrresrrrresrinnestenneetinassttaaaateanestenucnnaannenannt 259 Glock Stretched on ACK Bita rsin aaee aaae eea aa aa a ESA 259 Kuele OTT 262 KE Lee dE 263 Test cource Popup M n epiese iaaa aa aaa eaa ea aaa aa aaa aa aaaeaii 266 KEEA AEAN EIn EAE E E E E E ls 268 T st Edit MOM EEN 269 Test Execute METU y E aea hacen a lends e a e a a aa aaaea 270 Test Breakpoint Menu ccccceeeeeeeeenecece cree eee ceaeeeceeeeeseceaaaeaeceeeeeeeesecsaeaeseseeesesessinaeeeeees 270 TeSHOOM BAR oan eera ae lavas aae a Tar EaR AE AE e nun deb PANE Aisle c
293. olors 67 Figure 70 Monitor Window Trace List with the Trigger Line Centered ceeeeeeesneeeeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeaaes 68 Figure 71 Monitor Options Preferences Gcreen eeeccceeeeeeeceeneeeeceeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeenaes 69 Figure 72 Monitor Window Trace List with Trigger at Line Zero Numbering cece eeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeaes 70 Figure 73 Monitor Window Trace List with Trigger is Time Zero Tmmestampe 71 Figure 74 Monitor Window Trace List with Relative Timestamps sssssssssseriseesrresrerrssrerrssrrrrsserrrsseeens 72 Figure 75 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Addresses in FE mode sssseserssesrreseerrssrerrssrerrssrens 73 Figure 76 Monitor Window Trace List Showing Addresses in 7F mode sesseseesseerresserrsseerrssrerrssrees 74 Figure 77 Tools Menu Deselect Demo Mode 75 Figure 78 Status Bar Indicating Live Data Mode 0 eee eee ceenneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 75 Figure 79 Analyzer Supplied Mode Prompt cccccceeceecceceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeseceaaeeeeeeeeesesceaeeeeeeeeeeeesnaees 76 Figure 80 Debugger WindOW cccecsceeeceeececeneeecgeesacsceeeaasceeuteceateeecnecgenaauscuecuaaeeceedacaecgenaeessteedesdeeeeenies 77 Figure 81 Byte Sent From the Debugger essseessssesssrreessrnssrrnnesrrnnesrenasetennesttnandetenaesnenadutenaeettnnaatenneennne 78 Figure 82 Receive Three Bytes in the Debugger ee eeeeeeceenneeeceeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeneeeeeeaes 79 F
294. on Test Breakpoint Menu The Breakpoint menu shown in Figure 197 contains commands for the manipulation of breakpoints in the current script M Toggle Breakpoint F9 di Enable Disable Breakpoint dn Enable All Wi Disable All d n Clear All Figure 197 Test Breakpoint Menu Toggle Breakpoint Adds a breakpoint to the line at the current cursor location or removes a breakpoint if one is already set If the line is blank or contains only comments the breakpoint will be applied to the next line of code 270 Script Driven Bus Tester Enable Disable Breakpoint Enables or disables the breakpoint at the line containing the cursor If no breakpoint exists at that line it will create an enabled breakpoint Enable All Enables all the existing breakpoints Disable All Disables all the existing breakpoints Clear All Removes all existing breakpoints Test Tools Menu The Tools menu provides a path to the major application function windows This is identical to the Monitor Tools Menu selections in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Test Window Menu The Window menu manages the various windows of I2C Exerciser and is identical to the Monitor Window Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Test Help Menu The Help menu accesses the on line help features and is identical to the Monitor Help Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Script Driven Bus Tester 271 Test Tool Bar The Test Tool Bar p
295. onitor 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1C 2 632 1 zA 37 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 DONE 2 730 4 e 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 3 441 1 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 17 3 469 1 Debugger 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 5D 3 494 1 41 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 35 3 520 1 F 42 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 OF 3 545 1 DASS Address Analyzer 7 Bit Read 107 3729 1 Programmer Data Target 7 Bit Read 104 3 884 REENEN Address Target 7 Bit Read 402 4 694 47 Data Analyzer Sc 7 Bit Read 402 3D 4 735 1 48 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 401 63 4 761 1 49 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 52 4 786 1 50 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 16 4811 1 51 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 4 995 1 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1F 5 151 1 53 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 BUSY 5249 1 54 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 5 960 1 55 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 5A 5 988 1 56 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 6 171 1 57 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 33 6 199 1 X AutoFit Line 45 le Interval A toB 69 042us Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SEL SDA 170 1 1 0 2 Figure 70 Monitor Window Trace List with the Trigger Line Centered 68 Getting Started Select the Tools Preferences menu entry and the Preferences screen will appear Click on the Monitor Options tab and move the Preferences screen to the middle of the Monitor window as shown in Figure 71 A DC Exerciser Untitl
296. ope 277 The I2C Exerciser will display a reminder message box before taking these measurements Slave parameters are measured by performing read transactions with the target slave To complete successfully these measurements require that the data provided by the target slave produce both rising and falling SDA edges during the data cycle Thus it may be necessary to set up the slave device appropriately before initiating the measurements Slave Information These controls are enabled when the Slave radio button described above is selected and are used to specify the target slave device for measurement Name This dropdown box allows quick selection of target slaves whose presence on the bus has been verified Slave device verification is performed by the Auto Detect feature in the Target Slaves pane of the Configuration Manager Refer to the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information Address This field specifies the I C bus address of the target slave that is being measured An address can be entered as a hexadecimal value or an address symbol may be used if one has been defined for the target slave refer to the Symbols section of the Configuration Manager details in the Configuration and Preferences chapter Additionally the field s dropdown list provides a selection of recently used address values and all of the currently defined address symbols Note that 7 bit IC addresses are represented as 8 bit hexadeci
297. or 10 bit address of the destination slave depending on following parameter b10BitAddress If one the above address is a 10 bit value If zero it is a 7 bit address pSenaData A pointer to a block of memory where the send data bytes are provided pReceiveData A pointer to a block of memory where the successfully sent data bytes are returned This is an optional parameter which can be NULL nDataCount The number of bytes contained in the above block of memory bUseStopBit If one a stop cycle terminates the message after the last data byte sent otherwise no stop cycle is issued the analyzer continues to control the bus with SCL low ready to perform a coming Repeat Start on the next access ulParam Optional parameter specifying the location of glitch trigger arming This parameter must be set to 0 if no glitch injection is to be performed When I2C_LoadGlitch or I2C_ReloadGlitch is called prior to this function a non zero value of this parameter represents the byte index of the transaction data which the glitch trigger should be armed for For instance the value of 1 specifies the arming of glitch injection to be occurred right before the address byte of the transaction The value of 2 specifies arming to be occurred right before the first data byte The value 3 for the second data byte and so on Please refer to the descriptions for I2C_LoadGlitch and I2C_ReloadGlitch functions for more details Third Party Ap
298. or Tagged These markers are used to indicate special transactions of interest and will be described in more detail later There are navigation tool bar buttons as well as menu equivalents to immediately jump to any of these special types of lines or to quickly jump directly to the beginning or end of the trace buffer Single clicking on a trace list line will highlight that selected line This highlighting helps to identify all of the transaction information across the columns of the trace listing The Find and Trigger tools can also populate their required transaction fields automatically by using the data from the currently selected line Lines in the trace listing can be arbitrarily flagged as lines of interest Such lines are denoted by blue text as well as the Tagged indicator in the Marker column This flag is set or unset by double clicking on the trace list line The Find tool discussed later in this tutorial can also use this tagging mechanism to identify transactions throughout the trace buffer that satisfied certain specified criteria Double click on any untagged line and observe its text color change and Marker column change to Tagged Double click on the same line again and it will return to untagged status Right click in the trace list area of the Monitor window and select the Go to Trigger pop up menu entry as shown in Figure 26 This will cause the trace list and timing display to reposition to the Trigger line as shown in Figure 27
299. ordinate Files Type File Trigger Filters Symbols Figure 158 Files Pane Target Slaves Pane Target Slaves Pane shown in Figure 159 contains a list of the slaves that exist on the target bus These are a combination of user entered and or automatically detected slaves The latter is collected by using the Auto Detect button located on the left side beneath the list of slaves Additional buttons beneath the list allow the user to add edit or remove slaves from the list This list of slave devices overlaps with the Symbols feature Any address symbols that have been specified in the Symbols Pane will also appear here Similarly when a slave is added to this list and given a name that name becomes the symbol for the slave device and will then appear in the Symbols Pane Any removals are also reflected in both panes 180 Configuration and Preferences Clicking on the Auto Detect button will initiate an automatic sequence of read transactions for every valid and non emulated I2C bus address Devices that acknowledge the read transaction make their presence known Any user entered slaves that are in the list will have YES entered into their Verified columns if they are detected All other detected slaves will be added to the list with their Name field generated based on the slave s address For example a slave device detected at address 0x18 would be named SLAVE_18 Configuration Manager Name Add
300. ose it GC Exerciser SH X No Corelis hardware is detected Entering demo mode OK Figure 19 Initial 12C Exerciser Warning Message when CAS 1000 I2C is Not Initially Connected Getting Started 25 Step 2 Enable Demo mode Click on the Tools menu and verify that the Demo Mode menu item has a check mark next to it as shown below in Figure 20 This indicates that the program is in Demo Mode If the CAS 1000 I2C was connected to the PC when you started 12C Exerciser you will have to select this menu item to force the program into Demo Mode You can also verify that the program is in Demo Mode by observing the programs status bar in the lower right corner of the main window as shown in Figure 21 The leftmost indicator will either contain the bold red text DEMO or the plain text LIVE 26 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled 01101 Bet Ali Monitor B Programmer d File Trace Toots Window Help Ta gt fal Monitor Es Debugger Configuration Manager F8 Preferences F7 cation Add X Figure 20 Tools Menu Demo Mode Selection DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Figure 21 Status Bar Indicating Demo Mode Getting Started Step 3 Begin the Monitor Window Simulated Bus Activity Click on the Run Single tool bar button represented by a green arrow as shown in Figure 22 to begin Monitor data collection of the simulated bus activity H
301. ou are not interested in viewing the timing data hiding it provides more room in the Monitor window to display additional trace list data Filters Provides direct access to the Filters tab of the Configuration Manager allowing the user to view add edit or remove filters Filter rules qualify data transactions for inclusion or exclusion from the trace listing The Filter function is described earlier in this chapter Trigger Provides access to the Trigger tab of the Configuration Manager allowing the user to view or edit the trigger condition The trigger defines conditions to mark a special transaction event in the trace buffer The Trigger function is described earlier in this chapter Bus Traffic Monitor 125 Symbols Provides access to the Symbols tab of the Configuration Manager allowing the viewing adding editing or removing of the symbol definitions used for trace list address and data substitution The Symbols function will be described in more detail later in this chapter Find Launches the Find dialog in either the regular More or compact Less mode depending on the last used size as shown in Figure 126 and Figure 127 This dialog allows the user to search through the trace listing for transactions matching the specified pattern Trace Layout Launches the Trace Layout dialog as in Figure 128 which allows customization of the trace listing columns Trace Run Stop Submenu The
302. own out in order to accommodate the new ones once the buffer becomes full In such cases the trigger transaction may also get thrown out The Trigger Out option provides a link between the incoming trigger events to a trigger out signal through one of the discrete I O s When the Trigger Out option is set to one of two discrete I O s the signal will pulse high or low according to the Active Pulse setting when the specified trigger event occurs The width of the pulse is about 0 5 ms and the typical delay between the actual trigger event on the bus and the trigger out pulse is approximately 1 6 ms This delay may vary from 1 5 ms to 150 ms depending on the data traffic load The Load From Selected Monitor Trace Line button facilitates quick parameter entry by reading the specifications from the currently selected trace line If no trace line is currently selected the button will be inactive The Defaults button allows the user to revert back to the default values for the Triggering mechanism Bus Traffic Monitor 111 Filters symbols SMBus Settings Files Enable Trigger Trigger Buffer Position S a S Trigger Out None x Early Middle Late Active Pulse Low Event Definitions Transfer Type Any e NAK Any e Addr Hex Any e Error Any e AddrType Any v I O 1 Any e RW Any v 1 02 Any Data Byte Value i Byte Hex Amt 3 Position DON x Mask Hex FF v Width 1 Byte Y Load From Se
303. p Parameters Voltage Volts Pull up Resistance Ohms Bus Drive Features Drive Clock Rate Accelerated Rising Edge Drive Auto O Off Input Output Signals High Level Function qeescveccecsescensscseg Triggers Filters symbols SMBus Settings Jeeesensssessnsensenned Bus Signal Thresholds Analyzer Supplied wh Level Volts Low Level 0 90 e Volts Auto Detect E Disable Collision Detection Hi Speed Mode Auto On Off Monitor Buffer Options Depth Transactions Figure 101 Configuration Manager Settings Pane 100 Connecting to a Target Bus Electrical Features The Bus Electrical Features group shown in Figure 102 specifies the electrical characteristics of the bus Bus Electrical Features Voltage Source Bus Signal Thresholds Target Supplied Analyzer Supplied High Level 1 80 D Volts Intended Pull up P ter fe idee Low Level 0 90 Volts Voltage 3 30 v Volts Pull up Resistance 1000 v Ohms TT Figure 102 Bus Electrical Features Voltage Source Target Supplied Specifies that the connected target CC bus has its own pull up voltage supply In this case the target bus is self sufficient and ready for use When this setting is selected the Pull up Resistance setting is disabled Analyzer Supplied Specifies that the CAS 1000 I2C will supply pull up voltage to the target bus In this case the target has no other attached pull
304. plication Interface 213 2C_SendDataPEC Sends a message ie performs a write operation with a SMBus Packet Error Checking PEC byte to the specified target slave address The PEC is a CRC 8 error checking byte calculated on all the message bytes including addresses and read write bits The PEC is appended to the message as the last data byte This function behaves same as the I2C_SendData function except for the addition of PEC byte Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SendDataPEC int nAddress int blOBitAddress unsigned char pSendData unsigned char pReceiveData int nDataCount int bUseStopBit unsigned long ulParam Return Value Number of bytes successfully sent UH error occurred 1 if address was NAK d 2 if a timeout occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters nAdadress This is the 7 bit or 10 bit address of the destination slave depending on following parameter b10BitAddress If one the above address is a 10 bit value If zero it is a 7 bit address pSenaData A pointer to a block of memory where the send data bytes are provided pReceiveData A pointer to a block of memory where the successfully sent data bytes are returned This is an optional parameter which can be NULL nDataCount The number of bytes contained in the above block of memory bUseStopBit If one a stop
305. pplied radio button is selected 2 Select an appropriate pull up Voltage for the bus 3 Select the bus Pull up Resistance this is for both the SCL and the SDA signal taking into consideration its capacitance keep RC time constant small enough for expected SCL rates Configuration Manager x Triggers Filters symbols smBus settings Fies Bus Electrical Features Bus Signal Thresholds High Level Volts Ge SS Low Level Volts nonce ital 0 Intended Pull up Parameters Bus Drive Features Drive Clock Rate 100 kHz Disable Collision Detection Accelerated Rising Edge Drive Hi Speed Mode Auto s On off Auto On S Off Input Output Signals High Level Function Monitor Buffer Options Depth Transactions Figure 100 Configuration Manager Analyzer Supplied 98 Connecting to a Target Auto Detect At any time you may have the I2C Exerciser check for a voltage on the target bus and automatically pick recommended default electrical settings for you by clicking on the Auto Detect button in the Configuration Manager Settings pane Scenario 2 Previously Tested Target This scenario occurs when you load a previously saved project file either during launch of the application or by selecting File Open Project from the menu bar Since the software has already saved the settings for the target bus in the project file no additional setup should be necessary Scenario 3 No Target This s
306. provides five buttons to allow the user to manipulate the list of emulated devices when the Emulator is not running Add Associates a new script file with an emulated device Edit Modifies the settings of the selected emulated device Remove Removes the selected emulated device from the Emulated Devices list Remove All Removes all devices displayed in the Emulated Devices list View Opens the Emulated Master or Emulated Slave window for the selected emulated device and displays the script file source code or data listing The Emulated Master window allows editing of the script setting of breakpoints running pausing and single stepping through the device s script The Emulated Slave window allows editing of the sequential data to be provided by the slave device Both the Emulated Master and Emulated Slave windows are described later in this chapter UC Device Emulator 239 Emulated Devices List The user can manipulate the Emulated Devices List by using the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons in the Emulation Manager When using the Add button the Add Emulated Device dialog is displayed as shown in Figure 175 Click on the Browse button to select the script or data file Select the Type of the device by clicking on the Masier or Slave radio buttons Enter a name for the address if the device is a slave then associate an address and specify the address type in the appropriate boxes Finally select the number of Ru
307. pt language does not support the usage of the standard C libraries nor does it allow importing of external libraries Therefore the following built in functions are provided as a substitute Function Description compare_to_table Performs a comparison of a value with the parameter specified in a table file disable_tx_tracking Turns off the transmission tracking feature enable_tx_tracking Turns on the transmission tracking feature exit Terminates script execution and passes an exit code back to the application float_to_string Converts a floating point input to a decimal string representation of that floating point value inject_glitch Injects previously loaded glitch pattern to the target bus Leger Converts an integer to a decimal string representation of that integer nteger_to_string_hex8 Converts an integer input into a hex string representation of that integer with exactly 2 hex digits nteger_ ing_hex32 Converts an integer input into a hex string representation of that integer with exactly 8 hex digits ing_hex64 Converts an integer input into a hex string representation of that integer with exactly 16 hex digits load_glitch Loads the glitch pattern information from a glitch pattern file to the CAS 1000 load_parameters Loads the hardware setup options from a specified project file measure_bus Performs the specified measurement on the bus Might require user interaction m
308. r lines meeting the setup conditions Find K l Transfer Type Any Z NAK Any E Addr S Hex Any Error Any bd AddrType Any e HO 1 Any e RAW Any lt I 02 Any M Data Byte Value Byte Hex 72 Position Any Mask Width Hex FF 1 Byte Figure 126 Monitor Find Dialog Regular Find X Ws Figure 127 Monitor Find Dialog Compact 130 Bus Traffic Monitor Each of the Find window search criteria fields is described below Type Indicates that either an address or data transaction is being searched for Select Any to specify don t care Addr Hex Specifies the address of interest Select Any to specify don t care If a 7 bit address is being entered the hex address value should be entered properly according to the current FE mode or 7F mode setting Addr Type Indicates that either a 7 bit 10 bit or Hs mode address type transaction is being searched for Select Any to specify don t care Note that if there is an address in the Addr field this field may not be Any R W Indicates that either a read or write transaction is being searched for Select Any to specify don t care NAK Indicates that a transaction with either an acknowledge ACK or not acknowledge NAK is being searched for Select Any to specify don t care Error Indicates that a transaction with a protocol error or
309. r to string hex32 Description Converts the integer input into a string containing the hex representation of the integer The returned string will have exactly 8 hex digits If the value passed in is larger than OxFFFFFFFF the east significant 32 bits are used Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype integer Co string hex32 nValue Example call address 43323 convert 43323 to hex string 0000A93B address32 integer to string hex32 address Input Parameters nValue The value of the integer to convert to a string If value is larger than OxFFFFFFFF the least significant 32 bits are used Return Value A string with exactly 8 digits containing the hexadecimal representation of the least significant 32 bits of the input integer value 304 Scripting Language integer to string hex64 Description Converts the integer input into a string containing the hex representation of the integer The returned string will have exactly 16 hex digits Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype integer Co string hex64 nValue Example Call index 1 address64 integer Co string hex64 OxXFFFFFFFF80020000 index Input Parameters nValue The value of the integer to convert to a string Return Value A string with exactly 16 digits containing the hexadecimal representation of the input integer value Scripting Language 305 load glitch Description Loads the glitch patte
310. rType RW NAK Error KHz eh vo2 Data Byte Hex Time us a i 34 Data Analyzer 7 Bit Read 1 1 12 2 293 01101 35 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 FA Run Status ros zs lull 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 4 Monitor 37 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 Pre trigger data Trigger ve 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 Post trigger data La 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 Buffer Full 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write CEET e Debugger 41 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 42 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 F 43 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 207 9 E 44 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 14 Programmer 46 Address Target 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 47 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 48 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 401 1 49 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 1 50 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 109 transactions collected 51 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 E Oa 53 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 Data collected successfully 54 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 55 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 56 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 1 57 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 33 6 199 58 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 E7 6 224 X Scale 50 us div JAuto Fit Line 45 Interval A to B 9 422762 ms Cor Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 10 1 1 0 2 28 Figure 24 Run Status Window Getting Started Step 4 Close the Run Status Window Click on the Run S
311. rType R W NAK Error KHZ UO UO 3 Data Byte Hex A m e Enable All Columns Default Column Layout Figure 128 Trace Layout Dialog Bus Traffic Monitor Monitor Tools Menu The Tools menu shown in Figure 129 provides a path to the major application function windows Ls Ai Monitor Debugger Programmer Ess Emulator Test Parameters Scope Editor Glitch Pattern Editor ER Demo Mode Self Test Calibration Configuration Manager F8 Preferences F7 Figure 129 Tools Menu Monitor Launches the Monitor window which provides acquisition and viewing of bus traffic transactions Debugger Launches the Debugger window which provides interactive sending and receiving of messages to and from the bus Programmer Launches the Programmer window which allows EEPROM memory programming and viewing of supported devices using the I2C bus Emulator Launches the Emulation Manager window which allows the configuration and assignment of script program files to virtual devices to be emulated by the CAS 1000 I2C Test Launches the Test window which provides execution of script files to generate customized bus interactions and measurements in order to validate target bus functionality Parameters Scope Launches the Parameters Scope dialog which allows measurement of various bus signal parameters Editor Launches the Editor window which provides intelligent
312. ram Folder screen shown in Figure 8 will be displayed Select Anyone who uses this computer or Only for me By default the installer will place a shortcut icon for the I2C Exerciser on your desktop If you do not wish this shortcut to be created uncheck the checkbox on this screen Installation 12 E a m D DC Exerciser InstallAware Wizard Scectcbatnvtceyovidietceer CORELIS An IAA Company Setup will add program shortcuts to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or accept the suggested name Click Next to continue Program Folder Install this application for Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me current user Figure 8 Select Program Folder Screen Click on the Next button and the Completing the Installation Wizard screen shown in Figure 9 will be displayed To change any installation parameters click on the Back button Otherwise click on the Next button and the installation process will begin Installation 13 D DC Exerciser InstallAware Wizard Completing the Installation Wizard for DC Exerciser The Installation Wizard is now ready to configure I2C Exerciser on this computer Click Next to begin configuration Click Back to change settings Click Cancel to exit Figure 9 Completing the Installation Wizard Screen The installer copies the program files to the specified folder and support files to the Windows system
313. re 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 Figure 195 Figure 196 Figure 197 Figure 198 Figure 199 Figure 200 Figure 201 Figure 202 Figure 203 Figure 204 Figure 205 Figure 206 Figure 207 Figure 208 Figure 209 Figure 210 Figure 211 Figure 212 Figure 213 Target Slaves Pane gerooden Ee ees ier seu ethics ee daca ere 181 Timing Skew Pane aroti Eege dee Eed ENEE EEN 183 Monitor Colors Pane isi zgtues ei Dese Eed DEES ace 184 Monitor Options Pane cece cece seceaeaeceeeeesesecaaeaeeeeeeeeeeseneaeaeeeeeeeeetsnaaes 185 Debugger Options Pane i s cs ctelaceseasie daevent Sege Eege E ENEE NEE 186 Programmer Options Pane eons ean ceacth ege 187 Bei EI 188 Tile Bar fora New ProjeCt rs sees Eege deed ee dee eege 189 Title Bar fora Saved Project ccsccceesscceceeseneeseeseneeseessneeeeessneeceesnneeseneenneeeessneeeeesnaceeneniece 190 File Ment MRU Project et ecliceccside ugi cecee cise ate deesea ian peeved cede E EE ea 190 Calibrations Prompts 2 iss ceteacc escent sb tecsasne ctace a cua seced i ENEE a a a a a a 191 Gali E Men E ANIA EE 191 IT e EE EE 192 Calibration Complete A 192 Emulation Manager Window eresian
314. remainder of this manual or going through the on line help The material in this chapter is divided into two parts Most of what you will do while working through the chapter will involve using the demo mode feature of I2C Exerciser with the Monitor window to look at various bus tracing capabilities The second part of the chapter will briefly take you through using the live mode of DC Exerciser in order to familiarize you with the Debugger window that is not available in the demo mode Calibration Note If you are going through these tutorials for the first time with a new installation of DC Exerciser and you have a CAS 1000 I2C connected then you may be prompted to calibrate the CAS 1000 I2C The calibration feature fine tunes the electrical outputs of the CAS 1000 I2C for use when it is providing the voltage source for an attached target bus Feel free to skip the process during these tutorials by clicking on the No button if prompted to perform calibration However if you wish to get the calibration out of the way you may allow it to proceed by following the on screen instructions it should only take a minute or two and need only be completed once For details on the calibration feature refer to the Calibration section in the Configuration and Preferences chapter Tutorial Using Demo Mode The steps in the following tutorial will guide you through basic CAS 1000 I2C usage once you have successfully installed the software and option
315. res include message filtering symbolic translation of numeric values and event triggering The CAS 1000 I2C continually verifies compliance to the bus protocol and flags errors when it detects a protocol violation Concurrent with the bus transaction state listings a timing display for both the SCL and SDA signals is depicted showing the edge transition history Debugger Using the Debugger tool the CAS 1000 I2C can be utilized to send and receive individual messages on the IC bus Looping is supported for repeating I O patterns to facilitate external signal observation Storing and restoring files allows saving of received data for post analysis and reuse of previously sent message scripts A callable API library distributed as a Windows DLL further enables access to the DC bus from 3rd party applications outside of the I2C Exerciser GUI Programmer Using the Programmer tool the CAS 1000 I2C can be utilized to perform high speed programming of I C compatible serial EEPROM memory devices with a user interface similar to the Corelis ScanExpress Programmer boundary scan in system programming product Devices can be programmed in system and at maximum programming speed which is typically within several seconds depending on the memory size The Programmer provides options to Erase Program Verify and Read target EEPROM memory The content of the EEPROM memory device can be saved to a file in a supported file format including Motorola S Record In
316. ress Hex AddrType Verified ADC 58 7 bit DAC 18 7 bit PLL 1E 7 bit SLAVE_9A 9A 7 bit SLAVE_AO AO 7 bit Figure 159 Target Slaves Pane Configuration and Preferences 181 Timing Skew Pane The Timing Skew feature enables the analyzer to adjust its waveforms when it communicates with the target using master emulation or the debugger According to the options and values set in this pane shown in Figure 160 the phase between SDA and SCL are caused to shift later or earlier than normal This is a useful deviation from normal bus communications as a means of stressing a particular slave with regard to signal edge timings such as setup and hold times Since such phase shifted signals might violate the bus protocol if the monitor trace capture is running the analyzer may report errors this should be anticipated Furthermore to avoid the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer becoming halted by such protocol corruption and not completing the sending of messages toward the bus the Collision Detection feature must be disabled when Timing Skew is in use This Timing Skew mode is enabled or disabled by selecting one of the radio buttons in this pane If the Normal option is selected there will be no shifting of phase If Setup Time is selected users can specify how long the setup time between the SDA signal edge and the SCL rising edge will be Similarly Hold Time can be selected and specified to control the hold time
317. ress byte NAK d is returned If transaction tracking is disabled an empty string is returned 320 Scripting Language sense discrete level Description Reads the state of the specified discrete I O line Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype sense discrete _level nDiscreteNumber Example Call nStatus sense_discrete_level 1 read the status of discrete I O signal 1 Input Parameters nDiscreteNumber Integer indicating the discrete line to sense 1 or 2 Return Value An integer indicating the value detected 0 for low and 1 for high If sense was unsuccessful 1 will be returned Scripting Language 321 set clock rate Description Overwrites a new hardware setup value for the SCL clock rate of the analyzer when talking on the bus Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype set_clock_rate strKilohertz Example Call set_clock_rate 30 5 set clock rate to 30 5 KHz Input Parameters strKilohertz String containing the clock rate to set in kilohertz The string is presumed to represent a floating point numerical value Return Value The actual clock rate that is set is returned as a string If unsuccessful an empty string is returned The actual clock rate will be rounded to the nearest value in the following list 4 kHz 5 kHz 6 kHz 7 kHz 8 kHz 9 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 30 kHz 40 kHz 50 kHz 60 kHz 70 kHz 80 kHz 90 kHz 100 kHz 150 kHz 200 kHz 250 kHz 301
318. rest is entered along with the replacement text The current script is searched and any occurrences of the search text are substituted with the replacement text 348 Scripting Language Syntax Check Checks the syntax of the current script without executing it The result of the syntax check is displayed in a popup message box If a syntax error is found any line associated with the error will also be marked in the left hand gutter Note that some errors cannot be detected before execution such as function calls with an invalid number of arguments or unexpected argument types Editor Tools Menu The Tools menu provides a path to the major application function windows This is identical to the Monitor Tools Menu selections in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Editor Window Menu The Window menu manages the various windows of DC Exerciser and is identical to the Monitor Window Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Editor Help Menu The Help menu accesses the on line help features and is identical to the Monitor Help Menu shown in the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Scripting Language 349 Editor Tool Bar The Editor Tool Bar provides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Editor window Table 25 describes the tool bar functions Deh BBE 444 Ht VS O Figure 208 Editor Tool Bar Icon Name Function Description O New File Opens a new empty script into the Editor All bookmarks are cle
319. rete signal I O 2 to be an input an output TTL driver or an output open drain driver Source If I O 2 discrete signal is set as an input this setting specifies the source of the signal Selecting Target routes it through the Serial Bus RJ 45 connector on the CAS 1000 I2C Selecting SMB AT2 routes it from the AT2 SMB connector on the CAS 1000 I2C enabling triggers in from external instruments Connecting to a Target 103 Monitor Buffer Options Monitor Buffer Depth The Monitor Buffer Depth setting shown in Figure 105 provides a selection of buffer depths in number of transactions This value indicates the number of transactions that occur before the monitor trace is considered to be full Depth 64K e Transactions Z Log to File C Exerciser Tra ss Figure 105 Monitor Buffer Options The transaction depth ranges from 1 K 1 024 to 1 M 1 048 576 transactions Note that this option may be limited by the available RAM in the host PC and requires much more storage in bytes than the actual number of transactions indicated Choosing a large depth may considerably slow down the application when running the monitor if there is not enough memory in the host machine The default of 64 K 65 536 transactions should be adequate for most monitoring needs Monitor Buffer Log to File This option provides continuous logging of trace data to host computer s hard disk and during Run Repetitive monitoring
320. rget 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3 441 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 17 5D 35 OF 3 469 EH Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read m EN EN 3 729 Trigger sit Read C 46 Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 4 694 47 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 3D 63 52 16 4 735 51 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 4 995 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 1F 0E 5 151 54 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 5 960 55 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 5A 5 988 56 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 6 171 57 Tagged Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 33 E7 0B 0B 6 199 X Line 1 Interval A to B 9 422762 ms Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL ISDA 1 0 1 170 2 Figure 43 Monitor Window Trace List in Compact Mode Getting Started 45 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled AN Eile Trace Tools Window Help 8 x gW gt All o A A AS xA YER o Ro Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz VO 1 0 2 Data Byte Hex Time us a 1 Addre Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 0 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1E 5C 34 FA 28 p 6 Addre Analyzer 36 7 Bit Re 107 1 1 287 Monitor 7 Data Target 36 7 Bit Re 104 1 1 51 WARNING 443 Ge 9 Addre Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 1 252 10 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3E 1 280 7 11 Addre Target ADC 7 Bit Write NAK 40
321. ring str2 String which will become the ending of the concatenated string Return Value The new string containing str1 with st r2 concatenated to the end Scripting Language 333 string format Description Returns a string generated from a sequence of arguments and a special format string The parameters for this function are similar to the standard C functions printf and sprintf Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype string format FormatString argl arg2 Example Call nNum 3 nAddr Ox9A str string format Address number d is 0x 02X n nNum nAddr output Address number 3 is 0x9A n print str Input Parameters FormatString The format string is described below argl arg2 etc A variable number of arguments used in the format string Return Values The new formatted string 334 Scripting Language The Format String A format string consists of ordinary characters and also special conversion specifications These conversion specifications are sequences that begin with the percent sign followed by one or more of the following elements in order sign padding precision type 1 sign An optional sign specifier that forces a plus or minus sign to be included when a numeric argument is converted to a string 2 padding An optional padding specifier that indicates the number of character widths that a formatted argum
322. ring process will stop automatically once the buffer becomes full No trigger transaction marker will appear in the trace listing If a trigger event is defined however the monitor will continue to capture new transactions even after the buffer becomes full until the trigger event occurs Old transactions will be thrown out in order to accommodate the new ones once the buffer is full If the trigger event occurs the capturing stops automatically when enough post trigger transactions have been collected to fill the buffer such that the trigger s position in the buffer space reaches that which is specified by the Trigger Buffer Position setting of Early Middle or Late Pre trigger transactions would then constitute a portion of all transactions in the filled buffer equal to at most 15 50 or 85 respectively The percentage of pre trigger transactions is less than this amount when there are not enough transactions collected before the trigger event occurs At any time the capturing of transactions can be stopped by the user in which case the rules for the positioning of the trigger transaction in the buffer space do not apply When DC Exerciser is collecting bus data in Run Repetitive mode occurrence of the trigger event will not cause the capture process to stop The monitor will stop capturing transactions only when the user explicitly invokes the stop command Since the buffer space is limited old transactions will be thr
323. ript is paused or aborted by the user Before script execution begins the user will be prompted to save the file if the script has been modified Il Break Pauses script execution m Stop Completely aborts script execution Am Toggle Breakpoint Adds a breakpoint at a line or removes a breakpoint if one is already set If the line is blank or contains only comments the breakpoint will be applied to the next line of code d Enable Disable If a breakpoint is already set this command enables or disables Breakpoint the breakpoint Jm Enable All Sets the status of all breakpoints to Enabled Breakpoints Cal Disable All Sets the status of all breakpoints to Disabled Breakpoints 272 Script Driven Bus Tester Icon Name Function Description d Clear All Removes all breakpoints from the script Breakpoints ken Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation cu Redo Restores a previously undone editing operation y Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Si Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at a line or removes a bookmark if one is already set A Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor wi
324. ripting Language ssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 285 Ehe IERCH 285 The Essential Syntax Element cccccccesceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeescaeseseeeenseeeeeeeesaeseseeeeneeeeeseaeseseaeenseeeseneeeeeeeas 286 Example Fanpage A E 291 Built in Functions Gummar ccceecceeeeeeeeeeee snes en neeeeeeeeessae sa naee en sneeeaaesasaeesnseaeseaeesseaeseaeeeeneeaeseneesees 292 Built In Functions Detailed Descriptions sccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeesneeseeesneeseeesneeseeeeenenseene 295 Syntax Summary Advanced Users Only ccscccssscssseeeeseeeeeeeeeesneeeneeeeeeneeeseaesnseeeeeseseseaeseeeeeeesneess 339 Built In Script Ed OT a ces ceec aa e a a pra rE eaaa a ar r ra aaaea E aAa eae aah aaa e aaea 343 Chapter 14 Glitch Pattern Injection eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneees 353 Re IEN a E E E 353 Using the Glitch Pattern Editor csecccseeeseseeeeneeeeeeeessaeseseeeensneeeeeeeesaeesaseeeeeeeeseaeseseeeenseeeeeeeesees 354 Adding Glitch Patterns to Master and Slave Emulation c sssessessesseeeseeesseesseesseeesneeeeneeenees 359 Appendix A CAS 1000 I2C Hardware Reference csssecessesseeeeesseseeneeeneeneees 363 Hardware Specifications ai i cs cccccectesiccehaseccesadecstecesteed eoad aoaaa ndan aa eoi eana aai saaeczecnesncehsace cesusdteedecddecnteee 363 Electrical Specifications sr iaie See EES a Aa er Eea E aeien kaeo EES 36
325. rn information from a glitch pattern file gpf to the CAS 1000 This function must be called prior to a glitch injection Depending on the second parameter the trigger will be armed immediately or armed when the ARM_GLITCH keyword is encountered during a send_message operation The actual injection of the glitch happens when the armed trigger condition is met Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype load_glitch strGPFPath bArmGlitch Example Call loads glitch pattern from the simplel gpf file and arms the trigger immediately load_glitch C test simplel gpf TRUE Input Parameters strGPFPath String representing the path to the glitch pattern file gpf to be loaded Must use double backslashes in the path string bArmGlitch Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether to arm the glitch trigger immediately Return Value TRUE loading completed successfully FALSE loading failed 306 Scripting Language load parameters Description Loads all of the hardware setup options from a specified project file These options include those specified in the Settings pane of the DC Exerciser Configuration Manager Used In Test Prototype load_parameters strProjFilePath Example Call load_parameters C MyProject i2c loads the parameters from file C MyProject i2c Input Parameters strProjFilePath A string containing the project file to load parameters
326. ront panel AT Output tracks Discrete UO Buffered copy SMB Trigger Input Signal Connector Standard SMB Front panel AT Signal Hardware Reference 3 3V standard threshold levels 365
327. rovides quick single click access to commonly used commands in the Test window Simply click the tool bar button to perform the specific command It is identical to the Master Emulator Tool Bar The tool bar buttons are shown in Figure 198 and described in Table 22 ose HOP Tl RW di Wi MMe vc A ESP AAA Hey Figure 198 TestTool Bar Icon Name Function Description O New Script Closes the currently open script file and creates a new empty script If the currently open script file contains unsaved modifications a prompt is displayed to save it GG Open Script Loads the content of a previously saved script file into the Script Source text area All breakpoints are removed If the currently open script file contains unsaved modifications a prompt is displayed to save it D Save Script Saves the currently open script to a SCR text file Note that this does not save any set breakpoints or bookmarks H Step Executes the script one line at a time starting with the next unexecuted line T Run To Cursor Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line and stops just before executing the line at the cursor position If a breakpoint is encountered before the cursor execution will pause at the breakpoint gt Run Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line Script execution will continue to the end of the script unless a breakpoint is encountered or the sc
328. rrent timestamp value is also reset to zero Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport unsigned int _cdecl I2C_SetMonitorCallback TXDATAHANDLERPROC TxDataHnadlerProc void pWnd Return Value 1 if successful 0 if failed Parameters nTxDataHnadlerProc Pointer to application defined callback function The definition of callback function is typedef UINT CALLBACK TXDATAHANDLERPROC ULONG ULONGLONG LPARAM The first parameter ULONG is the encoded transaction data See below for the details The second parameter ULONGLONG is the transaction timestamp in nanoseconds The third parameter LPARAM is the pointer to application supplied data pWnd Pointer to application supplied data This pointer is passed to the callback function along with the transaction data and timestamp information Transaction Data Format bit Addr N Address Transaction Type TxType 3 0 NG AN 2 H Data Transaction Type TxType 3 0 0x2 Write Tx 10 Addr 9 EE i LO 4 lu Ett Third Party Application Interface 225 Gi D Si S fas x Ha 3 0 ET T T E r EAR ST Besse SR Pe E e erf eeo ee cl H EE ES es Le fPXTYPE 1 bo oO Q S x a 3 1 Error Transaction Type TxType 3 0 ll O X Ww eo TxType 2 jon TxType 0 ON oh DN 226 Third Party Application Interface I2C_SetRisingEdgeDriveMode Overwrite co
329. rs must remain quiet When performing the SLAVE type measurements CAS 1000 will attempt to read data from a target slave Therefore the slave device must be ready to provide data and the data must include varying rising and falling edges For the MASTER type measurements the target master must produce traffic on the bus continually during the measurement pnData Pointer to the integer data storing measured value The value 1 indicates an error or an invalid out of range measurement Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the detailed error message string Param 208 32 bit unsigned long data holding an optional parameter for the SLAVE and MASTER measurement types For the SLAVE measurement type this value indicates the 7 bit or 10 bit address of the target slave to be measured For 10 bit addresses the MSB of this parameter must be 1 else 0 For the MASTER measurement type it indicates the maximum timeout interval in seconds while awaiting any activities from the target master during the measurements If it is set to 0 the default timeout value of 5 seconds will be used The value of this parameter is not used for the SIGNAL_LEVEL and SYSTEM measurement types Third Party Application Interface 2C_PulseDiscrete Pulses one of the discrete I O signals low for a specified period of time if it is configured as output If discrete 1 is selected and it is configured as tied to the output trigger SMB that signal will b
330. rse only fixes the bus when the analyzer is the master and does not cure slow rise times for target resident masters Finally the above slow rise time issues are strongly affected by analyzer supplied reference voltage and pull up selections which determine when the rising signal reaches the upper threshold to become detected as high This applies when the analyzer is driving the bus The two Bus Signal Threshold values further affect sensitivity to slow busses for either driver of the bus analyzer or target since signal level decision points are adjusted Files Pane When a project is saved an I2C file is created that stores all preferences options and settings for the session Some of the project information however is stored separately from the main DC project file This includes the configuration of trigger conditions stored in a TRG file filters stored in a FIL file and symbols stored in a SYM file Separating this information from the project file allows for it to be easily imported into other projects where the same trigger filter or symbol configuration might be required When a project is saved the Files pane dialog shown in Figure 158 will be automatically populated with any trigger filter or symbol configuration files that are created The Browse button is used to select a file for importing the relevant information from another project Configuration and Preferences 179 Configuration Manager Sub
331. s 90 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Text iv Text 1 WO Programmer 91 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read Data Target 36 7 Bit Read Background 9 Background 1 nd Data Target 36 7 Bit Read Address Target DAC 7 Bit Read caress Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Text v Text 2 u Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Background v ESS EG Analyzer 7 Bit Read Timing View e SDA Signal Me Beginning Marker sl SE q Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write sci signal iv Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write a Corelis Ready DEMO AddiFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 701 70 2 Figure 69 Monitor Window with Alternating Row Colors Getting Started 67 Right click in the trace list and select Go to Trigger from the pop up menu Use the vertical scroll bar on the right side of the trace list to position the line containing the trigger into the middle of the window as shown in Figure 70 os DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled ahi Eile Trace Tools Window Help GN ki E i x vr or RW a Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location Adar Hex AdarType Rw dl NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time mei Wi Ja 33 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 400 Es 2 267 0 j 01101 34 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 403 12 2293 1 altali 35 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 2 476 1 M
332. s encountered before the cursor execution will pause at the breakpoint Run Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line Script execution will continue to the end of the script unless a breakpoint is encountered or the script is paused or aborted by the user Before script execution begins the user will be prompted to save the file if the script has been modified Break Pauses script execution Stop Completely aborts script execution UC Device Emulator 249 Emulated Master Breakpoint Menu The Breakpoint menu shown in Figure 183 contains commands for the manipulation of breakpoints in the current script AN Toggle Breakpoint F9 di Enable Disable Breakpoint dn Enable All W Disable All g Clear All Figure 183 Emulated Master Breakpoint Menu Toggle Breakpoint Adds a breakpoint to the line at the current cursor location or removes a breakpoint if one is already set If the line is blank or contains only comments the breakpoint will be applied to the next line of code Enable Disable Breakpoint If a breakpoint is already set for the line at the current cursor location this command enables or disables the breakpoint Enable All Sets the status of all breakpoints to Enabled Disable All Sets the status of all breakpoints to Disabled Clear All Removes all breakpoints from the script Emulated Master Tools Menu The Tools menu provides a path to the major appl
333. s have completed or been canceled This indicates that measurements have completed and ALL measurement results displayed in the Actual column have been labeled as Passed in the Results column Refer to the description of the Results column for details on what constitutes a pass or fail 278 Parameters Scope This indicates that measurements have completed and that at least one measurement result displayed in the Actual column has been labeled as Failed in the Results column Refer to the description of the Results column for details on what constitutes a pass or fail Parameters Scope 279 Parameter Specification File There can be minimum and maximum values defined for each parameter which establishes a range of acceptable measurement results These minimums and maximums are displayed in the Min and Max columns respectively When N A appears in the column entry it indicates that there is no associated limit If the actual measurement value is outside of the acceptable range the result of the parameter measurement is labeled as Failed Otherwise the result is labeled as Passed For more details on pass or fail results refer to the previous descriptions of the Result Max Min and Actual columns When the Custom mode is selected for the measurements the minimum and maximum values are loaded from the parameter specification file ParameterSpec ini located in the 12C Exerciser installation fol
334. s signal SDA and SCL must rise above from the low state before it is considered to be high This setting applies in general to all monitoring of the bus by the analyzer Default values for these settings are based on the pull up voltage selected in the Voltage dropdown box Bus Signal Threshold Low Level This value establishes the maximum voltage that a bus signal SDA and SCL must drop below from the high state before it is considered to be low This setting applies in general to all monitoring of the bus by the analyzer Default values for these settings are based on the pull up voltage selected in the Voltage dropdown box Auto Detect This button causes the DC Exerciser to check for a voltage on the target bus and automatically select recommended default electrical settings based on its findings Drive Clock Rate Specifies the nominal clock rate of the SCL signal when the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus Note that the UC bus is not of a continuously clocking type since various conditions can stretch the clock or require resynchronization between multiple sources Therefore a constant period is not expected Disable Collision Detection Under normal circumstances when the CAS 1000 I2C drives the bus acting like a master it is required to detect that the signal levels it drives match within a reasonable time what it senses on the bus Failure to detect a match would imply a collision with another master If the bus has excessive capa
335. saction event that determines when the monitor will automatically stop data collection See the Trigger section later in this chapter for more information on Triggers e Cursor A B Each of the two cursors is a special indicator that is used in the timing field to measure time intervals As a cursor is positioned in the timing field the trace listing transaction which occurs nearest to the cursor is marked for reference e Tagged This marker identifies any number of user designated lines of interest Lines in the trace listing can be tagged by double clicking on them making the lines easy to locate both visually and using the Go to Tagged Row function available from the Monitor s Tool Bar or Trace menu Double clicking on a line that is already tagged will clear this marker 106 Bus Traffic Monitor Type This column contains an identifier that indicates one of the two major classes of transactions e Address The UC bus transaction cycle during which a START or repeated START condition leads to the shifting of a transfer address for a target slave device and write or read qualifier onto the bus This action precedes subsequent data byte transfers to the indicated target slave and that data transfer is terminated by either a STOP or repeated START condition The transfer address is shown in the Addr column and the read write qualifier in the R W column e Data The I C bus transaction cycle during which data bytes are conv
336. screte number 1 if successful Parameters nDiscreteNumber The index selecting the discrete to drive either 1 or 2 nLevel If not NULL pointer to sensed value of the output Third Party Application Interface 215 2C_SetBusDriveVol tage Overwrite configuration reference voltage with provided value Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_SetBusDriveVoltage char szVoltage Return Value NULL if I2C_InitHardware was never called otherwise a pointer to a string containing the actual resulting reference voltage closest available to requested Parameters szVoltage The string holding text of the new bus reference level as a floating point decimal value in volts 216 Third Party Application Interface I2C_SetBusHighVoltageThreshold Overwrite configuration high threshold voltage with provided value This supports the hysteresis feature of the analyzer as it monitors the bus and improves noise immunity If a bus signal is currently considered low it must be sensed above this voltage before being switched to high by the analyzer Note that for slow rising busses high parasitic capacitance with Accelerated Rising Edge Drive off the rise time may limit the ability of a driver to achieve a desired clock rate since the top of the pulse may not reach the high threshold before turning around again The threshold levels may also impact proper sensing of the bus since level crossings may occur in
337. script Recent Files Provides a list of recently used project files for quick access Exit Terminates the I2C Exerciser application UC Device Emulator 247 Emulated Master Edit Menu The Edit menu shown in Figure 181 provides commands that apply to the editing of the current script gt Undo Ctrl Z cu Redo Ctrl A Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C DS Paste Ctrl V Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark 8 Previous Bookmark Clear Bookmarks ah Eind Ctrl F Z Replace Ctrl H Syntax Check Figure 181 Emulated Master Edit Menu Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation Redo Restores a previously undone editing operation Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at the line where the cursor is located or removes a bookmark if one is already set Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the script Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end
338. set to run If the script is to be repeated indefinitely the text box will display Forever Current Run Indicates the count of the current iteration This value is incremented at the beginning of each script iteration Status Indicates the current execution status of the script by displaying one of the following Indicates that the script is loaded and ready to execute Indicates that the script is executing Indicates that script execution has been paused Indicates that the script has successfully finished execution At this point it is ready to execute again Indicates that script execution has been user terminated before completion Script Source Displays the content of the script file associated with the emulated master The script can be scrolled through and edited when it is not being executed Syntax highlighting is applied to the script text so that keywords are colored blue comments are colored green and names of built in functions are colored maroon If any changes are made to the script the script file must be saved before it can be executed Right clicking in the script source will display the Emulated Master Source Popup Menu enabling manipulation of breakpoints and bookmarks as well as editing and execution operations The Emulated Master Source Popup Menu is described in the next section Left hand Gutter Displays line numbers and special line indicators such as breakpoint information for the script
339. signal clock rate of the analyzer to the specified value in KHz Sets the static state of the specified discrete I O line SCR SR set_ set_ CG S S rising_edge_drive_mode Sets the rising edge drive mode of the analyzer to the specified value e low_voltage_threshold Sets the low threshold voltage of the analyzer to the specified value in Volts reference_voltage Sets the reference voltage level for analyzer supplied voltage set_voltage_source Sets the bus reference voltage source as either provided by the target or by the analyzer string_compare Returns an integer representing the lexicographical relation between two strings string_concatenate Returns the concatenation of two strings Scripting Language 293 t_pullup_resistance Sets the pull up resistance of the analyzer for both SDA and SCL signals to the specified value in Ohms set_timing_skew Sets the timing skew parameters such as setup time and hold time high_voltage_threshold Sets the high threshold voltage of the analyzer to the specified value in Volts Function Description string_format Takes a formatting string and a variable number of arguments as inputs and returns a formatted string string_substring Finds the first occurrence of a specified substring from within a string and returns the string starting from that point string_to_float Coverts a string decimal repr
340. sitive so test is considered a different identifier than Test Built in Constants TRUE integer value 1 FALSE integer value 0 290 Scripting Language Example Script EEPROM Test Script device info nAddr OxA0 b1l0Bit FALSE test output variables PAGE 00 00 strOutBytes 02 FE 04 FC 00 display output bytes print strOutBytes print n combine page number amp output bytes for sending strTemp string_concatenate PAGE strOutBytes send msg send_message nAddr bl10Bit strTemp TRUE update progress bar 33 progress 33 break needed because EEPROM expects more data to be sent nCount 0 do send 0x00 up to 5 time until ACK strResult send_message nAddr b10Bit 00 TRUE if nCount break while string_compare strResult Address byte NAKed 0 update progress bar 66 progress 66 read back bytes from page 0 send_message nAddr bl0Bit PAGE FALSE strInBytes receive_message nAddr FALSE 5 TRU e display input bytes print strInBytes print n does output match input if string_compare strOutBytes striInBytes print Match n n else print Mismatch n n update progress bar done progress 100 Scripting Language 291 Built in Functions Summary The I2C Exerciser scri
341. slave address and returns it as a string of hexadecimal bytes Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype receive_message nAddress bl0BitAddr nDataCount bStopBit Example Call ceceive 1 byte of data from 0x9A end transaction with STOP bit receive_message 0x9A FALSE 1 TRUE Input Parameters nAddress Integer representing the address of the device to receive from b10BitAddr Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether the address is 10 bit nDataCount Integer representing the number of bytes to read bStopBit Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether to send the STOP bit at the end of the transaction Return Value A string representation of the received data in hexadecimal format in the order of each received byte If address was NAK d the string Address byte NAK d is returned If transaction tracking is disabled an empty string is returned 316 Scripting Language reload glitch Description Reloads previously loaded glitch pattern data to the CAS 1000 This function can be called in place of the load_glitch function if the glitch pattern file intended to be used has already been loaded by an earlier load_gltich function call This function will reuse the glitch pattern data stored in the memory instead of reading it from the physical file Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype reload_glitch bArmGlitch Example Call reloads previously loaded gli
342. specified parameters This function takes a Slave Data File SDF as the source of input data and feeds it to the slave device You may not specify duplicate ID or address with any slaves currently running Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SlaveStartSDF int nID int nAddr int nLoops char szFilename Return Value 1 if successful 0 if error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters nID ID number of the slave to activate Valid numbers are from 1 to 10 Error will occur if a slave with an identical ID number is already running nAdadr Address of the slave device to be emulated Only 7 bit address is valid and the default format is in FE mode You may use I2C_SetFEAddrFormat function to change the format Error will occur if a slave with an identical address is already running nLoops Number of times to loop through the specified data set You may set it to 1 to specify infinite number of loops szFilename Full file path of the SDF file to load 232 Third Party Application Interface I2C_SlaveStop Terminates the slave emulations specified by the ID number Use this function to ensure the slave device is stopped before starting a new emulation session Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_SlaveStop int nlID Return Value 1 if successful 0 if error occurred Call
343. ss Analyzer Go To D 36 Data Target View gt 37 Data Target X Clear T Data 38 Address Target esra 39 Data Target Clear All Tags 40 Data Target Set Tag 41 Data Target Clear Tag 42 Data Target Fil E 43 Screen Anapara en Data Target ZS Trigger N es raze one Tose sgr Address Target Find S Data Analyzer 64 Trace Layout 48 Data Analyzer SS 49 Data Geess geed 50 Data Analyzer Settings F8 51 Address Analyzer Preferences F7 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Sei Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 54 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write Type Location Addr Hex AddrType RAW NAK E Corelis Ready DEMO AddrFormat FE Trace Off Figure 28 Monitor Window Right Click Pop up Menu Selecting Trigger Settings 32 Getting Started The Configuration Manager Trigger setup screen allows the user to specify particular address data value and other miscellaneous event criteria which correspond to the bus transaction of interest The individual fields on this window are described in detail in the Configuration and Preferences chapter In Demo mode the trigger condition is fixed internally and this screen is non functional Click on the Close button to close this screen Configuration Manager Triggers Filters Symbols smBus settings Files V Enable Trigger Trigger Buffer Position Trigger Out wette Early Middle Late Event
344. st computer is required for optimal performance The CAS 1000 I2C does not support USB 1 1 ports IMPORTANT NOTE Do not connect the CAS 1000 I2C to the host PC through a bus powered passive non powered USB hub Bus powered hubs may not provide the CAS 1000 I2C with adequate operating current Corelis does not recommend usage of USB extender cables with the CAS 1000 I2C Software Programmable Voltage Levels and Pull Up Resistors The UC bus reference voltage can be programmed as target driven Target Supplied mode through its own pull ups or as driven from the CAS 1000 I2C Analyzer Supplied mode through instrument pull ups When the CAS 1000 I2C is programmed to source this reference level for both SCL and SDA signals the voltage can be set in 100 mV steps from 0 8V to 5 0V In this case the target pull ups should be removed to prevent contention with the analyzer In addition for the Analyzer Supplied mode reference voltage you can select one of a set of pull up resistors with the same value for both bus signals The resistor values can be set from about 250 to 50K ohms in varying increments The TTL output signal level of the set of discrete I O and trigger lines is programmable from 1 25V to 3 3V in steps of 50 mV Furthermore sensed bus signal high and low threshold levels can each be adjusted supporting the bus hysteresis requirement Default software determined values are provided automatically with user override capa
345. t Offset Add L Jo Read Program Verify Erase Scale 50 us div Corelis Ready UNE AddrFormat FE Trace Off Bus Idle SCL High SD Hab 1 01 High 1 02 High 7 Figure 146 2C Exerciser Programmer Window Component Description Menu Bar Contains the menu bar for the active Programmer window 2 Tool Bar Provides quick single click access to commonly used commands for the active Programmer window 3 Programmer The main Programmer window which allows for programming of CC Window EEPROM devices on the target CC bus Table 12 Programmer Window Areas 162 Bus Traffic Monitor Programmer Menu Bar When the Programmer window is active the Menu Bar contains entries relevant to the Programmer functions including File Tools Windows and Help A description of each menu follows Programmer File Menu The File menu shown in Figure 147 includes commands to load and save projects and programmer configuration files as well as a command to save a dump of the data from a device The commands related the loading and saving of projects are identical to those described earlier for the Monitor Menu Bar TD New Project an gt Open Project K Save Project Save Project As TD New Programmer Configuration File Ctrl N f Open Programmer Configuration File Ctrl 0 Si Save Programmer Configuration File Ctrl s Save Programmer Configuration File As Ki Dump
346. t Bus interface settings Project sub file list Target slave lists o Timing skew settings e All settings from the Preferences dialog including o Monitor colors and options o Debugger options o Programmer options o Address format options e Window sizes and positions of the Monitor Debugger Programmer Emulator Test Parameters Scope and Monitor Run Status windows e Monitor window s layout column settings and trace data file path e Debugger windows send and receive settings including address address types run repetitions number of bytes to read no stop bit options and debugger command file path e Programmer windows configuration file path e Emulation Manager device list and configurations e Test window s script file path Oo 0 0 0 0 0 When you launch the DC Exerciser for the first time either from its shortcut on the desktop or the DC Exerciser program group of the Windows Start menu you are staring with a new project using the application default configuration settings You will notice that in this case the title bar of the main application window displays the project name Untitled as shown in Figure 166 To give a name to your project simply select the Save Project menu item from the File menu and then specify a name and the path for the project file If you want to rename your project at a later time you can choose the Save Project As menu item from the File menu and provide a new file name and path 24 DC Exerciser U
347. t and 1 for the Analyzer Return Value TRUE configuration set successfully FALSE configuration failed Scripting Language 331 string compare Description String comparison helper function Its behavior is similar to the standard string comparison function of the C library strcmp Returns 0 if two strings contain the same contents 1 if the first string is lexicographically before the second and 1 otherwise Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype string compare stril1 str2 Example Call namel John name2 Mary comparision string compare namel name2 comparison will be 1 Input Parameters strl First string for comparison str2 Second string for comparison Return Values 1 str1 comes before st r2 lexicographically 0 str1 is equal to str2 1 str2 comes before str1 lexicographically 332 Scripting Language string concatenate Description String concatenation helper function Its behavior is somewhat similar to the standard string concatenation function of the C library strcat Returns a new string containing the concatenation of the input strings Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype string concatenate strl str2 Example Call bytel bytes 0x40 byte2 bytes 0x01 bytel string _concatenate bytel byte2 stores 4001 in bytel Input Parameters stri String which will become the beginning of the concatenated st
348. t 168 T ble15 DLL COMPONENtS aeta iaaa aen ER a dea kaa aeai aeaa aiae eag 195 T ble16 2C DELS FUNCION ET 198 Table 17 Emulation Manager Areas cccccccceceenceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseneaeeeeseeaeeeseeaaees 237 Table 18 Emulator Tool Bar Functions ssssnssssesesesrinnseeettttrtnnstttttrttttntnttsttttttnnsnrsttE trna nnnnettEnn Ennn ennnen 242 Table 19 Emulated Master Tool Bar Functions cccccceeeeeeecceceeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeesececaeaeeeeeeesesenniaeeeeeess 252 Table 20 Emulated Slave Tool Bar Functions c ccccccceeeeeeeecceceeeeeeececeaeaeeeeeeeseesecencaeeeeeeeeesessnceeeeees 257 Table 21 Test Window Areas atiaeina aiaee aee aeara aaiae ARa ina tiana eiaa dn dna eai naa 262 Table 22 Test Tool Bar FUNCIONS ccccccccceeeeeeeeencae cece tees ceceaeaeeeeeeesesecaaeaeeeeeeeeeesecacaeeeeeeesesensneaeenees 273 Table 23 Built In Scripting Functions 2 0 eee ceeee ee enteee erent ee eee ne ee eet ae ee ee tees ee taeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 294 Table 24 Editor Window Areas sete ee ceeeaaeaeeeeeeeseccaaeaeeeeeeesesecasaeeeeeeeseseesieeeeetees 346 Table 25 Editor Tool Bar Icon Descriptions 2 0 0 2 2 cececceccececeeeeeeeeee cece seen eecsacaeceeeeeeesecacaeeeeeeeeetensnsaeeeeees 351 xi Introduction What this User s Manual Covers This User s Manual was designed to make using your CAS 1000 I2C analyzer and its software easier and more efficient The manu
349. t Read 401 1 1 63 4 761 49 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 400 1 1 52 4 786 50 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 4 16 4811 51 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 4 4 995 52 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 4 1F 5 151 53 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 4 BUSY 5 249 54 Address Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 5 960 55 Data Target PLL 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 5A 5 988 56 Address Target ADC 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 6 171 57 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 33 6 199 58 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 EY 6 224 gt Scale 50 us div AutoFit Line oe Interval A to B 9 422762 ms Sy D Im Corelis Ready DEMO AddFormat FE Trace Off Bus SCL SDA 170 1 70 2 Figure 25 Monitor Window Centered on Trigger Line Getting Started 29 Step 5 View the Trace Data The Monitor window allows the user to examine the captured data in the trace buffer A vertical scroll bar is available on the right edge of the screen for standard positioning of the lines in addition to use of the page up and page down keys Scrolling the display up will show older entries with lower line numbers Scrolling the display down will show newer entries with higher line numbers The oldest entry will be on line one and the newest entry will be on the last line in the trace list Each bus message is displayed as multiple lines in the trace listing and consists of a master address read write cycle followed by one or more data write SDA line driven by a master toward a s
350. t SCL Logical Level SIGNAL_LEVEL Discrete1 Current Disrete1 Logical Level SIGNAL_LEVEL Discrete2 Current Discrete2 Logical Level SIGNAL_LEVEL Vref Reference Voltage mV SYSTEM SDAPullUp SDA Pull up Resistance Ohm SYSTEM SCLPullUp SCL Pull up Resistance Ohm SYSTEM SDAHigh SDA High Voltage mV SYSTEM SCLHigh SCL High Voltage mV SYSTEM SDACap SDA Capacitance pF SYSTEM SCLCap SCL Capacitance pF SYSTEM SlaveSDALow Slave SDA Low Voltage mV SLAVE SlaveThdDAT Slave Data Hold Time ns SLAVE SlaveTsuDAT Slave Data Setup Time ns SLAVE SlaveTrDA Slave SDA Rise Time ns SLAVE SlaveTfDA Slave SDA Fall Time ns SLAVE MasterSDALow Master SDA Low Voltage mV MASTER MasterSCLLow Master SCL Low Voltage mV MASTER MasterThdSTA Master Start Hold Time ns MASTER MasterTsuSTA Master Start Setup Time ns MASTER MasterTsuSTO Master Stop Setup Time ns MASTER MasterThdDAT Master Data Hold Time ns MASTER MasterTSuDAT Master Data Setup Time ns MASTER MasterTbuf Master Bus Free Time ns MASTER MasterFscl Master SCL Frequency Hz MASTER MasterThi Master SCL High Period ns MASTER MasterTLo Master SCL Low Period ns MASTER MasterTrCL Master SCL Rise Time ns MASTER Third Party Application Interface 207 MasterTfCL Master SCL Fall Time ns MASTER MasterTrDA Master SDA Rise Time ns MASTER MasterTfDA Master SDA Fall Time ns MASTER When performing the SYSTEM type measurements there must be no traffic on the bus and all maste
351. t of the transaction when the tracking is on there will be a gap gt 1ms between back to back transactions Also note that when this feature is disabled the receive_message function will not be able to return the bytes read from the target You have to refer to the Monitor s trace list for the data in this case Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype disable _tx_tracking Example Call disable transaction tracking disable _tx_tracking generate multiple transactions with no gaps send_message 0x18 FALSE 00 01 TRUE receive_message 0x18 FALSE 4 TRUE send_message 0x18 FALSE 00 02 TRUE receive_message 0x18 FALSE 4 TRUE re enable transaction tracking enable_tx_tracking Input Parameters None Return Value None Scripting Language 297 enable tx tracking Description Turns on the transmission tracking feature which tracks and verifies transactions generated by the analyzer By default the transaction tracking is enabled at the start of every script run session You may use the disable_tx_tracking function to turn off the feature While the tracking is enabled the read or write transaction generated by the CAS 1000 is tracked until the result is captured and returned by the Monitor If the Monitor is unable to capture the matching transaction from the bus within 2 seconds the transactions wi
352. t slave then that symbolic name will appear in place of the numeric value refer to the Symbols section later in this chapter When using SMBus Mode the address value of each transaction is decoded into the name of the SMBus device if there is a decoding file associated with the address value refer to the SMBus section of this chapter for more information Note that 7 bit C addresses are represented numerically as 8 bit values and their format is dependant on the current address mode setting FE mode or 7F mode Please refer to the Formats section of the Preferences Dialog description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information AddrType This column indicates whether the address value in the Addr column is a 7 bit 10 bit or Hs mode address R W This column indicates the state of the read write bit that is conveyed during an address cycle From this state the direction of data flow is determined relative to the master R signifies that data is read from a target slave and W signifies that data is written to a target slave NAK This column indicates whether a transaction terminated with a not acknowledge NAK If this column entry is blank an acknowledge ACK occurred otherwise it contains the identifier NAK Error This column indicates whether an I C protocol violation has been detected If so the column entry contains the identifier Error otherwise it is blank If a
353. t supply the pull ups for the target When the I2C Exerciser is first used to interact with the bus it will automatically attempt to detect a target reference voltage If a reference voltage is not detected it will prompt you to switch to Analyzer Supplied mode as shown in Figure 99 Connecting to a Target 96 A Target supplied voltage detected NONE Project Settings Target Supplied Voltage 3 30 High Threshold Yoltage 1 80 Low Threshold Voltage 0 907 WARNING A target supplied reference voltage has NOT been detected This may result in an inactive bus which the C4S 1000 12C E cannot drive Do you want to open the Configuration Manager with the recommended Analyzer Supplied voltage settings Select No to continue with the current project settings Figure 99 Analyzer Supplied Voltage Prompt Connecting to a Target 97 Click on the Yes button to allow the application to automatically switch to Analyzer Supplied from the Target Supplied setting and the Configuration Manager will open for you to review the new settings Additionally you can select the desired bus pull up resistance and voltage as well as change the settings described in Case 1 above Note that the Pull up Resistance setting is enabled only when the Analyzer Supplied voltage source is selected as seen in Figure 100 When the CAS 1000 I2C is to supply pull ups examine the following settings 1 Make sure that the Analyzer Su
354. tatus box This indicator is located just above the Arm button and displays the status of the waveform triggering The following can be indicated Indicates that the trigger is not armed This is the initial status of waveform ofr f triggering and also the status to which it returns upon capturing a matching signal edge transition Indicates the trigger is armed and waiting for a signal edge matching the selected trigger conditions 282 Parameters Scope Parameters Scope Window Reference Parameters Scope Menu Bar When the Parameters Scope window is active the menu bar contains entries for File Tools Windows and Help These windows are similar to those described in the Monitor Menu Bar section of the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter Parameters Scope Tool Bar 2 When using the Parameters Scope window the tool bar provides access only to the online help Parameters Scope 283 284 Parameters Scope Chapter 13 Scripting Language I2C Exerciser test scripting language reference Overview The DC Exerciser application enables automatic programmed operations of the CAS 1000 I2C for several distinct behavior types by reading user provided text files The types differ by their application but share many common features The syntax is generally of the same style and format distinguished mainly by which commands they use The built in Editor described later in this chapter assists in script manipulation by providing syntax hig
355. tatus window Close button and the window will close allowing a full view of the Monitor window which shows a portion of the trace buffer content If a user specified trigger is encountered while acquiring bus traffic the trace list will automatically be centered on the transaction that satisfied the trigger condition The Demo Mode data has a matching trigger condition on line 45 as can be seen in Figure 25 45 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled Co S es AN File Trace Tools Window Help amp x oh gt All SS GE Be xe ee or Ro x Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location l Addr Hex AddrType l RW NAK Error KHz Deh I O 2 Data Byte Hex Time us a 34 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 403 1 1 12 2 293 be 35 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 2 476 alu 36 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 14 1 1C 2 632 Monitor 37 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 DONE 2 730 38 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1 3 441 39 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 4 7 3 469 40 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 1 5D 3 494 Debugger 41 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 35 3 520 42 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 OF 3 545 a 43 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 3 729 H Data Target 7 Bit Read 104 3 884 Programmer Sc a To e Address Target 7 Bit Read 402 4 694 47 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bit Read 402 1 1 3D 4 735 48 Data Analyzer 18 7 Bi
356. tch pattern arms the trigger immediately load_glitch C test simplel gpf TRUE initial load from file receive_message 0x18 FALSE 4 TRUE inject glitch reload_glitch TRUE reloading from memory receive_message 0x18 FALSE 4 TRUE inject glitch Input Parameters bArmGlitch Integer TRUE or FALSE indicating whether to arm the glitch trigger immediately Return Value TRUE loading completed successfully FALSE loading failed Scripting Language 317 seed random Description Sets a starting point for the random_integer function This function sets the starting point for generating a series of pseudorandom integers using the parameter value specified If the optional parameter is not specified an unsigned integer representation of the current time will be used instead Call this function before using the random_integer function Used In Master Emulation Test Prototype seed_random nSeedNum Example Call generate and print out 10 random numbers using the seed value of 1234 seed_random 1234 for i 0 i lt 10 i print random_integer print n generate and print out 10 random numbers using current time as the seed value so that the numbers will be different every time we run seed_random for i 0 i lt 10 EFt print random_integer print
357. ted This 7 bit address is displayed in hex according to the current FE or EF display mode The last piece of information is the path to the file containing the protocol decoding information for the device Decoding files for devices that are not built in are provided in the Decoder subfolder of the installation folder The four buttons at the bottom of the window allow the user to manipulate the association list Using the Add button a new device can be associated with an address The Edit button enables alteration of an existing selected association The Remove and Remove All buttons enable deletion of the selected association or the entire list of associations When using the Add or Edit buttons the SMBus Decoder File dialog is displayed as shown in Figure 156 Click on the Browse button to select the decoder file Click on the Update button to have the information from the decoder file automatically filled into the Address and Name fields Click on the OK button to finish or the Cancel button to cancel If the address being associated is a reserved address overriding of the reserved address must be confirmed Other addresses already associated with a device will not be allowed to be re associated until they are removed from the association list SMBus Decoder File rm Choose a file to load then click on Update to load its contents ne Address X Update Figure 156 SMBus Decoder File Dialog SMBus
358. tel Hex and a hex text file format Emulator Using the Emulator tool the CAS 1000 I2C E can be configured to emulate a master or slave device on the target IC bus The behavior of the emulated device is controlled using a sophisticated scripting language that has a simplified C language syntax When emulating a slave blocks of data are defined that will be used in responding to any master transactions When emulating a master the functionality of the Debugger tool is taken to the next level adding conditional branching and schedule control that enables a comprehensive bus and target exercising sequence ranging from simple target initialization to complex behavioral stimulation stressing and evaluation Test Using the Test tool the scripting features available in the Emulator tool are enhanced with the ability to measure and compare target TC bus electrical and timing parameters as well as the faculty to manipulate the GUI elements of the Test window Scripts run with the Test tool manipulate and evaluate the behavior of the target bus and make a go or no go decision on whether performance is within a desired specification reporting back the status and results via the Test window controls Parameters Scope Using the Parameters Scope tool the CAS 1000 I2C E can be utilized to quickly measure and return the basic electrical and timing parameters of the target I C bus without setting up the advanced scripting functions of the
359. ter Data Setup Time MasterFscl Master SCL Frequency 308 Scripting Language MasterThi Master SCL High Period MasterTLo Master SCL Low Period MasterTrCL Master SCL Rise Time MasterTfCL Master SCL Fall Time MasterTrDA Master SDA Rise Time MasterTfDA Master SDA Fall Time nAddress Integer containing the slave address to measure if the parameter is specific to a slave b10BitAddr Integer specifying whether the address is 10 bit This parameter can be omitted causing the default value of FALSE to be used Return Value A string with the measurement results including units and any assumptions made Scripting Language 309 message box Description Displays a string to message box pop up and causes script execution to wait for a user response The message box can either provide an OK button or the Yes and No buttons Used In Test Prototype message box strMessage bYesNo FALSE Example Calls answer message box Do you want to start the test TRUE pops up a window asking the user whether to start test message_box Make sure the bus is quiet now reminds user to keep bus quiet Input Parameters strMessage A string containing the message to display bYesNo An integer indicating whether the Yes and No buttons should be displayed If TRUE displays the Yes and No buttons if FALSE displays the OK button This parameter can be omitted causing the default value of
360. the Max column are gt 10000 ns then the Result column entry will contain Not Tested This is because under these conditions a pass or fail cannot be determined Standard Mode Fast Mode Fast Mode Plus Custom These radio buttons select the PC mode for the parameter measurements When one of the buttons is clicked on the min and max values of the specified mode are used as the pass fail criteria System Master Slave These radio buttons select the source for the parameter measurements When one of the buttons is clicked on the listing of parameters changes to show the associated entries noted previously in the Parameter Column description System parameters include electrical characteristics that apply to the overall bus and should be measured while there is no traffic on the bus The I2C Exerciser will display a reminder message box before taking these measurements Master parameters are measured by observing traffic generated by a target master and each measurement will wait for appropriate traffic before continuing It is recommended that a master be set to produce continual traffic for these measurements The traffic must also meet all of the conditions necessary to complete the measurements including e Rising and falling SDA edges during the address cycle For example generate read or write transactions to slave device address 1010101 e Presence of START repeated START and STOP conditions Parameters Sc
361. the nearly horizontal and noise sensitive final stage of signal rising Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_SetBusHighVoltageThreshold char szVoltage Return Value NULL if I2c_InitHardware was never called otherwise a pointer to a string containing the actual resulting high threshold voltage closest available to requested Parameters szVoltage The string holding text of the new bus high threshold level as a floating point decimal value in volts Third Party Application Interface 217 2C_SetBusLowVol tageThreshold Overwrite configuration low threshold voltage with provided value This supports the hysteresis feature of the analyzer as it monitors the bus and improves noise immunity If a bus signal is currently considered high it must be sensed below this voltage before being switched to low by the analyzer Note that for slow rising busses high parasitic capacitance with Accelerated Rising Edge Drive off the rise time may limit the ability of a driver to achieve a desired clock rate since the top of the pulse may not reach the high threshold before turning around again The threshold levels may also impact proper sensing of the bus since level crossings may occur in the nearly horizontal and noise sensitive final stage of signal rising Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport char _cdecl I2C_SetBusLowVoltageThreshold char szVoltage Return Value NULL if I2C_Init
362. the sent bytes are generated on the bus correctly However this will generate more than 1 ms gap between the transactions In order to eliminate the gap you must disable this option The Echo Sent Data and Abort Message if Address is NAK d options can be enabled only when this option is on 150 Interactive Debugger Echo Sent Data If selected data sent by the CAS 1000 I2C is echoed in the Receive side text box along with all other incoming traffic during the send operation This option is available only when the Track Transaction option is enabled Abort Message if Address is NAK d If selected the debugger aborts sending the message data bytes if the address is NAKed This option is available only when the Track Transaction option is enabled Show Send Command Line Number If selected the debugger script text box will display line numbers in the gutter Interactive Debugger 151 Debugger Window Reference The Debugger window shown in Figure 137 can be opened using the either the Debugger entry in the Shortcut Bar or in the Tools menu Table 8 describes the numbered areas of the I2C Exerciser Debugger window 45 DC Exerciser Untitled Lk File Tools Window Help kakae Receive 18 Da AddrType 7 Bit hd ones o o E No Stop lis Ready LIVE Addfomet FE Trace Off Bus Idle SCL High SDA High 70 1 High 0 2 High Figure 137 DC Exerciser Debugger Window La
363. tion call The actual injection of the glitch happens when the armed trigger condition is met Prototype extern C _ declspec dllexport int _cdecl I2C_LoadGlitch char szGlitchPatternFilePath int bArmGlitch Return Value 1 if successful UH error occurred Call I2C_GetLastStatus function to get the result of the call in a string format including an error message Parameters szGlitchPatternFilePath String representing the path to the glitch pattern file gpf to be loaded This file can be created using the Glitch Pattern Editor tool in DC Exerciser program bArmGlitch Integer 1 TRUE or 0 FALSE indicating whether to arm the glitch trigger immediately The trigger can be armed during the I2C_SendData function call if this parameter is set to FALSE This provides a flexibility of arming the glitch trigger right before the n byte of the data being sent Third Party Application Interface 205 2C_LoadSetup Overwrites all settings from the referenced project i2c file Following are the parameters being loaded LowThresholdVoltageSetting HighThresholdVoltageSetting InterfaceSpeedSetting TolerateSlowRiseTimes DisableCollisionDetection AnalyzerSuppliesBusVoltage BusDriveVoltageSetting BusDrivePullUpSetting SlopeControlMode BufferDepthSetting DiscretellOmode DiscretelDrives_SMB ATI Discrete2I1Omode Discrete2InputSource DiscreteVoltage HiSpeedMode TimingSkewMode TimingSkewSetup
364. tions following an address transaction will be displayed on a single trace listing line Left clicking the column entry will display all of the bytes as an array of hex values in a separate scrollable dialog When using SMBus Mode each data byte value of the transaction is decoded into a text SMBus message if the value is associated in an SMBus decoding file refer to the SMBus section later in this chapter In this mode positioning the mouse pointer over a data column entry will bring up a tooltip containing the entire SMBus message Also left clicking the column entry will display the entire message in a separate scrollable dialog Right clicking on the column heading will display a popup menu that allows selection or de selection of Compact mode SMBus mode or the default Normal mode Time This column indicates the timestamp that is assigned to the beginning time of each transaction Various time display units are supported including nanoseconds microseconds milliseconds and seconds The current time unit is shown in parenthesis in the column heading and right clicking on the column heading will display a popup menu that allows selection of the time unit Timestamps can be displayed in relative mode the time between transactions or absolute mode the accumulative time starting from zero Time zero can also be selected to start at the first transaction or at the Trigger transaction with prior transactions having negative time
365. to execute Indicates that the test is executing Indicates that test execution has been paused Indicates that the test has successfully finished execution At this point it is ready to execute again Indicates that test execution has been user terminated before completion Indicates that an error has been raised by the test script This icon can be activated by calling the built in exit function with a nonzero parameter Indicates that the test had completed execution with a pass condition This icon can be activated by calling the built in exit function with the parameter 0 Script Source Displays the content of the test script file The script can be scrolled through and edited when it is not being executed Syntax highlighting is applied to the script text so that keywords are colored blue comments are colored green and names of built in functions are colored maroon If any changes are made to the test script the test script file must be saved before it can be executed Right clicking in the test plan will display the Test Source Popup Menu enabling manipulation of breakpoints and bookmarks as well as editing and execution operations The Test Source Popup Menu is described in the next section 264 Script Driven Bus Tester Left hand Gutter Displays line numbers and special line indicators such as breakpoint information for the test script The following icons can appear e Indicates an enabled breakpoint O
366. tor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats Trigger Other Text LE e Color Scheme enen WE stenate co rege No Color Owen A Alternate color p Text iv Background B Background 1 C Figure 68 Monitor Window with Updated Cursor A Colors Getting Started After changing the Color Scheme observe the resulting effect as shown in Figure 69 Click on the Use Defaults button to reset all of the options on the Monitor Colors tab back to their default settings Click on the Close button to close the Preferences screen 44 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled e RIES AN File Trace Tools Window Help e x oi bmi amp CoE SR x vm Aar Ro x shortcuts line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us vO 1 D 80 Tagged Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read 81 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read SIRE Monitor eg e Monitor Colors Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats aml 84 Data Target ADC 7 Bit Read Trigger Other isl 85 Data Eror Text ll Color Scheme 86 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write Debugger 87 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Background 88 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write F 89 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write Cursor A ses
367. tores a previously undone editing operation y Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard Ke Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard A Toggle Bookmark Adds a bookmark at a line or removes a bookmark if one is already set 256 UC Device Emulator Icon Name Function Description Next Bookmark Moves the cursor to the next bookmarked line below the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines below the cursor the cursor will be moved to the first bookmarked line from the beginning of the file A Previous Bookmark Moves the cursor to the previous bookmarked line above the current cursor position If there are no bookmarked lines above the cursor the cursor will be moved to the last bookmarked line from the end of the file Clear Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the listing Find Opens a standard text search dialog where the text of interest is entered The current file is searched for the specified text and if found that text is brought into view and highlighted Az Replace Opens a standard text replace dialog where the search text of z i interest is entered along with the replacement text The current file is searched and any occurrences of the search text are substituted with the replacement text Print Prints the current data file Help Provides quick
368. ttern Injection which is used to inject glitches into the target DC bus Appendix A CAS 1000 I2C Hardware Reference This appendix presents a table comparing the features in different versions of Corelis bus analyzers as well as the physical and electrical specifications for the CAS 1000 I2C hardware xiv Introduction Chapter 1 Product Overview CAS 1000 I2C E Bus Analyzer and I2C Exerciser product overview Introduction to DC and SMBus The PC bus was developed by Philips for basic communication between devices It has since evolved increasing in performance and finding many new applications including data transfer and system level command and control As shown in Figure 1 the physical I C bus consists of two bidirectional open drain signals and a common ground The two active signals on the bus consist of a serial data line SDA and a serial clock line SCL each requiring a system voltage reference through a pull up resistor Every device connected to the bus is software addressable by a unique address and masters can operate as master transmitters or as master receivers The I C bus supports a multi master bus methodology including collision detection and arbitration to avoid data corruption if two or more masters simultaneously initiate data transfer Serial 8 bit oriented bidirectional data transfers can be made at up to 100 Kbit s in the Standard mode or up to 400 Kbit s in the Fast mode i IC Device IC Device VDD
369. u Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl X gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Copy Places a copy of highlighted text on the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl C gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Paste Inserts text from the Windows clipboard The lt Ctrl V gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Step Executes the script one line at a time starting with the next unexecuted line Run To Cursor Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line and stops just before executing the line at the cursor position If a breakpoint is encountered before the cursor execution will pause at the breakpoint Run Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line Script execution will continue to the end of the script unless a breakpoint is encountered or the script is paused or aborted by the user Before script execution begins the user will be prompted to save the file if the script has been modified UC Device Emulator 245 Break Pauses script execution Stop Completely aborts script execution Toggle Breakpoint Adds a breakpoint at a line or removes a breakpoint if one is already set If the line is blank or contains only comments the breakpoint will be applied to the next line of code The lt F9 gt keyboard shortcut will also invoke this command Enable Disable Breakpoint If a breakpoint
370. u entry Right click in the trace list and select Go to CursorB from the pop up menu Select the Tools Preferences menu entry and the Preferences dialog will appear By default this screen will be displaying the options on the Monitor Colors tab Move the Preferences screen to the right side of the Monitor window as shown in Figure 65 The Monitor Colors tab affects the various coloring elements of the Monitor window These settings allow the user to change the text and background colors of the trigger and cursor markers the color of the SDA line SCL line and beginning marker lines in the timing display and the normal trace list line coloring scheme Changing any of these settings while the affected element is visible on the screen will result in the immediate update of the color change in the Monitor window 424 DC Exerciser Untitled Monitor Untitled e fe ifs AN Eile Trace Tools Window Help x oi d Wi eh ki EEGEN E Oo x Shortcuts Line Marker Type Location l Addr Hex AddrType RW NAK Error KHz Data Byte Hex Time us 01 a 80 Tagged Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Gras onor 81 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read allt 82 Data Analyzer DAC 7 Bit Read Monitor 83 Address Analyzer ADC 7 Bit Read Monitor Options Debugger Options Programmer Options Formats H 84 Data Target ADC 7 Bit
371. un To Cursor Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line and stops just before executing the line at the cursor position If a breakpoint is encountered before the cursor execution will pause at the breakpoint gt Run Executes the script starting from the next unexecuted line Script execution will continue to the end of the script unless a breakpoint is encountered or the script is paused or aborted by the user Before script execution begins the user will be prompted to save the file if the script has been modified il Break Pauses script execution ea Stop Completely aborts script execution lt i Toggle Breakpoint Adds a breakpoint at a line or removes a breakpoint if one is already set If the line is blank or contains only comments the breakpoint will be applied to the next line of code d i Enable Disable If a breakpoint is already set this command enables or disables Breakpoint the breakpoint Jm Enable All Sets the status of all breakpoints to Enabled Breakpoints w Disable All Sets the status of all breakpoints to Disabled Breakpoints d Clear All Removes all breakpoints from the script Breakpoints I C Device Emulator 251 Icon Name Function Description K Undo Reverts a previously completed editing operation cu Redo Restores a previously undone editing operation y Cut Removes highlighted text and places a copy on the Windows clipboard Copy Pl
372. up voltage source and the analyzer must supply this to activate the bus When this setting is selected both the Voltage and Pull up Resistance settings are enabled Voltage In Analyzer Supplied mode this specifies the voltage to which the bus will be pulled up by the CAS 1000 I2C The user must assure that this level is compatible with the operation of any attached target bus In Target Supplied mode this specifies the voltage level that will be provided by the target so that appropriate bus signal threshold levels can be automatically set Pull up Resistance In Analyzer Supplied mode this specifies the pull up resistor value through which both bus signals SCL and SDA will be pulled up by the CAS 1000 I2C The user should consider the target IC bus capacitance such that the resultant RC time constant will not adversely affect its operation at expected clock rates by producing signal rise times that are too slow Bus Signal Thresholds These settings apply in general to all monitoring of the bus by the analyzer Default values for these settings are based on the pull up voltage selected in the Voltage dropdown box High Level This value establishes the minimum voltage that a bus signal SDA and SCL must rise above from the low state before it is considered to be high Low Level This value establishes the maximum voltage that a bus signal SDA and SCL must drop below from the high state before it is considered to be low Auto
373. urrent data has not yet been saved you will be prompted to save it This prompt can be disabled from the Tools Preferences Monitor Options screen Clear Tagged Rows Removes the tagged status for all lines in the trace buffer Filters Provides direct access to the Filters tab of the Configuration Manager allowing the user to view add edit or remove filters Filter rules qualify data transactions for inclusion or exclusion from the trace listing DI Triggers Provides access to the Trigger tab of the Configuration Manager allowing the user to view or edit the trigger condition The trigger defines conditions to mark a special transaction event in the trace buffer Find Launches the Find dialog allowing the user to search through the trace listing for transactions matching the specified pattern Trace Layout Launches the Trace Layout dialog allowing customization of the trace listing columns Hide Show Monitor Timing Toggles the visibility status of the timing display If you are not interested in viewing the timing data hiding it provides more room in the Monitor window to display additional trace list data Help Provides quick access to the online help topics Bus Traffic Monitor Table 5 Monitor Tool Bar Functions 137 138 Bus Traffic Monitor Chapter 6 Interactive Debugger Debugger window overview and component descriptions The Debugger window provid
374. us devices handling of error conditions and how well these devices recover from the errors By using the DC Exerciser Monitor window to capture bus traffic while injecting errors with the Debugger the effect of these violations can be observed The following are common violations that can be produced with the error injection feature Lengthening shortening of address or data cycle transfer bit count Corruption of the START condition Zero setup or hold time of data relative to clock signal Skipping of address or data cycle acknowledgement bit In addition to forcing errors with the Debugger commands the Timing Skew mechanism of the CAS 1000 I2C can be activated while using the Debugger in order to e Vary the data setup time relative to the clock in 20 nanosecond step increments e Vary the data hold time relative to the clock in 20 nanosecond step increments This signal timing feature stresses the target slaves by phase shifting the data and clock signal transitions over a wide range Refer to the Timing Skew section of the Configuration Manager description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information The target bus can also be electrically stressed by setting the CAS 1000 I2C to supply user programmable interface levels including e Programmable pull up resistance e Programmable output voltage level e Accelerated Rising Edge Drive to force fast signal rise time Employing these features allows further analysis
375. used where an address is expected and a data symbol can only appear in the byte position defined Refer to the Symbols section of the Configuration Manager description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter to learn more about how to define symbols 144 Interactive Debugger Keyword Example Description ADDRESS ADDRESS 3A Indicates that the send address should change to the 7 bit address specified by the following hex value parameter This command modifies the value of the Send side Addr combo box Note that 7 bit IC addresses are represented as 8 bit hexadecimal values and their format is dependant on the current address mode setting FE mode or 7F mode Please refer to the Formats section of the Preferences Dialog description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information ADDRESS10 ADDRESS10 2A5 Same as above but for 10 bit addresses which support values up to 3FF Here the address format mode does not apply ADDRONLY lt comment gt ADDRONLY your comment Sends the address byte only Comments begin with the characters and continue for the remainder of a line lt hex bytes gt 3F 54 7A 8B 22 Ordered set of hexadecimal byte values to send to the target slave using the address specified in the Send side Addr combo box These values may be separated by more than one white space or by new lines NOSTOP 3B 31 NOSTOP 55
376. with each project A new project always begins with the CAS 1000 I2C s factory default settings but a previously saved project configuration file can be opened to load a particular saved setup Important factors to consider when configuring the DC Exerciser include e Whether a target is connected e Whether the target has its own pull up voltage source e Whether the target is expected to exhibit slow signal rise times because of excessively high capacitance or excessively high pull up resistance e Whether the target has a master lacking support for multi master operation e What signal clock rate is supported by the target When the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer is first used to interact with the target bus it checks for a target supplied pull up If a target supplied pull up is detected but the analyzer expects to provide the pull up source then a prompt will be displayed so that the analyzer may be set to not provide the pull up source in order to avoid contention with the target Conversely if no target pull up is detected and the analyzer is not set to provide the pull up source then a prompt will be displayed so that the analyzer may be set to provide the pull up source for the bus 94 Connecting to a Target Scenarios The following scenarios are presented to help you configure the CAS 1000 I2C analyzer to get it up and running in the shortest amount of time Most setup options are found in the Settings pane of the Configuration Manager
377. xecution of the device individually from within the Emulated Master dialog Breakpoints are specific lines in the source code that the user specifies prior to executing the script A breakpoint can be enabled or disabled When the script execution reaches an enabled breakpoint it will stop execution prior to executing that line Depending on what the user chooses the execution can continue onto the next enabled breakpoint or stop entirely Additionally the user can execute the script line by line These features facilitate the debugging of scripts When the Emulated Master dialog is first opened it will perform a preliminary syntax check A notification message box is displayed if a syntax error is detected If a line number is associated with the error that line will also be marked e AAA Emulated Master C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples Read_ATMEL_AT24C04 scr roo a i read 16 pages 21 for 1 0 i lt 16 i 23 write first byte address strByteAddr integer_to_string_hex8 i 16 16 byte incremen send_message nAddr b10Bit strByteAddr bStopBit m receive 16 bytes 28 strRet receive_message nAddr b1l0Bit 16 bStopBit 29 print strRet 30 print n update progress bar progress 100 i41 32 pause for 100 ms 4 Progress Figure 178 Emulated Master Window UC Device Emulator 243 Runs Indicates the number of times that the script is
378. y these popular applications More generally any application which can call DLL routines can invoke the library routines described in this chapter and gain control and visibility of the CAS 1000 I2C resources and the connected I C bus 194 Third Party Application Interface Dynamic Link Library DLL The Dynamic Link Library is comprised of a set of routines which can be invoked in a standard fashion by a user s program Table 15 lists the primary files necessary for using the DLL Component Description I2C_DLL DLL The encapsulated library of TC routines I2C_DLL LIB The import library I2C_DLL_API H C include file containing the required DLL function prototypes Table 15 DLL Components These files are provided in the I2C_DLL subfolder of the DC Exerciser installation folder Additionally all of the BIN and DLL files from the DC Exerciser installation folder are required in order to support the DC DL DL functions As a design reference example of the usage of these DLL functions a GUI test program with source code is also provided The I2C DLL Test subfolder contains the various Microsoft Visual C source code and build files for the test program The executable I2C DLL Test EXE has been precompiled and is also present with the source files Note that the executable file will have to be copied to a location containing all of the above mentioned BIN and DLL files which are required in order to run Table 16 lists and describes t
379. you can drag and drop column headings to change the order that the columns are displayed in Right click on the I O 2 column heading and select Hide Column as shown in Figure 45 Click on the I O 1 column heading and while holding the mouse button down drag the column to just after the Time column heading as shown in Figure 46 and then release the mouse button DC Exercise Untitled in Eile Trace Tools Window Help SN ki SS Bea ECKER GE E 1 Address Target 54 1 1 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 4 Trace Layout 28 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 4 1 1 AutoFit Columns 53 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 1 34 78 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 1 0A 104 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 1 287 i Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 51 443 8 Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 1 1C 541 in Eile Irace Tools Window S E All HERR Ce Xl E wo lE o Line Marker Type Location Addr Hex AddrType R W NAK Error KHz 1O 1 Data Byte Hex Time us 1 Address Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 0 X 2 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 402 1 1E 28 3 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 401 1 5C 53 4 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 400 1 34 78 5 Data Target 54 7 Bit Write 403 1 0A 104 6 Address Analyzer 36 7 Bit Read 107 1 287 i Data Target 36 7 Bit Read 104 1 51 443 7 Bit Read 104 1 1C 541 Figure 46 Dragging Monitor Window Trace List I O 1
380. yout Component Description 1 Menu Bar Contains the menu bar for the active Debugger window Refer to the following Menu Bar section in this chapter 2 Tool Bar Provides quick single click access to commonly used tools for the active Debugger window Refer to the Too Bar section of this chapter 3 Send Section Provides controls for writing to a slave device address on the target bus Refer to the Debugger Send Controls section of this chapter 4 Receive Section Provides controls for reading from a slave device address on the target bus Refer to the Debugger Receive Controls section of this chapter Table 8 Debugger Window Layout 152 Interactive Debugger Debugger Menu Bar When the Debugger window is active the Menu Bar contains entries relevant to the Debugger functions including File Tools Windows and Help A description of each menu follows Debugger File Menu The File menu shown in Figure 138 includes options to load and save projects and debugger command files as well as an option to save debugger data from the Debugger window s Receive section The options related to the loading and saving of projects are identical to those described in the Monitor Menu Bar section of the Bus Traffic Monitor chapter D New Project Open Project K Save Project Save Project As C New Debugger Command File Ctrl N f Open Debugger Command File Ctrl O D Save Debugger Command File
381. ype 7 Bit kdl Run Singe v T No Stop vi ADDRESS MODE FE Zf tutorial script address 2A 33 pause 500 milliseconds address 18 pause 500 address C4 21 30 OD OA Figure 134 Debugger Send Controls Addr This field specifies the TC bus address of the target slave that is being written to An address can be entered as a hexadecimal value or an address symbol may be used if one has been defined for the target slave refer to the Symbols section of the Configuration Manager description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter Additionally the field s dropdown list provides a selection of recently used address values and all of the currently defined address symbols Note that 7 bit C addresses are represented as 8 bit hexadecimal values and their format is dependant on the current address mode setting FE mode or 7F mode Please refer to the Formats section of the Preferences Dialog description in the Configuration and Preferences chapter for more information AddrType This field specifies the bit length of the target slave address The dropdown list allows selection of either 7 Bit or 10 Bit Run This field specifies the number of consecutive times that the Debugger repeats its Send operation A decimal value can be entered here as well as the text single to run just once or continuous to run in a continuous loop until stopped Additionally the field s dropdown list provides a selectio
382. yte of a write message to the emulated slave will produce the stretched acknowledgement bit However the user must assure that enough time 20 ms is allotted between the transactions when the master is repeatedly writing to the slave in order for the clock stretching mechanism to re arm itself You can try the Clock Stretching feature by using the Debugger mode as the I2C bus master and the Slave Emulation mode as the I2C bus slave The following are step by step instructions on how to set and view a slave emulation with clock stretching 1 Start the I2C Exerciser application with the CAS 1000 connected to the host PC Do not attach the target for this example 2 Start the Monitor tool by pressing the F11 key Click on the Yes and Close buttons if prompted for voltage settings Minimize the Run Status dialog 3 Open up the Emulation window by selecting the Emulator menu item from the Tools menu Click on the Add button At the Add Emulated Device dialog set the type to Slave the name to SLAVE1 and the address to 18 Then select the slave_clock_stretching sdf file from the Samples subfolder under the I2C Exerciser s installation folder See Figure 8 17 Close the dialog by clicking on the OK button 258 DC Device Emulator Add Emulated Device ES Type Vaste Name Address Address Type Runs Slave SLAVE1 18 75t oss 1 Script File C Program Files I2C Exerciser Samples slave_clo
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
よこはま笑顔プラン - 横浜市社会福祉協議会 User manual 取扱説明書 - 鶴賀電機 22D-QS001 - Rockwell Automation CAP JUNIOR Presse Manuelle MEMOBUS Ethernet - Pro-face America HMI Store PLA GUICIDAS Autonet In-Car Router User's Manual Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file